Professional Documents
Culture Documents
Manual Fanuc LTD Serie 21 y 210 Modelo B
Manual Fanuc LTD Serie 21 y 210 Modelo B
Manual Fanuc LTD Serie 21 y 210 Modelo B
GE Fanuc CNC
Series 21/210-Model B
Maintenance Manual
Maintenance Manual
Warning
Warning notices are used in this publication to emphasize that hazardous voltages, currents,
temperatures, or other conditions that could cause personal injury exist in this equipment or
may be associated with its use.
In situations where inattention could cause either personal injury or damage to equipment, a
Warning notice is used.
Caution
Caution notices are used where equipment might be damaged if care is not taken.
Note
Notes merely call attention to information that is especially significant to understanding and
operating the equipment.
This document is based on information available at the time of its publication. While efforts
have been made to be accurate, the information contained herein does not purport to cover all
details or variations in hardware or software, nor to provide for every possible contingency in
connection with installation, operation, or maintenance. Features may be described herein
which are not present in all hardware and software systems. GE Fanuc Automation assumes
no obligation of notice to holders of this document with respect to changes subsequently made.
om
This section describes the safety precautions related to the use of CNC units. It is essential that these precautions
be observed by users to ensure the safe operation of machines equipped with a CNC unit (all descriptions in this
section assume this configuration).
CNC maintenance involves various dangers. CNC maintenance must be undertaken only by a qualified
r.c
technician.
Users must also observe the safety precautions related to the machine, as described in the relevant manual supplied
by the machine tool builder.
Before checking the operation of the machine, take time to become familiar with the manuals provided by the
e
machine tool builder and FANUC.
nt Contents
ce
1. DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . s–2
nc
s–1
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS B–62705EN/03
This manual includes safety precautions for protecting the maintenance personnel (herein referred
to as the user) and preventing damage to the machine. Precautions are classified into Warnings and
om
Cautions according to their bearing on safety. Also, supplementary information is described as a
Note. Read the Warning, Caution, and Note thoroughly before attempting to use the machine.
WARNING
r.c
Applied when there is a danger of the user being injured or when there is a damage of both the user
e
being injured and the equipment being damaged if the approved procedure is not observed.
CAUTION
nt
ce
Applied when there is a danger of the equipment being damaged, if the approved procedure is not
observed.
nc
NOTE
.c
The Note is used to indicate supplementary information other than Warning and Caution.
w
s–2
B–62705EN/03 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
WARNING
om
1. When checking the operation of the machine with the cover removed
(1) The user’s clothing could become caught in the spindle or other components, thus
presenting a danger of injury. When checking the operation, stand away from the machine
to ensure that your clothing does not become tangled in the spindle or other components.
r.c
(2) When checking the operation, perform idle operation without workpiece. When a
workpiece is mounted in the machine, a malfunction could cause the workpiece to be
dropped or destroy the tool tip, possibly scattering fragments throughout the area. This
presents a serious danger of injury. Therefore, stand in a safe location when checking the
e
operation.
2. When checking the machine operation with the power magnetics cabinet door opened
nt
(1) The power magnetics cabinet has a high–voltage section (carrying a mark). Never
touch the high–voltage section. The high–voltage section presents a severe risk of electric
shock. Before starting any check of the operation, confirm that the cover is mounted on
ce
the high–voltage section. When the high–voltage section itself must be checked, note that
touching a terminal presents a severe danger of electric shock.
(2) Within the power magnetics cabinet, internal units present potentially injurious corners and
projections. Be careful when working inside the power magnetics cabinet.
nc
3. Never attempt to machine a workpiece without first checking the operation of the machine.
Before starting a production run, ensure that the machine is operating correctly by performing
a trial run using, for example, the single block, feedrate override, or machine lock function or
.c
by operating the machine with neither a tool nor workpiece mounted. Failure to confirm the
correct operation of the machine may result in the machine behaving unexpectedly, possibly
causing damage to the workpiece and/or machine itself, or injury to the user.
w
unexpectedly, possibly causing damage to the workpiece and/or machine itself, or injury to the
user.
5. Ensure that the specified feedrate is appropriate for the intended operation. Generally, for each
w
machine, there is a maximum allowable feedrate. The appropriate feedrate varies with the
intended operation. Refer to the manual provided with the machine to determine the maximum
allowable feedrate. If a machine is run at other than the correct speed, it may behave
unexpectedly, possibly causing damage to the workpiece and/or machine itself, or injury to the
user.
6. When using a tool compensation function, thoroughly check the direction and amount of
compensation. Operating the machine with incorrectly specified data may result in the machine
behaving unexpectedly, possibly causing damage to the workpiece and/or machine itself, or
injury to the user.
s–3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS B–62705EN/03
WARNING
om
1. Always turn off the power to the CNC and the main power to the power magnetics cabinet. If
only the power to the CNC is turned off, power may continue to be supplied to the serve section.
In such a case, replacing a unit may damage the unit, while also presenting a danger of electric
shock.
r.c
2. When a heavy unit is to be replaced, the task must be undertaken by two persons. If the
replacement is attempted by only one person, the replacement unit could slip and fall, possibly
causing injury.
3. After the power is turned off, the servo amplifier and spindle amplifier may retain voltages for
e
a while, such that there is a danger of electric shock even while the amplifier is turned off. Allow
at least twenty minutes after turning off the power for these residual voltages to dissipate.
nt
4. When replacing a unit, ensure that the new unit has the same parameter and other settings as the
old unit. (For details, refer to the manual provided with the machine.) Otherwise, unpredictable
ce
machine movement could damage the workpiece or the machine itself, and present a danger of
injury.
nc
.c
w
w
w
s–4
B–62705EN/03 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
WARNING
om
1. When machining a workpiece for the first time after modifying a parameter, close the machine
cover. Never use the automatic operation function immediately after such a modification.
Instead, confirm normal machine operation by using functions such as the single block function,
feedrate override function, and machine lock function, or by operating the machine without
mounting a tool and workpiece. If the machine is used before confirming that it operates
r.c
normally, the machine may move unpredictably, possibly damaging the machine or workpiece,
and presenting a risk of injury.
2. The CNC and PMC parameters are set to their optimal values, so that those parameters usually
e
need not be modified. When a parameter must be modified for some reason, ensure that you
fully understand the function of that parameter before attempting to modify it. If a parameter
nt
is set incorrectly, the machine may move unpredictably, possibly damaging the machine or
workpiece, and presenting a risk of injury.
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w
s–5
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS B–62705EN/03
WARNING
om
1. Memory backup battery replacement
When replacing the memory backup batteries, keep the power to the machine (CNC) turned on,
and apply an emergency stop to the machine. Because this work is performed with the power
on and the cabinet open, only those personnel who have received approved safety and
r.c
maintenance training may perform this work.
When replacing the batteries, be careful not to touch the high–voltage circuits (marked and
fitted with an insulating cover).
Touching the uncovered high–voltage circuits presents an extremely dangerous electric shock
e
hazard.
NOTE
nt
ce
The CNC uses batteries to preserve the contents of its memory, because it must retain data such as
programs, offsets, and parameters even while external power is not applied.
If the battery voltage drops, a low battery voltage alarm is displayed on the machine operator’s panel
or CRT screen.
nc
When a low battery voltage alarm is displayed, replace the batteries within a week. Otherwise, the
contents of the CNC’s memory will be lost.
To replace the battery, see the procedure described in Section 2.6 of this manual.
.c
w
w
w
s–6
B–62705EN/03 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
WARNING
om
When replacing the batteries, be careful not to touch the high–voltage circuits (marked and
fitted with an insulating cover).
Touching the uncovered high–voltage circuits presents an extremely dangerous electric shock
hazard.
r.c
NOTE
The absolute pulse coder uses batteries to preserve its absolute position.
e
If the battery voltage drops, a low battery voltage alarm is displayed on the machine operator’s panel
or CRT screen.
When a low battery voltage alarm is displayed, replace the batteries within a week. Otherwise, the
nt
absolute position data held by the pulse coder will be lost.
To replace the battery, see the procedure described in Section 2.6 of this manual.
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w
s–7
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS B–62705EN/03
WARNING
3. Fuse replacement
Before replacing a blown fuse, however, it is necessary to locate and remove the cause of the
blown fuse.
For this reason, only those personnel who have received approved safety and maintenance
training may perform this work.
om
When replacing a fuse with the cabinet open, be careful not to touch the high–voltage circuits
(marked and fitted with an insulating cover).
Touching an uncovered high–voltage circuit presents an extremely dangerous electric shock
hazard.
e r.c
nt
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w
s–8
B–62705EN/03 PREFACE
PREFACE
om
This chapter covers those items, displayed on the screen, that are related
to maintenance. A list of all supported operations is also provided at the
end of this chapter.
2.HARDWARE
r.c
This chapter covers hardware–related items, including the hardware
configuration, connection, and NC status indicated on printed circuit
boards. A list of all units is also provided as well as an explanation of how
e
to replace each unit.
5.DIGITAL SERVO
This chapter describes the servo tuning screen and how to adjust the
.c
7.TROUBLESHOOTING
w
APPENDIX
p–1
PREFACE B–62705EN/03
Applicable models This manual can be used with the following models. The abbreviated
names may be used.
Product Name Abbreviations Software series (Specification)
om
Control unit B Series 21 DEA1(A02B–0219–H501#DEA1)
(Control unit B)
FANUC Series 210–TB Control unit B 210–TB Series 210 DEA1(A02B–0219–H501#DEA1)
NOTE
Some function described in this manual may not be applied
r.c
to some products.
For details, refer to the DESCRIPTIONS (B–62702EN).
e
Related manuals The table below lists manuals related to MODEL B of Series 21, Series,
Series 210.
nt
In the table, this manual is marked with an asterisk(*).
p–2
B–62705EN/03 Table of Contents
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . s–1
PREFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . p–1
om
1.2.2 System Monitor Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
1.2.3 Slot Status Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
1.2.4 Setting Module Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
1.2.5 Configuration Display of Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
1.3 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
1.3.1 Display Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
r.c
1.3.2 Configuration of PCBs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
1.3.3 Software Configuration Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
1.3.4 Module Configuration Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
1.4 ALARM HISTORY SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
e
1.4.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
1.4.2 Screen Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
1.4.3 Clearing Alarm History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
1.5
1.4.4 nt
Alarm Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EXTERNAL OPERATOR MESSAGES RECORD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.5.1 Screen Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
27
28
28
ce
1.5.2 Deletion of External Operator Messages Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
1.5.3 Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
1.5.4 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
1.6 OPERATION HISTORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
nc
c–1
Table of Contents B–62705EN/03
om
1.16.2 Keys Used for Operation on the Set–Up Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
1.16.3 How to Begin the “Set–Up” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
1.16.4 How to End the “Set–Up” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
1.17 BIOS SETUP OF INTELLIGENT TERMINALS 1 AND 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
1.17.1 BIOS Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
1.17.2 Keys Used for Operation on the Set–Up Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
r.c
1.17.3 How to Begin the Set–Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
1.17.4 Details of the Set–up Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
1.17.5 How to End the Set–up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
2. HARDWARE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
e
2.1 GENERAL OF HANDWARE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
2.2
2.2.2
nt
CONFIGURATION OF PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD AND LED DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2.1 Main PCB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I/O Printed Circuit Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
106
106
113
2.2.3 Power Supply Printed Circuit Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
ce
2.2.4 Option 1 Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
2.2.5 Loader Control Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
2.2.6 HSSB Interface Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
2.2.6.1 Parts layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
nc
c–2
B–62705EN/03 Table of Contents
2.6.3 Replacing Batteries for Absolute Pulse Coder (α series servo amplifier module) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
2.6.4 Replacing the Battery for New MMC–IV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
2.6.5 Replacing the Battery for Intelligent Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
2.7 REPLACING THE FAN MOTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
2.7.1 Replacing the Fan Motor for Control Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
2.7.2 Replacing the Fan for Intelligent Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
2.8 REPLACING THE LCD BACKLIGHT FOR DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
2.9 ADJUSTING THE FLAT DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
2.9.1 Adjusting the Color Liquid Crystal Display and Plasma Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
2.9.2 How to Replace the Monochrome Liquid Crystal Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
om
2.10 MAINTENANCE OF HEAT PIPE TYPE HEAT EXCHANGER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
2.11 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
2.12 POWER SUPPLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
2.13 ACTION AGAINST NOISE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
2.13.1 Separating Signal Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
r.c
2.13.2 Ground . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
2.13.3 Connecting the Signal Ground (SG) of the Control unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
2.13.4 Noise Suppressor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
2.13.5 Cable Clamp and Shield Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
e
3. INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
3.1 SETTING PARAMETERS FOR INPUT/OUTPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
3.2
3.2.2
nt
INPUTTING/ OUTPUTTING DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.1 Confirming the Parameters Required for Data Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Outputting CNC Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
178
178
179
ce
3.2.3 Outputting PMC Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
3.2.4 Outputting Pitch Error Compensation Amount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
3.2.5 Outputting Custom Macro Variable Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
3.2.6 Outputting Tool Compensation Amount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
nc
c–3
Table of Contents B–62705EN/03
om
5.2 SERVO TUNING SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
5.2.1 Parameter Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
5.2.2 Displaying Servo Tuning Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
5.3 ADJUSTING REFERENCE POSITION (DOG METHOD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
5.3.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
r.c
5.4 DOGLESS REFERENCE POSITION SETTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
5.4.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
5.4.2 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
5.4.3 Associated Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
e
6. AC SPINDLE (SERIAL INTERFACE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
6.1 AC SPINDLE (SERIAL INTERFACE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
6.1.1
nt
Outline of Spindle Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.1.1.1 Method A of Gear Change for Machining Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.1.1.2 Method B of Gear Change for Machining Center(PRM 3705#2=1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
258
259
259
ce
6.1.1.3 For Lathe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
6.1.2 Spindle Setting and Tuning Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
6.1.2.1 Display method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
nc
7. TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
w
c–4
B–62705EN/03 Table of Contents
om
7.17 ALARM 404 AND 405 (*DRDY SIGNAL TURNED ON) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
7.18 ALARM 410 (EXCESSIVE POSITION ERROR AMOUNT DURING STOP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
7.19 ALRAM 411 (EXECESSIVE POSITION ERROR DURING MOVE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
7.20 ALARM 414 (DIGITAL SERVO SYSTEM IS ABNORMAL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
r.c
7.21 ALRAM 416 (DISCONNECTION ALARM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
7.22 ALARM 417 (DIGITAL SERVO SYSTEM IS ABNORMAL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
7.23 ALARM 704 (SPINDLE SPEED FLUCTUATION DETECTION ALARM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
7.24 ALARM 749 (SERIAL SPINDLE COMMUNICATION ERROR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
e
7.25 ALARM 750 (SPINDLE SERIAL LINK CANNOT BE STARTED) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
7.26 ALARM 751, 761 (SPINDLE ALARM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
7.27
7.28
nt
ALARM 700 (OVERHEAT AT CONTROL SIDE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ALARM 900 (ROM PARITY ERROR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
323
324
ce
7.29 ALARM 910 TO 913 (RAM PARITY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
7.30 ALARM 920 AND 921 (WATCH DOG OR RAM PARITY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
7.31 ALARM 924 (SERVO MODULE MOUNTING ERROR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
7.32 ALARM 930 (CPU ERROR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
nc
APPENDIX
w
c–5
Table of Contents B–62705EN/03
C.2.2 Exiting from the System Monitor (Activating the CNC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
C.3 SYSTEM MONITOR FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
C.3.1 Loading a File from a Memory Card into Flash Memory (SYSTEM DATA LOADING Screen) . . . . 372
C.3.2 Listing the Names of the Files Stored in Flash Memory (SYSTEM DATA CHECK Screen) . . . . . . . 374
C.3.3 Deleting a File from Flash Memory (SYSTEM DATA DELETE Screen) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
C.3.4 Outputting a File, Stored in Flash Memory, to a Memory Card (SYSTEM DATA SAVE Screen) . . . 376
C.3.5 Backing up SRAM Data to a Memory Card and Subsequently Restoring Data from a Memory Card
(SRAM DATA BACKUP Screen) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
C.3.6 Deleting a File from a Memory Card (MEMORY CARD FILE DELETE Screen) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
C.3.7 Formatting a Memory Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
C.4 ERROR MESSAGES AND CORRESPONDING CORRECTIVE ACTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
om
D. MEMORY CARD OPERATOR’S MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
D.1 OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
D.2 DISTINCTION OF SUPPORTED CARD AND UNSUPPORTED CARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
D.3 RESTRICTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
r.c
D.3.1 Standard of Memory Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
D.3.2 Kind of Memory Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
D.3.3 Method of Format of Memory Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
D.3.4 File Operation in Flash Memory Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
e
D.3.5 The Capacity of Flash Memory Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
D.3.6 Notice when Flash Memory Card is Formatted with CardPro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
D.3.7 When Flash Memory Card Formatted with BOOT SYSTEM is Used with Each Company Device . . 388
D.4
D.3.8
D.3.9
nt
When Flash Memory Card Formatted with Each Company Device is Used with BOOT SYSTEM . .
Names and Function of Memory Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OPERATING OF MEMORY CARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
388
389
390
ce
D.4.1 Connection of Memory Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
D.4.2 Disconnection of Memory Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
D.5 BATTERY CHANGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
D.5.1 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
nc
c–6
B–62705EN/03 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION
om
1.1 FUNCTION KEYS AND SOFT KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1.2 SCREEN DISPLAYED IMMEDIATELY AFTER
POWER IS TURNED ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
r.c
1.3 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . 24
1.4 ALARM HISTORY SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
1.5 EXTERNAL OPERATOR MESSAGES
RECORD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
1.6 OPERATION HISTORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
e
1.7 HELP FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
1.8 DISPLAYING DIAGNOSTIC PAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
nt
1.9 CNC STATUS DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
1.10 WAVE FORM DIAGNOSTIC FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . 57
1.11 OPERATING MONITOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
ce
1.12 LIST OF OPERATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
1.13 WARNING SCREEN DISPLAYED WHEN
AN OPTION IS CHANGED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
1.14 WARNING SCREEN DISPLAYED
nc
1
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–62705EN/03
1.1 Operations and soft key display staturs for each function key are described
below:
FUNCTION KEYS
AND SOFT KEYS
1.1.1 To display a more detailed screen, press a function key followed by a soft
Soft Keys key. Soft keys are also used for actual operations.
The following illustrates how soft key displays are changed by pressing
each function key.
om
The symbols in the following figures mean as shown below :
: Indicates screens
r.c
: Indicates a soft key(*2)
e
: Indicates a soft key displayed in green (or highlighted).
2
B–62705EN/03 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION
POSITION SCREEN Soft key transition triggered by the function key POS
POS 1.
om
[ABS] [(OPRT)] [PTSPRE] [EXEC]
[RUNPRE] [EXEC]
r.c
[REL] [(OPRT)] (Axis or numeral) [PRESET]
[ORIGIN] [ALLEXE]
e
[RUNPRE] [EXEC]
[ALL]
Current position display
[(OPRT)]
nt
(Axis or numeral) [PRESET]
ce
[ORIGIN] [ALLEXE]
[RUNPRE] [EXEC]
Handle interruption
.c
[RUNPRE] [EXEC]
w
w
Monitor screen
[RUNPRE] [EXEC]
3
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–62705EN/03
PROGRAM SCREEN Soft key transition triggered by the function key PROG
1/2
PROG 2.
om
[PRGRM] [(OPRT)] [BG–EDT] See “When the soft key [BG–EDT] is pressed”
(O number) [O SRH]
(N number) [N SRH]
[REWIND]
[P TYPE]
r.c
[Q TYPE]
[F SRH] [CAN]
(N number) [EXEC]
e
Program check display screen
[CHECK] [ABS]
[REL]
nt
[(OPRT)] [BG–EDT]
(O number)
(N number)
[REWIND]
See “When the soft key [BG–EDT] is pressed”
[O SRH]
[N SRH]
ce
[P TYPE]
[Q TYPE]
nc
[F SRH] [CAN]
(N number) [EXEC]
[CURRNT] [(OPRT)] [BG–EDT] See “When the soft key [BG–EDT] is pressed”
w
[NEXT] [(OPRT)] [BG–EDT] See “When the soft key [BG–EDT] is pressed”
w
w
[RSTR] [(OPRT)] [BG–EDT] See “When the soft key [BG–EDT] is pressed”
4
B–62705EN/03 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION
2/2
(2)
om
Schedule operation display screen
r.c
(Schedule data) [INPUT]
e
nt
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w
5
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–62705EN/03
PROGRAM SCREEN Soft key transition triggered by the function key PROG
1/2
PROG 3.
Program display
om
[PRGRM] [(OPRT)] [BG–EDT] See “When the soft key [BG–EDT] is pressed”
(O number) [O SRH]
(Address) [SRH↓]
(Address) [SRH↑]
[REWIND]
r.c
[F SRH] [CAN]
(N number) [EXEC]
[READ] [CHAIN] (The cursor moves to the end of a program.)
[STOP]
[CAN]
e
(O number) [EXEC]
[PUNCH] [STOP]
nt
[DELETE]
[CAN]
(O number)
[CAN]
(N number)
[EXEC]
[EXEC]
ce
[EX–EDT] [COPY] [CRSR∼] (O number) [EXEC]
[∼CRSR]
[∼BTTM]
[ALL]
[MOVE] [CRSR∼] (O number) [EXEC]
nc
[∼CRSR]
[∼BTTM]
[ALL]
[MERGE] [∼CRSR] (O number) [EXEC]
.c
[∼BTTM]
[CHANGE] (Address) [BEFORE]
[1–EXEC]
[EXEC]
w
6
B–62705EN/03 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION
2/2
(1)
[LIB] [(OPRT)] [BG–EDT] See “When the soft key [BG–EDT] is pressed”
(O number) [O SRH] Return to the program
[READ] [CHAIN]
[STOP]
om
[CAN]
(O number) [EXEC]
[PUNCH] [STOP]
[CAN]
(O number) [EXEC]
r.c
Floppy directory display
e
[DIR] [(OPRT)] [F SRH] (Numeral) [F SET]
[CAN]
nt [READ]
[EXEC]
(Numeral)
(Numeral)
[STOP]
[F SET]
[O SET]
ce
[CAN]
[EXEC]
[PUNCH] (Numeral) [F SET]
(Numeral) [O SET]
[STOP]
nc
[CAN]
[EXEC]
[DELETE] (Numeral) [F SET]
[CAN]
[EXEC]
.c
w
w
w
7
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–62705EN/03
PROGRAM SCREEN Soft key transition triggered by the function key PROG
PROG 4.
Program display
om
[PRGRM] [(OPRT)] [BG–EDT] See “When the soft key [BG–EDT] is pressed”
[MDI] [(OPRT)] [BG–EDT] See “When the soft key [BG–EDT] is pressed”
r.c
[START] [CAN]
[EXEC]
(Address) [SRH↓]
(Address) [SRH↑]
[REWIND]
e
Current block display screen
[CURRNT] [(OPRT)]
nt
[BG–EDT] See When the soft key [BG-EDT] is pressed"
ce
Next block display screen
[NEXT] [(OPRT)] [BG–EDT] See “When the soft key [BG–EDT] is pressed”
nc
[RSTR] [(OPRT)] [BG–EDT] See “When the soft key [BG–EDT] is pressed”
w
w
w
8
B–62705EN/03 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION
PROGRAM SCREEN Soft key transition triggered by the function key PROG
5.
PROG
Program display
om
[PRGRM] [(OPRT)] [BG–EDT] See “When the soft key [BG–EDT] is pressed”
[CURRNT] [(OPRT)] [BG–EDT] See “When the soft key [BG–EDT] is pressed”
r.c
Next block display screen
[NEXT] [(OPRT)] [BG–EDT] See “When the soft key [BG–EDT] is pressed”
e
Program restart display screen
[RSTR] [(OPRT)]
nt
[BG–EDT] See “When the soft key [BG–EDT] is pressed”
ce
nc
PROGRAM SCREEN Soft key transition triggered by the function key PROG
PROG 6.
w
[MDI] [(OPRT)] [BG–EDT] See “When the soft key [BG–EDT] is pressed”
(O number) [O SRH] Return to the program
(Address) [SRH↓]
w
(Address) [SRH↑]
[REWIND]
[LIB] [(OPRT)] [BG–EDT] See “When the soft key [BG–EDT] is pressed”
(O number) [O SRH] Return to the program
9
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–62705EN/03
PROG
PROGRAM SCREEN Soft key transition triggered by the function key
(When the soft key [BG–EDT] is pressed in all modes)
1/2
PROG
7.
Program display
om
[PRGRM] [(OPRT)] [BG–END]
(O number) [O SRH]
(Address) [SRH↓]
(Address) [SRH↑]
[REWIND]
r.c
[F SRH] [CAN]
(N number) [EXEC]
[READ] [CHAIN] (The cursor moves to the end of a program.)
[STOP]
[CAN]
e
(O number) [EXEC]
[PUNCH] [STOP]
nt
[DELETE]
[CAN]
(O number)
[CAN]
(N number)
[EXEC]
[EXEC]
ce
[EX–EDT] [COPY] [CRSR∼] (O number) [EXEC]
[∼CRSR]
[∼BTTM]
[ALL]
[MOVE] [CRSR∼] (O number) [EXEC]
nc
[∼CRSR]
[∼BTTM]
[ALL]
[MERGE] [∼CRSR] (O number) [EXEC]
.c
[∼BTTM]
[CHANGE] (Address) [BEFORE]
[1–EXEC]
[EXEC]
w
10
B–62705EN/03 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION
2/2
(1)
[READ] [CHAIN]
[STOP]
om
[CAN]
(O number) [EXEC]
[PUNCH] [STOP]
[CAN]
(O number) [EXEC]
r.c
Floppy directory display
e
[FLOPPY] [PRGRM] Return to the program
[DIR] nt
[(OPRT)] [F SRH]
[READ]
(Numeral)
[CAN]
[EXEC]
(Numeral)
[F SET]
[F SET]
ce
(Numeral) [O SET]
[STOP]
[CAN]
[EXEC]
[PUNCH] (Numeral) [F SET]
nc
(Numeral) [O SET]
[STOP]
[CAN]
[EXEC]
.c
11
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–62705EN/03
1/2
OFFSET
SETTING
8.
om
[OFFSET] [WEAR] [(OPRT)] (Number) [NO SRH]
[GEOM] (Axis name and numeral) [MEASUR]
(Axis name) [INP.C.]
(Numeral) [+INPUT]
(Numeral) [INPUT]
r.c
[CLEAR] [ALL]
[WEAR]
[GEOM]
[READ] [CAN]
[EXEC]
e
[PUNCH] [CAN]
[EXEC]
Setting screen
[SETING] [(OPRT)]
nt
(Number) [NO SRH]
ce
[ON:1]
[OFF:0]
(Numeral) [+INPUT]
(Numeral) [INPUT]
nc
(Numeral) [+INPUT]
(Numeral) [INPUT]
w
(Numeral) [INPUT]
[PUNCH] [CAN]
[EXEC]
12
B–62705EN/03 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION
2/2
(1)
[OPR]
om
Tool life management setting screen
r.c
(Numeral) [INPUT]
e
Y axis tool offset screen
[CLEAR] [ALL]
[WEAR]
[GEOM]
nc
[READ] [CAN]
[EXEC]
[PUNCH] [CAN]
[EXEC]
.c
(Numeral) [+INPUT]
[SET]
[OFST.B]
13
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–62705EN/03
1/2
OFFSET
SETTING 9.
om
[OFFSET] [(OPRT)] (Number) [NO SRH]
(Axis name) [INP.C.]
(Numeral) [+INPUT]
(Numeral) [INPUT]
[CLEAR] [ALL]
r.c
[WEAR]
[GEOM]
[READ] [CAN]
[EXEC]
[PUNCH] [CAN]
e
[EXEC]
Setting screen
[SETING] [(OPRT)]
nt (Number)
[ON:1]
[NO SRH]
ce
[OFF:0]
(Numeral) [+INPUT]
(Numeral) [INPUT]
(Numeral) [INPUT]
w
[PUNCH]
14
B–62705EN/03 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION
2/2
(1)
[OPR]
om
Tool life management setting screen
r.c
(Numeral) [INPUT]
e
nt
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w
15
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–62705EN/03
SYSTEM SCREEN Soft key transition triggered by the function key SYSTEM
1/3
SYSTEM 10.
Parameter screen
om
[(OPRT)]
[ON:1]
[OFF:0]
(Numeral) [+INPUT]
(Numeral) [INPUT]
r.c
[READ] [CAN]
[EXEC]
[PUNCH] [CAN]
[EXEC]
e
Diagnosis screen
[DGNOS] [(OPRT)]
nt
(Number) [NO SRH]
ce
PMC screen
[BOTTOM]
[SRCH]
[W–SRCH]
[N–SRCH]
.c
[F–SRCH]
[ADRESS]/[SYMBOL]
w
[TRIGER] [TRGON]
[TRGOFF]
[START]
w
[DUMP] [SEARCH]
w
[DPARA]/[NDPARA] [BYTE]
[TRGSRC] [WORD]
[INIT] [D.WORD]
[WINDOW] [DIVIDE]
[CANCEL]
[DELETE]
[SELECT]
[WIDTH]
(1) (2) (3)
(Continued on the next page)
16
B–62705EN/03 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION
[BYTE]
[WORD]
[D.WORD]
[DRARA]/[NDPARA]
[PMCDGN] [TITLE]
[STATUS] [SEARCH]
[ALARM]
om
[TRACE] [T.DISP]/[TRCPRM]
[EXEC]
[PMCPRM] [TIMER]
[COUNTR]
[KEEPRL]
[DATA] [G.DATA] [C.DATA]
r.c
[G.CONT] [G–SRCH]
[NO.SRH] [SEARCH]
[INIT]
[SETTING] [YES]/[MANUAL]/[ROM]
[NO]/[AUTO]/[RAM]
[STOP]/[RUN]
e
[I/O] [EXEC]
[CANCEL]
nt
(No.)
[SPEED] [INPUT]
ce
[INIT]
[MDI]/[ROM]
nc
[SYSTEM]
.c
w
[ON:1]
[OFF:0]
(Numeral) [+INPUT]
(Numeral) [INPUT]
w
[READ] [CAN]
[EXEC]
[PUNCH] [CAN]
[EXEC]
(4)
(Continued on the next page)
17
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–62705EN/03
(4) 3/3
om
Spindle parameter screen
r.c
Waveform diagnosis screen
e
[W.DGNS] [W.PRM]
[W.GRPH] [START]
nt[TIME→]
[←TIME]
[H–DOBL]
[H–HALF]
ce
[START]
[CH–1↑]
nc
[CH–1↓]
[V–DOBL]
[V–HALF]
.c
[START]
[CH–2↑]
[CH–2↓]
[V–DOBL]
w
[V–HALF]
w
w
18
B–62705EN/03 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION
MESSAGE SCREEN Soft key transition triggered by the function key MESSAGE
MESSAGE 11.
[ALARM]
om
Message display screen
[MSG]
r.c
Alarm history screen
e
HELP SCREEN
nt
Soft key transition triggered by the function key HELP
ce
HELP
12.
nc
[PARAM]
w
19
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–62705EN/03
GRAPHIC SCREEN (T series) Soft key transition triggered by the function key GRAPH
GRAPH
13.
Mode 0
[G.PRM] [NORMAL]
om
[(OPRT)]
r.c
GRAPHIC SCREEN (M series) Soft key transition triggered by the function key GRAPH
e
Tool path graphics
GRAPH
nt
ce
Tool path graphics
[PARAM]
[STSRT]
[STOP]
[REWIND]
[CLEAR]
.c
[↓]
w
w
20
B–62705EN/03 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION
1.2
SCREEN DISPLAYED
IMMEDIATELY AFTER
POWER IS TURNED ON
om
(4) PMC control software
When a Series 21 unit that uses A16B–2201–0721 as its main board is used,
software (1) above is first loaded into DRAM for execution at power–up.
When a Series 21/210 unit that uses A16B–2202–0900 as its main board is
used, software (1) is executed in the flash ROM, so that the screen display
r.c
begins from the slot status display described in Section 1.2.3.
In the Series 21, which uses the A16B–3200–0020 main board, (1) is
executed on the EPROM. The screens of Section 1.2.4 and subsequent
sections are displayed immediately after the power is turned on.
e
Loading screen to DRAM
nt
ce
nc
21
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–62705EN/03
0: 01B34000 0:
1: 30464202 1:
om
2: 00504303 2:
3: 3:
4: 4:
5: 5:
… …
r.c
Physical slot number (2ndary side)
e
Module ID of the PCB mounted (*1)
Physical slot number (primary side)
D Module ID ID Name
B3 21–MB (DDA1 series)/210–MB main P.C.B.(A16B–2201–0721)
21–TB (control unit B)/210–TB P.C.B.(A16B–2202–0900)
.c
4A : Remote buffer
53 : Loader control
22
B–62705EN/03 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION
1.2.4
Setting Module Screen
END : Setting
DDA1–01 completed
om
SLOT 02 (0050) : Setting incom-
pleted
Module ID
Slot number
r.c
1.2.5
Configuration Display
e
of Software
nt DDA1–01 CNC control
software
ce
SERVO : 9060–25 Digital servo
OMM : yyyy–yy ROM
PMC : zzzz–zz
Order made
nc
macro/macro
compiler
PMC
.c
w
w
w
23
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–62705EN/03
1.3 After the system has been installed correctly, you can find the PCBs
installed and the softwares integrated on the system configuration screen.
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
SCREEN
1.3.1 (1) Press SYSTEM key.
Display Method
(2) Press soft key [SYSTEM], then the system configuration screen is
displayed.
om
(3) The system configuration screen is composed of three screens and
PAGE
each of them can be selected by the page key PAGE
.
1.3.2
r.c
Configuration of PCBs
D Screen
Software series of mod-
ule with CPU
e
SYSTEM CONFIG (SLOT) PAGE01
nt SLOT MODULE ID
00 01B3 : 40
08 1194 : 5E
SERIES
DDA1
VERSION
0006 Software version
of module with
ce
CPU
nc
Software ID (type)
.c
Module ID
Slot No.
w
94 MMC–IV P.C.B.
AA HSSB interface board
3F Option 1 board (for remote buffer)
82 21–MB (D201 series) main P.C.B.
_ 21–TB (control unit A main P.C.B. (A16B–3200–0020))
24
B–62705EN/03 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION
1.3.3
Kind of software
Software Configuration Software series
Screen
SYSTEM CONFIG(SOFTWARE)
om
LADDER I/OB 0001 Character written on
MACRO BBBB bbbb PMC title screen
GRAPHIC 600L 0001
BOOT 60M2 0001
Character written
on macro compiler
and on CAP.
e r.c
1.3.4 Configuration of the modules displayed on PCB.
Module Configuration
Screen
nt SYSTEM CONFIG(MODULE)
(1)
ce
SLOT 00 MAIN CPU BOARD (2)
FLASH ROM MODULE : 2MB
SPINDLE LSI & SRAM : POS+512KB
MATRIX DI/DO : –––
PMC MODULE : PMP+SLC
nc
(3)
.c
Contents of display
w
NOTE
The displayed information varies with the model and
software series.
25
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–62705EN/03
om
SIC MOUNTED
DI/DO 96/64 Mounted or not, or
type of module
r.c
Hardware configuration
e
nt
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w
26
B–62705EN/03 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION
1.4
ALARM HISTORY
SCREEN
1.4.1 Alarms generated in the NC are recorded. The latest 25 alarms generated
General are recorded. The 26th and former alarms are deleted.
om
1.4.2 (1) Press MESSAGE
key .
Screen Display (2) Press soft key [HISTRY] and an alarm history screen is displayed.
PAGE
(3) Other pages are displayed by PAGE
or key.
r.c
ALARM HISTORY O1234 N12345
97/04/18 20:56:26
506 OVERTRAVEL : +X
97/04/18 19:58:11
e
000 TURN OFF POWER
97/04/18 19:52:45
nt000 TURN OFF POWER
97/04/18 19:48:43
300 APC ALARM : X–AXIS ZERO RETURN REQUEST
97/04/18 18:10:10
ce
507 OVERTRAVEL : +B
Clearing Alarm History (2) Press soft key [(CLEAR], then the alarm history is cleared.
w
1.4.4 When an external alarm (No. 1000 to 1999) or a macro alarm (No. 3000
Alarm Display to 3999) is output, the alarm history function can record both the alarm
w
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3112 EAH
27
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–62705EN/03
om
(2) Press the rightmost soft key .
(3) Press the [MSGHIS] soft key.
PAGE
r.c
MESSAGE HISTORY O1234 N12345
Date, time, and page → 97/04/01 17:25:00 PAGE : 1
Message number → No. ****
e
Display range
nt Up to 255 characters
ce
MEM STRT MTN FIN ALM 17:25:00
[ ][ MSGHIS ][ ][ ][ ]
nc
.c
1.5.2
Deletion of External (1) The recorded external operator message can be deleted by setting the
MMC bit (bit 0 of parameter 3113) to 1.
Operator Messages
w
Pressing the [CLEAR] soft key erases all the records of the external
Record operator message.
(2) The MS1 and MS0 bits (bits 7 and 6 of parameter 3113) specify the
w
28
B–62705EN/03 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION
1.5.3
Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3113 MS1 MS0 MHC
om
the following table:
Number of characters in
MS1 MS0 Number of records
each record
0 0 255 8
0 1 200 10
r.c
1 0 100 18
1 1 50 32
e
Combining the MS1 bit and MS0 bit (bits 7 and 6 of parameter No.
3113) selects the number of records by limiting the number of
characters to be retained as the record of an external operator message.
nt #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
ce
3112 OMH
NOTE
After setting this parameter, briefly turn the power off, then
on again.
.c
w
1.5.4 When the number of an external operator message is specified, the system
Notes starts updating the records of the specified message. The system
w
29
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–62705EN/03
1.6 This function displays the key and signal operations performed by the
operator upon the occurrence of a fault or the output of an alarm, together
OPERATION with the corresponding alarms.
HISTORY This function records the following data:
(1) MDI key operations performed by the operator
(2) Status changes (ON/OFF) of input and output signals (selected signals
only)
(3) Details of alarms
(4) Time stamp (date and time)
om
1.6.1
Parameter Setting #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3106 OHS OHD
r.c
[Data type] Bit
OHD The operation history screen is:
0 : Not displayed.
e
1 : Displayed.
nt
NOTE
For the system software of the following series, the
operation history screen is always displayed, regardless of
ce
the setting of this parameter:
– 21–TB (control unit A)
– 21–MB: Software series D201
nc
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3112 OPH
w
NOTE
When this parameter has been set, the power must be
w
30
B–62705EN/03 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION
3122 Interval at which the clock time is recorded in the operation history
om
only when data is recorded within the corresponding interval.
1.6.2
r.c
Screen Display
D Displaying the operation
(1) Press the SYSTEM
function key.
history
e
(2) Press the continue menu key [ ]. The [OPEHIS] [(OPRT)] soft key
are displayed.
nt
(3) Press the [OPEHIS] soft key twice. The operation history screen is
displayed.
ce
OPERATION HISTORY O1234 N12345
Page : 123
No.DATA No.DATA No.DATA
01 97/06/03 11 F0000.7↑ 21 F0001.0↓
nc
07 G0009.1↑ 17 09:27:49 27 1
08 G0009.2↑ 18 <PROG> 28 2
09 ST↑ 19 <RESET> 29 3
w
10 ST↓ 20 F0000.7↓ 30 4
On the operation history screen, the soft keys are configured as shown
below:
31
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–62705EN/03
(4) To display the next part of the operation history, press the page down
PAGE
om
2) Pressing the [BOTTOM] soft key displays the last page (latest
data).
3) Pressing the [PG.SRH] soft key displays a specified page.
Example) By entering 50 then pressing the [PG.SRH] key, page 50 is
displayed.
r.c
Data displayed on the operation history screen
(1) MDI keys
Address and numeric keys are displayed after a single space.
e
Soft keys are displayed in square brackets ([ ]).
Other keys (RESET/INPUT, for example) are displayed in angle
ntbrackets (< >).
A key pressed at power–on is displayed in reverse video.
1) Function key: <POS>, <PROG>, <OFFSET>, etc.
ce
2) Address/numeric key: A to Z, 0 to 9, ; (EOB), +, –, (, etc.
3) Page/cursor key: <PAGE ↑>, <CUR ↓>, <CUR ←>
4) Soft key: [SF1], [SF2], etc.
nc
G0000.7↑
32
B–62705EN/03 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION
Mode selection signals and rapid traverse override signals are displayed
as indicated below:
Input signal
Name displayed
MD1 ND2 MD4 REF DNC1
0 0 0 0 0 MDI
1 0 0 0 0 MEM
1 0 0 0 1 RMT
0 1 0 0 0 NOMODE
1 1 0 0 0 EDT
om
0 0 1 0 0 H/INC
1 0 1 0 0 JOG
1 0 1 1 0 REF
0 1 1 0 0 TJOG
1 1 1 0 0 THND
r.c
Input signal
Name displayed
ROV1 ROV2
0 0 R 100%
e
1 0 R 50%
0 1 R 25%
nt
1 1
(3) NC alarms
R F0%
ce
NC alarms are displayed in reverse video.
P/S alarms, system alarms, and external alarms are displayed together
with their numbers.
For other types of alarms, only the alarm type is displayed. (No details
nc
are displayed.)
Example) P/S0050, SV_ALM, S_APC_ALM
.c
33
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–62705EN/03
NOTE
The clock time is recorded for a specified interval only when
data is stored within that interval.
om
D Input signal or output
(1) P ress the SYSTEM function key.
signal to be recorded in
the operation history (2) Press the continuous menu key . The [OPEHIS] (operation
r.c
history) soft key is displayed.
(3) Press the [OPEHIS] soft key, then press the [SG–SEL] soft key. The
operation history signal selection screen is displayed.
e
OP_HIS SIGNAL SELECT O1000 N02000
34
B–62705EN/03 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION
1.6.3
Setting the Input Signal (1) On the operation history signal selection screen, press the [(OPRT)]
or Output Signal to be soft key.
Recorded in the OP_HIS SIGNAL SELECT O1000 N02000
Operation History
No. ADDRES SIGNAL No. ADDRES SIGNAL
01 G0004 00000010 11 ********
02 ******** 12 ********
03 ******** 13 ********
om
04 ******** 14 ********
05 ******** 15 ********
06 ******** 16 ********
07 ******** 17 ********
08 ******** 18 ********
09 ******** 19 ********
r.c
10 ******** 20 ********
>
EDIT **** *** *** *** 00:00:00
[ ALLDEL ][ DELETE ][ ON:1 ][ OFF:0 ][ ]
e
(2) Press the cursor key or to position the cursor to a desired
position.
nt
(3) Key in a signal type (X, G, F, or Y) and an address, then press the
key.
INPUT
ce
Example) G0004 INPUT
000000000.
(4) Select the bit to be recorded.
To select all bits of the specified signal address, press the [ON:1] soft
key while the cursor is positioned to 00000000 .
.c
To select a particular bit, position the cursor to that bit by pressing the
cursor key or , then press the [ON:1] soft key. To cancel
w
(6) Pressing the [ALLDEL] and [EXEC] soft keys deletes all data. If the
[ALLDEL] key is pressed by mistake, it can be cancelled by pressing
the [CAN] key.
(7) To delete a selected signal address, position the cursor to the
corresponding position then press the [DELETE] and [EXEC] soft
keys. In the SIGNAL column, asterisks ******** are displayed in
place of the deleted data. In the ADDRES column, the corresponding
position is cleared.
If the [DELET] key is pressed by mistake, it can be cancelled by
pressing the [CAN] key.
35
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–62705EN/03
(8) Pressing the return menu key causes the [OPEHIS] (OPE) soft
key to be displayed again.
D Input signals and output
signals to be recorded in
the history NOTE
1 A cross (×) indicates that a signal will not be recorded. Also,
any signal for which an address is not specified will not be
recorded, either.
2 A circle (f) indicates that a signal can be recorded.
3 A signal indicated by its symbol name will also be displayed
om
by its symbol name.
1. M/T addresses
MT→PMC
r.c
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
X000 f f f f f f f f
to
X127 f f f f f f f f
e
PMC→CNC
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
f f f f f f f f
G000
to
G003
nt f f f f f f f f
ce
G004 f f f f FIN f f f
G009 f f f f f f f f
w
to
G013 f f f f f f f f
w
G014 f f f f f f f f
G015 f f f f f f f f
w
to
G018 f f f f f f f f
G019 RT f f f f f f f
36
B–62705EN/03 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G020 f f f f f f f f
to
G042 f f f f f f f f
G043 f × f × × f f f
om
G045 BDT9 BDT8 BDT7 BDT6 BDT5 BDT4 BDT3 BDT2
r.c
G047 f f f f f f f f
to
G060 f f f f f f f f
f f f f f f f
e
G061 RGTA
G062 f f f f f f f f
to
G099
nt
f f f f f f f f
ce
G100 f f f f +J4 +J3 +J2 +J1
G101 f f f f f f f f
nc
G103 f f f f f f f f
to
.c
G105 f f f f f f f f
G107 f f f f f f f f
w
G109 f f f f f f f f
w
G111 f f f f f f f f
G113 f f f f f f f f
37
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–62705EN/03
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G115 f f f f f f f f
G117 f f f f f f f f
om
G119 f f f f f f f f
G121 f f f f f f f f
to
r.c
G125 f f f f f f f f
e
G127 f f f f f f f f
to
G129
G130
ntf
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
*IT4
f
*IT3
f
*IT2
f
*IT1
ce
G131 f f f f f f f f
G133 f f f f f f f f
G135 f f f f f f f f
to
G255 f f f f f f f f
w
PMC→MT
w
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Y000 f f f f f f f f
to
w
Y127 f f f f f f f f
CNC→PMC
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F000 f f f f f f f f
to
F255 f f f f f f f f
38
B–62705EN/03 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION
om
(2) Press the SYSTEM key, then select the operation history display screen.
(3) Press the soft keys [(OPRT)], , [PUNCH], and [EXEC] in this
order.
The data output to the FANUC Floppy Cassette or FANUC FA Card is
stored under file name OPERATION HISTORY.
r.c
D Input (1) Select EDIT mode.
(2) Press the SYSTEM key, then select the operation history display screen.
e
(3) Press the soft keys [(OPRT)], , [READ], and [EXEC] in this
order.
D Output data format nt
1. MDI/soft key
2. Signal
3. Alarm
ce
4. For extension (date or time)
The header and recorded operation data are output, in this order. The
operation history data is divided into four parts by identifier words. Data
nc
T(identifier word)
T0 : Header
.c
39
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–62705EN/03
1) Header
T 0 C O P E R A T I O N
H I S T O R Y ;
C: Data word
2) MDI/soft key
T 5 0 P 0 to 1 H * * ;
om
P0: Usually
P1: At power–on
H **: Key code (See the following table.)
3) Signal
r.c
T 5 1 P 0 to 6 N 0 to 255 H * * , * * ;
e
P4: Y0000 and above
P6: F0000 and above
N***: DI/DO number
H **: nt
Signal information data (hexadecimal)
4) Alarm
ce
T 5 2 P 0 to 10 N * * * * ;
N****: Alarm number (for P/S alarm, system alarm, and external alarm only)
w
Date T 5 3 P 0 to 1 E 0 D * * * * * * * * ;
Time T 5 3 P 0 to 1 E 1 D * * * * * * ;
P0: Usually
P1: At power–on
E0: Date
E1: Time
D*..*: Data Example) October 29, 1997
D 1 9 9 7 1 0 2 9
40
B–62705EN/03 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION
1 ! 1 A Q
2 ” 2 B R
3 # 3 C S
om
4 $ 4 D T
5 % 5 E U
6 & 6 F V
r.c
7 ’ 7 G W
8 ( 8 H X
e
9 ) 9 I Y
A ; * : J Z
nt
B
(EOB)
+ K [
ce
C ’ < L ¥
D – = M ]
E . > N
nc
F / ? O –
.c
w
w
w
41
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–62705EN/03
(80H to FFH)
8 9 A B C D E F
0 Reset F0
*2 *2
1 MMC F1
*2 *2
2 CNC F2
*2 *2
3 F3
*2
om
4 Shift Insert F4
*2 *2
5 Delete F5
*2 *2
6 CAN Alter F6
*2 *2
r.c
7 F7
*2
8 Cur→ Input POS F8
*2 *2 *2 *2
9 Cur← PROG F9
*2 *2
e
*2
A Cur↓ Help OFFSET
*2 *2 SETTING
nt
B
C
Cur↑
*2
SYSTEM
*2
*2
MESSAGE
ce
*2
D CUSTOM
GRAPH
*1, *2
nc
E Page↓ CUSTOM FR
*2 *2 *2
F Page↑ FL
*2 *2
CUSTOM
GRAPH
CUSTOM
key.
*2:Command key
w
w
42
B–62705EN/03 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION
1.6.5
Notes (1) While the operation history screen is displayed, no information can be
recorded to the history.
(2) An input signal having an on/off width of up to 16 msec is not recorded
in the history. Some signals are not recorded in the history. See
Appendix A.
(3) Once the storage becomes full, old data is deleted, starting from the
oldest record. Up to about 8000 key information items can be
recorded.
om
(4) The recorded data is retained even after the power is turned off. A
memory all clear operation, however, erases the recorded data.
(5) The operation history function cannot execute sampling when the
OHS bit (bit 7 of parameter No. 3106) is set to 1.
(6) Set the date and time on the setting screen.
r.c
(7) The time needed to input and output 6000 operation records at a rate
of 4800 baud is as follows:
Output : About 5 minutes
Input : About 2 minutes and 30 seconds
e
This file corresponds to a paper tape of about 180 m in length.
nt
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w
43
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–62705EN/03
1.7
HELP FUNCTION
1.7.1 The help function displays alarm information, operation method and a
General table of contents for parameters. This function is used as a handbook.
1.7.2
Display Method
om
D Display of help screen
Press HELP key on any screen other than PMC screen, then a help screen
appears. (However, it is not available when PMC screen/CUSTOM
screen is displaying)
r.c
HELP (INITIAL MENU) O1234 N12345
e
2. OPERATION METHOD
3. PARAMETER TABLE
nt
ce
[ALARM] [OPERAT] [PARAM] [ ] [ ]
nc
D Help for alarm (1) When an alarm is generated, press soft key [ALARM], then a help
message of the alarm is displayed.
.c
NUMBER : 010
M’SAGE : IMPROPER G CODE
FUNCTION :
w
ALARM :
A G CODE NOT LISTED IN G–CODE TABLE
IS BEING COMMANDED
ALSO G–CODE FOR FUNCTION NOT ADDED
w
IS BEING COMMANDED
(2) Pressing soft key [OPERAT],(alarm No.), and soft key [SELECT]
in this order, a help message corresponding to the input alarm number
is displayed.
44
B–62705EN/03 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION
D Help for operation (1) Press [OPERAT], then a menu for operation method is displayed.
HELP (OPERATION METHOD) O1234 N12345
1. PROGRAM EDIT
2. SEARCH
3. RESET
4. DATA INPUT WITH MDI
5. DATA INPUT WITH TAPE
6. OUTPUT
7. INPUT WITH FANUC CASSETTE
8. OUTPUT WITH FANUC CASSETTE
om
9. MEMORY CLEAR
r.c
(2) Press [OPERAT], (an item number) and soft key [SELECT], then an
operation method of the item is displayed.
PAGE
Pressing PAGE key PAGE
or displays another pages.
e
HELP (OPERATION METHOD) O1234 N12345
<<1.PROGRAM EDIT>> 1/4 Current
nt DELETE ALL PROGRAMS
MODE :EDIT
SCREEN :PROGRAM
OPR :(0–9999) – (DELETE)
page/ Total
page
ce
DELETE ONE PROGRAM
MODE : EDIT
SCREEN : PROGRAM
OPR :(0+PROGRAM NUMBER) – <DELETE>
nc
[ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [SELECT]
.c
D Parameter table Press soft key [PARAM], then a parameter table is displayed.
w
PAGE
Another screen can be selected by the PAGE key PAGE
or .
45
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–62705EN/03
1.8
DISPLAYING
DIAGNOSTIC PAGE
om
1.8.2
Contents Displayed
r.c
machine does not travel 000 WAITING FOR FIN SIGNAL
in spite of giving a An auxiliary function is being executed.
command 001 MOTION Travel command of cycle operation is being executed.
002 DWELL DWELL Dwell is being executed.
e
003 IN–POSITION CHECK
In–position check is being done.
nt
004 FEEDRATE OVERRIDE 0%
Feedrate override is 0%.
005 INTERLOCK/START LOCK
ce
Interlock or start lock is input.
006 SPINDLE SPEED ARRIVAL CHECK
Waiting for spindle speed arrival signal.
nc
NC is in reset state.
015 EXTERNAL PROGRAM NUMBER SEARCH
w
46
B–62705EN/03 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION
om
Reset button On of MDI
Input of reset & rewind
Servo alarm generation
Switching to other mode, Feed hold
Single block stop
r.c
D State of TH alarm
030 CHARACTER NUMBER TH ALARM
Position of the character that caused TH alarm.
The position is counted from the head.
e
031 TH DATA Data of the character that caused TH alarm.
D Detail of serial pulse
coder
DGN 0202
nt #7 #6
CSA
#5
BLA
#4
PHA
#3
RCA
#2
BZA
#1
CKA
#0
SPH
ce
#0(SPH): Serial pulse coder or feedback cable is faulty.
Counting of feedback cable is erroneous.
#1(CKA): Serial pulse coder is faulty.
nc
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
w
47
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–62705EN/03
om
#5(OVC): Over current alarm
#6(LV): Insufficient voltage alarm
#7(OVL): Overload alarm
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
DGN 0201 ALD EXP
r.c
Overload 0 – – – Motor overheat
alarm
l 1 – – – Amplifier overheat
Disconnection 1 – – 0 Built–in pulse coder (hard)
alarm
l
e
1 – – 1 Disconnection of separated type
pulse coder (hard)
0 – – 0 Disconnection of pulse coder
nt #7 #6 #5 #4
(software)
#3 #2 #1 #0
ce
DGN 0204 OFS MCC LDA PMS
#3(PMS): Feedback is not correct due to faulty serial pulse coder C or feedback
cable.
nc
If the alarm is detected by the servo, the PRM bit (bit 4 of DGN No. 0203)
is set to 1.
w
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0280 AXS DIR PLS PLC MOT
w
#0 (MOT): The motor type specified in parameter No. 2020 falls outside the
predetermined range.
#2 (PLC): The number of velocity feedback pulses per motor revolution, specified in
w
48
B–62705EN/03 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION
D Machine position
DGN 0301 Distance from reference position of an axis in detection unit
om
4 of parameter 1815)
brought to 0 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
DGN 310 DTH ALP NOF BZ2 BZ1 PR2 PR1
#0(PR1): The setting of the following parameters has been changed: Parameters
1821, 1850, 1860, 1861.
r.c
#1(PR2): The setting of the ATS bit (bit 1 of parameter 8302) has been changed.
#2(BZ1): The detected APC battery voltage is 0 V (Inductosyn).
#3(BZ2): The detected APC battery voltage is 0 V (separate position detector).
e
#4(NOF): The Inductosyn output no offset data.
#5(ALP): Before the α pulse coder detects a full single rotation, reference position
nt
establishment by parameters was attempted.
#6(DTH): A controlled axis detach signal/parameter was input.
ce
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
DGN 311 DUA XBZ GSG AL4 AL3 AL2 AL1
detector).
#6(DUA): While the dual position feedback function was being used, the difference
in error between the semi–closed loop side and the closed loop side
w
to the Inductosyn
absolute position
detector 380 Difference between the absolute position of the motor and offset data
DGN
49
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–62705EN/03
om
#0 (SIC) A module required for spindle serial control is
0 : not mounted
1 : mounted
#1 (POS) A module required for spindle analog control is
r.c
0 : not mounted
1 : mounted
#2(SSR) 0 : Spindle serial control is not performed.
e
1 : Spindle serial control is performed.
#3(SS2) 0 : Spindle serial doesn’t control 2nd spindle.
nt
1 : Spindle serial control 2nd spindle.
#4(SAI) 0 : Spindle analog control is not used.
ce
1 : Spindle analog control is used.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
DGN 0408 SSA SCA CME CER SNE FRE CRE
.c
50
B–62705EN/03 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
DGN 0409 SPE S2E S1E SHE
om
#2 (S2E) 0 : 2nd spindle started normally in spindle serial control.
1 : 2nd spindle did not start normally in spindle serial control.
#3 (SPE) In spindle serial control serial spindle parameters
0 : Satisfy start condition of spindle unit
r.c
1 : Do not satisfy start condition of spindle unit
e
DGN 0412 Load meter of 2nd spindle [%]
DGN
DGN
0413
0414
nt Speed meter of 2nd spindle [%]
DGN 0416 Absolute value of synchronization error between 1st and 2nd spindles
51
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–62705EN/03
DGN 455 Instantaneous difference for the move command, calculated in terms of the spindle,
during rigid tapping (signed, accumulated value)
om
[Unit of data] Detection units
DGN 456 Instantaneous difference for the travel error, calculated in terms of the spindle,
during rigid tapping (signed)
r.c
[Data type] Word
[Unit of data] Detection units
e
DGN 457 Width of synchronization error during rigid tapping (maximum value)
0: Not ready
1: Reset state
2: Operation state
w
3: Alarm state
4: Circuit disconnection
D Open CNC
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
DGN 510
This data indicates the internal Open CNC information (not available to
general users).
52
B–62705EN/03 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
DGN 511
This data indicates the internal Open CNC information (not available to
general users).
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
DGN 512 PA1 PA0 BNK THH THL PRA
om
This data indicates the cause of a system alarm that has occurred in Open
CNC.
#0(PRA) 1 : A RAM parity error occurred in shared RAM.
#2(THL) 0 : The temperature of the harddisk of Open CNC is too low.
r.c
1 : Normal
#3(THH) 0 : The temperature of the harddisk of Open CNC is too high.
1 : Normal
e
#4 0 : Normal
1 : An NMI has occurred in HSSB.
nt
#5(BNK) If bit 0 (PRA) is set to 1,
0 : An alarm occurred in the lower half of shared RAM.
1 : An alarm occurred in the upper half of shared RAM.
ce
#6 (PA0) If bit 0 (PRA) is set to 1,
1 : An alarm occurred at an even–numbered address.
#7 (PA1) If bit 0 (PRA) is set to 1,
nc
DGN 521 Total number of retractions made by receiving the overload signal during cutting
after G83 is specified
w
DGN 522 Position on the drill axis from which retraction is started
DGN 523 Difference between the position on the drill axis from which the previous retraction
was started and the position from which the current retraction is started
53
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–62705EN/03
DGN 541 Difference in the position error between the master and slave axes in simple synchro-
nas control
DGN 540 indicates the difference in the position error between the master
and slave axes when a single axis pair is subjected to simple synchronous
om
control. DGN 541 is used when two or more pairs are subjected to simple
synchronous control. The position error is indicated for the master axis.
DGN 540 and 541 indicate values in detection units. They are displayed
only with the M series.
r.c
D Diagnostic data related
to the dual position
feedback function 0550 Closed loop error
e
[Data type] 2–word axis
nt
[Unit of data] Detection units
[Valid data range] –99999999 to +99999999
ce
0551 Semi–closed loop error
54
B–62705EN/03 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION
Semi–closed loop
error (No. 551)
Motor
Command
+ + +
Kp Speed Machine
- + control
-
Servo amplifier
Ps
Conversion
om
coefficients
r.c
(Parameter No. 2080)
- +
e
nt
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w
55
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–62705EN/03
1.9
CNC STATUS ACTUAL POSITION (ABSOLUTE) O1000 N00010
DISPLAY
X 217.940
Y 363.233
Z 0.000
PART COUNT 5
om
RUN TIME 0H15M CYCLE TIME 0H 0M38S
ACT.F 3000MM/M S 0 T0000
r.c
MEM STRT MTN ***
ALM/BAT (Alarm state/
Low battery)
FIN (Waiting for auxiliary
e
funciton finish)
MTN/DWL( Axis travelling/dwelling)
nt – –EMG– –/–RESET–
(Emergency stop/reset state)
STRT/STOP/HOLD/INC
(Start/Stop/Hold state)
ce
Mode display
EDIT/MEM/RMT/MDI/INC
HND/JOG/REF/THND/TJOG
EDIT : Edit mode
nc
56
B–62705EN/03 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION
1.10 Tuning becomes easier by graphically displaying servo error amount and
torque command, etc. (Graphic option is required).
WAVE FORM
DIAGNOSTIC The following two types of waveform diagnosis functions are supported:
FUNCTION (1) One–shot type
The one–shot type waveform diagnosis function can graphically
display, as a waveform, any variation in those data items listed below.
The start of data sampling can be triggered by the rising or falling edge
of a machine signal. This function facilitates the adjustment of the
servo and spindle motors.
om
a. Error, pulse distribution amount, torque, speed, current, and
thermal simulation data for the servo motor of each axis
b. Composite speed for the first, second, and third axes
c. Spindle motor speed and load meter value
r.c
d. On/off state of a machine signal specified with a signal address
(2) Storage type
The storage type waveform diagnosis function enables the storing of
any variation in the data items listed below and, if a servo alarm occurs,
e
the graphical display (as a waveform) of the stored data. The end of
data sampling can be triggered by the rising or falling edge of a
nt
machine signal. This function facilitates the estimation of erroneous
locations. Stored data can be output via the reader/punch interface.
a. Error, pulse distribution amount, torque, speed, current, and
ce
thermal simulation data for the servo motor for each axis
NOTE
1 To output stored waveform data, the optional reader/punch
nc
1.10.1 (1) Set a parameter to utilize the servo waveform diagnostic function.
Setting Parameters #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
w
3112 SGD
57
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–62705EN/03
1.10.2 1. Press the SYSTEM key to display a system screen such as aparameter.
Waveform Diagnostic
Parameter Screen 2. Press the continuous menu key several times, and the soft key
[W.DGNS] is displayed.
3. Press [W.DGNS], then the parameter screen for the waveform
diagnosis is displayed.
Set the necessary data items. Position the cursor to the item to be set,
om
enter the corresponding data, then press INPUT . Data items for which
***** is displayed cannot be set. To assist in data setting, the frame on
the right side of the screen displays help information for that data to which
the cursor is positioned. Help information which cannot fit into a single
frame is split into several pages, which the user can scroll through using
r.c
PAGE
the page keys PAGE
and .
e
GRP CONDITION 100 GRP CONDITION
TRIGGER *******
(ONE–S TYPE)
0:START
1:START&TRG ↑
2:START&TRG ↓
ce
(CH–1) (CH–2) (MEMORY TYPE)
100: DATA OF
DATA NO. 11 22 MEMORY
UNIT 1000 10 1/3
nc
the trigger signal after the [START] key is pressed, samples data
for the specified period, then draws a waveform.
2 : Starts data sampling upon the detection of the first falling edge of
w
the trigger signal after the [START] key is pressed, samples data
for the specified period, then draws a waveform.
(2) Sampling period: Set the period during which data will be sampled.
Valid data range: 10 to 32760
Units: ms
(3) Trigger: Set the PMC address and bit for the signal used to trigger the
start of data sampling, when 1 or 2 is set for the start condition.
58
B–62705EN/03 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION
(4) Data number: The table below lists the numbers of the data items for
which a waveform can be displayed (n = 1 to 4).
Data Description Units
No.
00 Does not display a waveform. –
0n Servo error (8 ms) for the n–th axis (positional deviation) Pulses
(detection units)
1n Pulse distribution for the n–th axis (move command) Pulses
(input increments)
2n Torque for the n–th axis (actual current) % (relative to maxi-
mum current)
om
3n Servo error (2 ms) for the n–th axis (positional deviation) Pulses
(detection units)
5n Actual speed for the n–th axis RPM
6n Command current for the n–th axis % (relative to maxi-
mum current)
7n Thermal simulation data for the n–th axis % (OVC alarm ratio)
r.c
90 Composite speed for the first, second, and third axes Pulses
(input increments)
99 On/off state of a machine signal specified with a signal None
address
10n Actual spindle speed for the n–th axis % (relative to maxi-
e
mum rotation speed)
11n Load meter for the spindle for the n–th axis % (relative to maxi-
mum output)
nt
161 Difference in position error calculated on the spindle
basis
Pulses
(detection unit)
(5) Data units: Weight of data when 1 is specified. The data units are
ce
automatically specified for each data item and need not be set unless
the units must be changed for some reason.
[Valid data range] 1 to 1000
[Unit] 0.001
nc
(6) Signal address: PMC address and bit number. Set in the same way as
that for trigger, when the data number is 99.
.c
w
w
w
59
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–62705EN/03
om
00 Does not display a waveform. –
0n Servo error (8 ms) for the n–th axis (positional deviation) Pulses
(detection units)
1n Pulse distribution for the n–th axis (move command) Pulses
(input increments)
2n Torque for the n–th axis (actual current) % (relative to maxi-
r.c
mum current)
5n Actual speed for the n–th axis RPM
6n Command current for the n–th axis % (relative to maxi-
mum current)
7n Thermal simulation data for the n–th axis % (OVC alarm ratio)
e
(5) Data units: Weight of data when 1 is specified. The data units are
ntautomatically specified for each data item and need not be set unless
the units must be changed for some reason.
[Valid data range] 1 to 1000
[Unit] 0.001
ce
(6) Signal address: Invalid
nc
.c
w
w
w
60
B–62705EN/03 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION
CH1 CH2
1.0 1.0
0.5 0.5
om
0 0
–0. –0.
5 5
–1. –1.
r.c
0 0
[START] [TIME³] [²TIME] [H–DOBL] [H–HALF]
e
2. Press soft key [(OPRT)], then the following soft keys are displayed.
The following three sets of soft keys are displayed by the key.
nt [START] [TIME³] [²TIME] [H–DOBL] [H–HALF]
ce
[START] [CH–1°] [CH–1±] [V–DOBL] [V–HALF]
and 2
5) [H–HALF] : Half the time scale of the waveform of channel 1 and 2
6) [H–DOBL] : Double the height of waveform of channel 1 and 2
w
D Drawing a waveform for The one–shot type waveform diagnosis function draws a waveform for a
one–shot type waveform specified data item in real time as the data is sampled. The sampled data,
diagnosis however, is not stored and thus cannot be output later.
61
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–62705EN/03
Pressing the [SATART] soft key starts data sampling. While sampling
is being performed, SAMPLING blinks at the top of the screen. Once data
sampling has been completed, a waveform is automatically displayed.
CH1 CH2
om
r.c
EDIT **** ******
[START] [TIME³] [²TIME] [H–DOBL] [H–HALF]
e
D Drawing a waveform for To use storage type waveform diagnosis, set 100 for the display start
storage type waveform condition. The maximum data width for storage type waveform diagnosis
diagnosis nt
is 32760 ms. Data must be sampled before starting drawing. The next
page explains sampling in detail.
Pressing the [START] soft key loads stored data. While the data is being
ce
loaded, SAMPLING blinks at the top of the screen. Once the data has
been loaded, a waveform is displayed. The date on which the data was
stored is displayed at the top left of the screen. If the [START] soft key
is pressed while data is being stored, storage is stopped and the waveform
nc
for the data stored up to that point is displayed. The WAVE DIAGNOS.
(MEMORY) screen indicates whether data is being stored.
.c
62
B–62705EN/03 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION
1.10.4 (1) Press the SYSTEM function key. Pressing the menu continuation key
Data Sampling for
displays the [W.DGNS] soft key. Press this soft key to display
Storage Type
the WAVE DIAGNOS. (PARAMETER) screen.
Waveform Diagnosis
(2) Press the [W.MEM] soft key to display the WAVE DIAGNOS.
(MEMORY) screen. The operation selection soft keys appear.
The configuration of the operation selection soft keys is as follows:
om
WAVE DIAGNOS. (MEMORY) O1234 N12345
r.c
MOTION CMD XYZA
CURRENT (%) XYZA
SPEED (RPM) NONE
TORQUE CMD NONE
HEAT SIMLT XYZA
e
SMPL TIME : 2. 0SEC
DATE : MEMORY
Press
.c
[SELECT] [ ] [ ] [ ] [START]
w
[ ] [ ] [PUNCH] [ ] [ ]
w
(4) Using the cursor, set the necessary data items. To set the sampling
w
axes, position the cursor to the data item to be set, enter the names of
the axes for which data will be sampled for that data item, then press
[SELECT] or INPUT . The axis names are displayed to the right of the
data items.
(5) Once the sampling axes have been selected, the sampling period for
each axis is displayed. Subsequently pressing the [START] soft key
starts data sampling.
63
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–62705EN/03
CAUTION
1 Data items for which ***** is displayed cannot be set.
2 To change the sampling axes, enter new axis names then
press the [SELECT] soft key. Pressing the [SLELCT] soft
key without entering an axis name results in no sampling
axis being set.
3 If the sampling axes are changed during data sampling,
data sampling is stopped. In this case, press the [START]
soft key to restart data sampling for the new sampling axes.
om
4 Initially, no sampling axis is set.
r.c
101: Stops data storage upon the issue of a servo alarm or the
detection of the rising edge of the trigger signal.
102: Stops data storage upon the issue of a servo alarm or the
detection of the falling edge of the trigger signal.
e
The maximum stored data width is 32760 ms. If the storage stop
condition is not satisfied within 32760 ms, data is overwritten, starting
ntwith the oldest data.
Parameter No. 3120 can be used to delay data storage being stopped
by a specified period (ms), after the issue of a servo alarm.
ce
(2) Trigger: Set the PMC address and bit for the signal used to trigger the
stopping of data storage, when 101 or 102 is set for the stop condition.
Example) G0007.2: ST signal
(3) Data type: The following table lists the types of data for which a
nc
(detection units)
MOTION CMD Pulse distribution for the n–th axis Pulses
(input increments)
CURRENT (%) Torque for the n–th axis % (relative to maxi-
w
mum current)
SPEED (RPM) Actual speed for the n–th axis RPM
TORQUE CMD Command current for the n–th axis % (relative to maxi-
w
mum current)
HEAT SIMLT Thermal simulation data for the n–th axis %
(OVC alarm ratio)
w
(4) Sampling axis: The axes along which data will be sampled are
displayed.
(5) Sampling period: The sampling period for each axis is displayed.
(6) Date of storage: While data is being sampled, MEMORY blinks in this
field. When data sampling stops, the date at that point appears in this
field.
64
B–62705EN/03 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION
1.10.5 Waveform diagnosis data of servo alarm format can be output to an I/O
Outputting Waveform device, as follows:
Diagnosis Data 1) Select EDIT mode.
(Storage Type) 2) Press the SYSTEM key, then display the WAVE DIAGNOS. (MEMORY)
screen.
3) Press the [W.MEM], , [PUNCH], and [EXEC] soft keys, in this
order.
om
For details of input/output to/from the FANUC Floppy Cassette or FA
Card, see “Output to FANUC Floppy Cassette or FA Card,” below.
r.c
CONDIGION: 100 TRIGGER: G0123.4
e
SPEED (RPM) NONE
TORQUE CMD NONE
nt HEAT SIMLT
SMPL
DATE
XYZA
TIME : 2.0SEC
: 97/01/13 12:15:00
ce
EDIT **** *** *** 12:15:52
[SELECT] [ ] [ ] [ ] [START]
nc
[ ] [ ] [PUNCH] [ ] [ ]
Press
[ ] [ ] [ ] [ CAN ] [ EXEC ]
.c
Press
screen.
3) Open the write protect tab on the floppy disk or card.
w
65
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–62705EN/03
D Directory display The directory in the cassette or card is displayed by means of the
following procedure:
1) Select EDIT mode.
om
The directory is displayed.
D Deleting a file A file stored on a cassette or card is deleted by means of the following
procedure:
1) Select EDIT mode.
r.c
2) Press the PROG function key to select the program screen.
3) Set the write protect switch on the cassette or card to enable writing.
4) Press [FLOPPY].
e
5) Press [DELETE].
6) Enter the file number, then press [F SET].
7)nt Press [EXEC].
The file corresponding to the specified file number is deleted. The
number of each file subsequent to the deleted file is decremented by
ce
one.
nc
.c
w
w
w
66
B–62705EN/03 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION
D Output format In the servo alarm format, the header, date and time, selected axes, and
waveform diagnosis data are output in this order. Data items are identified
by nine identifier words. Output data other than the identifier words
varies with the data type.
T(identifier word)
T0 : Header
T60 : Positional deviation
T61 : Move command
T62 : Actual current
T63 : Actual speed
om
T64 : Command current
T65 : Thermal simulation
T68 : Selected axes
T69 : Date and time
r.c
1) Header
T 0 C W A V E D I A G N O S ;
e
C: Data word
nt
2) Data word
ce
T 6 9 D * * * * * * , * * * * * * ;
T 6 9 D 1 9 9 7 0 6 2 3 , 1 2 1 4 5 9 ;
nc
3) Selected axes
.c
T 6 8 P * * D * * , * * , to * * ,
w
67
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–62705EN/03
T 6 0 D * * , * * , * * , to * * ,
T 6 1 D * * , * * , * * , to * * ,
T 6 2 D * * , * * , * * , to * * ,
T 6 3 D * * , * * , * * , to * * ,
om
T 6 4 D * * , * * , * * , to * * ,
T 6 5 D * * , * * , * * , to * * ,
r.c
D *..*: Waveform diagnosis data x number of axes
NOTE
e
1 Records are classified into header records and data records.
2 ”%” is used as an end–of–record code.
3 Each record starts with an identifier and ends with an end–of–block code.
nt
4 Either the ISO or EIA code system is used.
5 The output code type is specified with parameter ISO (bit 1 of No. 0100). For ISO code,
parameter NCR (bit 3 of No. 0100) is used to specify whether the end–of–block code is <LF>
ce
only, or a sequence of <LF> <CR> <CR>.
6 Parameter NFD (bit 7 of No. 01X1, where X is the channel number) is used to specify whether
a feed code is output before and after the data.
7 No identifier word is output for a data item for which no axis is selected.
nc
1.10.6
Notes (1) Once the storage is full, the oldest data is overwritten.
(2) Stored–type waveform diagnostic data is not lost, even when the
w
68
B–62705EN/03 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION
1.11 Load meter of the servo axis and the serial spindle and the speed meter
can be displayed.
OPERATING
MONITOR
om
3. Press continuous menu key , then soft key [MONI] is displayed.
4. Press the soft key [MONI], then the operating monitor screen is
displayed.
r.c
(LOAD METER)
e
S1: * * * 1500
Z : * * * * * 0%
nt RUN TIME
ACT.F
0H15M
3000 MM/M
PART COUNT 5
CYCLE TIME 0H 0M38S
S 0 T 0000
ce
MEM STRT MTN *** 09:06:35
[ [ ABS ] [ REL ] [ ALL ] [ HNDL ] [ OPRT ]
nc
NOTE
1 The bar graph for the load meter shows load up to 200%.
2 The bar graph for the speed meter shows the ratio of the
current spindle speed to the maximum spindle speed
.c
3111 to 1.
3 The servo axes for their load meters are displayed are set
to parameter No. 3151 to 3154. If parameters 3151 to 3154
w
are all zero, the load meter of the basic axes are displayed.
4 For color display, the bar of the load meter that exceed
w
69
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–62705EN/03
1.11.2
Parameters #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3111 OPS OPM
om
#6(OPS) The speed meter on the operating monitor screen displays:
0 : Spindle motor speed
1 : Spindle speed
r.c
3151 Axis number for which the first servo motor load meter is displayed
3152 Axis number for which the second servo motor load meter is displayed
3153 Axis number for which the third servo motor load meter is displayed
e
3154 Axis number for which the fourth servo motor load meter is displayed
70
B–62705EN/03 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION
1.12
LIST OF
OPERATIONS
Reset
Data Param- Func-
Function protec- eter Mode tion Operation
tion write=1 button
key
om
Resetting run hour [(OPRT)] [RUNPRE]→[EXEC]
– POS
r.c
ON
– P and CAN
e
Registration from MDI
Function
Data
protec-
tion
key
Param-
eter
write=1
nt
Mode
Func-
tion
button
Operation
ce
Inputting MDI or SYSTEM Parameter no.→[NO.SRH]→Data→ INPUT
Yes
parameters E.Stop
(PARAM)
→ PWE =0 → RESET
nc
Inputting offset
OFF – OFFSET
SETTING Offset number→[NO.SRH]→Offset value→ INPUT
values
Inputting setting
OFF MDI OFFSET
SETTING Setting no.→[NO.SRH] or Data→ INPUT
data
.c
Input of PMC
parameters, counter OFF [PMCPRM]→[COUNTR] or [DATA]→Data→ INPUT
and data table MDI or
SYSTEM
w
JOG → OFFSET
→Jog the tool to measuring position
measurement SETTING
OFFSET
SETTING
Offset no.→[NO.SRH]→<AXIS>→[INP.C]
71
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–62705EN/03
om
PROG Heading a file→ O →Program number→[(OPRT)]
→[ ]→[READ]→[EXEC]
r.c
Data Param- Func-
Function protec- eter Mode tion Operation
tion write=1 button
key
Inputting OFF EDIT or [(OPRT)]→[ ]→[READ]→[EXEC]
e
SYSTEM
parameters E.Stop
(PARAM)
Inputting PMC
parameters
OFF nt
E.Stop
SYSTEM
(PMC)
[ ]→[I/O]→(CANNEL NO)
variables INPUT
PROG
w
w
72
B–62705EN/03 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION
om
Output of PMC SYSTEM
parameter
EDIT NAME) [FDCAS] →(KIND OF DATA) [PARAM] → [WRITE]
(PMC)
→ (FILE NO) * 1 INPUT →[EXEC]
[(OPRT)]→[ ]→[PUNCH]→[EXEC]
Output of offset EDIT OFFSET
r.c
SETTING
Output of all
EDIT PROG O →–9999→[ ]→[PUNCH]→[EXEC]
programs
Output of one
→Program no.→[
e
program
EDIT PROG O ]→[PUNCH]→[EXEC]
Data
nc
Param- Func-
Function protec- eter Mode tion Operation
tion write=1 button
key
Searching a MEMORY
program number PROG O →Program no.→[O SRH]
.c
or EDIT
Searching a
sequence number MEMORY PROG Program no. search→ N →Sequence number→[NSRH]
w
Searching an
address word Data to be searched→[SRH↑] or[SRH↓] or
EDIT PROG
w
(cursor key)
Searching an
Address to be searched→[SRH↑] or[SRH↓] or
address only EDIT PROG
w
(Cursor key)
Searching an offset Offset no.→[NO.SRH]
number – OFFSET
SETTING
73
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–62705EN/03
Edit
Data Param- Func-
Function protec- eter Mode tion Operation
tion write=1 button
key
Display of memory [LIB]
EDIT PROG
capacity used
OFF
om
Deleting a program EDIT PROG O →Program no.→ DELETE
r.c
OFF
Deleting a block EDIT PROG EOB → DELETE
OFF
Deleting a word EDIT PROG Searching a word to be deleted→ DELETE
e
OFF
Changing a word EDIT PROG Searching a word to be changed→New Data→ ALTER
Inserting a word
OFF
nt
EDIT PROG
Searching a word immediately before a word to be
Playback
w
PROG
HANDLE → NC data → INSERT → EOB → INSERT
74
B–62705EN/03 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION
Clear
Data Param- Func-
Function prote- eter Mode tion Operation
ction write=1 key
key
Memory all clear
RESET
At M/T : AND DELETE
ower
power
ON Loader is controlled : CAN AND 5
Parameter/offset
clear M/T : RESET
om
At
f Power
ON Loader is controlled : RESET AND 5 (Parameter
only)
Clearing a program
At M/T : DELETE
r.c
f Power
ON Loader is controlled : RESET AND 5
Program under
edition at power – PROG AND RESET
e
off(PS101)
PMC RAM *
At Main CPU : X AND O
nt
Power
ON Loader is controlled : X AND 5
ce
* PMC ladder program is not cleard in FROM.
nc
.c
w
w
w
75
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–62705EN/03
1.13
WARNING SCREEN
DISPLAYED WHEN
AN OPTION IS
CHANGED
D Warning screen This CNC displays a warning screen when the configuration of the
options using the SRAM area is changed. The data for the function
om
indicated on the screen is cleared the next time the system is turned on.
WARNING
r.c
THE FOLLOWING DATA WILL BE CLEARED.
e
PLEASE PRESS <DELETE> OR <CAN> KEY.
<DELETE> : CLEAR ALL DATA
<CAN> : CANCEL
nt
ce
NOTE
nc
76
B–62705EN/03 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION
D Allocation error screen When an option which uses the SRAM area is added, the system software
may require more SRAM than is currently installed in the system. In this
case, an allocation error screen appears the first time the system is turned
on after the addition of the option, thus restoring the state existing before
the addition.
om
PLEASE PRESS <CAN> KEY :
RETURN TO THE STATE BEFORE
OPTION PARAMETER IS CHANGED.
e r.c
nt
NOTE
When the currently installed SRAM is not sufficient,
additional SRAM can be mounted. Newly installed SRAM
ce
must be cleared before it can be used.
Operation:When turning on the power, hold down the
following keys:
O +
nc
DELETE
for M/T series
77
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–62705EN/03
1.14 System software can be replaced only with compatible system software.
Otherwise, the first time the CNC is turned on after the system software
WARNING SCREEN is replaced, the following screen will be displayed and the system will not
DISPLAYED WHEN be activated:
SYSTEM SOFTWARE
IS REPLACED
(SYSTEM LABEL
CHECK ERROR)
om
DDF1–01
r.c
NOT READY
e
In this case, perform memory all clear (by holding down the and
nt
DELETE
RESET
MDI keys then turning on the power) or reinstall the original system
software.
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w
78
B–62705EN/03 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION
1.15 When the Power Motion series is used as an additional axis (slave) of the
CNC, the power motion manager allows the slave data to be displayed and
POWER MOTION set by the CNC.
MANAGER The power motion manager enables the following display and setting:
(1) Current position display (absolute/machine coordinates)
(2) Parameter display and setting
(3) Diagnosis display
(4) System configuration screen display
(5) Alarm display
om
The Power Motion series that can be used as the slave is a β amplifier with
I/O Link.
r.c
1.15.1
Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0960 PMN MD2 MD1 SLV
e
#0(SLV) When the power motion manager is selected, the screen shows the data of:
nt
0 : A single slave.
1 : Up to four slaves by dividing the screen into four segments.
#1, #2(MD1, MD2) The slave parameters are input from and output to the following devices:
ce
MD2 MD1 I/O device
0 0 Part program storage
0 1 Memory card
nc
The parameters are input or output in the program format, no matter which
I/O device is selected.
#3(PMN) The power motion manager function is:
0 : Enabled.
.c
79
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–62705EN/03
1.15.2
Screen Display 1. Press the SYSTEM
function key.
2. Press the continuous menu key several times. The [PMM] soft
key appears.
3. Press the [PMM] soft key. The system configuration screen, which is
the initial screen of the power motion manager, appears. The screen
has the following soft keys (function selection soft keys).
om
[ POS ][ ][ ][SYSTEM][ MSG ]
The currently active soft key is displayed in reverse video. Pressing a soft
key enables the corresponding function, as indicated below:
r.c
POS: Current position display
SYSTEM: System information
MSG: Alarm list
e
To select another function after one of the functions listed above is
selected, press the return menu key several times until the soft keys
are displayed as shown above. Then, select the desired function.
nt
4. To terminate the power motion manager, repeatedly press the return
menu key until the function selection keys are displayed as
shown above. Then, press the return menu key once more. The soft
ce
keys of the CNC system appear, and the power motion manager
terminates. The system configuration screen of this function is
displayed as the termination screen.
nc
MESSAGE , etc.).
.c
NOTE
After another screen is displayed by pressing a function key,
w
of this function. That is, the soft keys shown above are
w
80
B–62705EN/03 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION
D System configuration This screen displays the system software information of the slave. The
screen screen is displayed first when the power motion manager function is
selected. This screen is automatically displayed also at the termination
of the function.
1. Press the [SYSTEM] function selection soft key. The following soft
keys are displayed together with the screen displayed when SYSTEM
was last selected. The currently active soft key is displayed in reverse
video.
om
[ PARAM ][ DGNOS ][ ][SYSTEM][ ]
2. Press the [SYSTEM] soft key again. The system configuration screen
appears. While this screen is displayed, the [SYSTEM] soft key is left
displayed in reverse video.
r.c
POWER MOTION MANAGER
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
1.GROUP0 / β
e
nt
ce
[ PARAM ][ DGNOS ][ ][ SYSTEM ][ ]
nc
Sample screen: Series and edition of the servo unit β series system list
.c
w
w
w
81
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–62705EN/03
D Parameter screen The parameters necessary for the functions of the slave must be specified
in advance.
1. Press the [SYSTEM] function selection soft key. The following soft
keys appear.
om
PARAMETER
1.GROUP0 / β
0000 00001000 0010 11110000
0001 00010101 0011 01010000
0002 11111011 0012 00000000
0003 00000000 0013 00000000
r.c
0004 00000000 0014 10110001
0005 10100001 0015 00000000
0006 00000000 0016 00000000
0007 10000000 0017 10000010
0008 00000000 0018 00000000
0009 00000000 0019 00000000
e
nt [ PARAM ][ DGNOS ][ ][ SYSTEM ][ ]
ce
The screen displays just the bit and decimal data. For details of the
parameters, refer to the connection manual of the corresponding Power
Mate.
D Searching for a parameter
nc
[ NO.SRC ][ ][ ][ ][ INPUT ]
w
3. Enter a desired number in the key–in field by using MDI numeric keys.
Then, press the [NO.SRC] soft key. The search starts.
D Setting a parameter
w
A parameter of a slave Power Mate can be directly set from the CNC.
1. Select the active slave.
w
2. Press the [(OPRT)] soft key. The following soft keys appear:
[ NO.SRC ][ ][ ][ ][ INPUT ]
key.
82
B–62705EN/03 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION
D Diagnosis screen This screen shows the current status of the slave.
1. Press the [SYSTEM] function selection soft key. The following soft
keys appear:
2. Press the [DGNOS] soft key. The diagnosis screen appears. The
displayed data is basically the same as the data displayed on the
parameter screen.
om
For details of the diagnosis information, refer to the connection
manual of the corresponding Power Mate.
D Current position display The screen shows the current position on the workpiece coordinate
system or machine coordinate system.
r.c
1. Press the [POS] function selection soft key. The following soft keys
appear:
e
[ WORK ][ ][MACHIN][ ][ ]
2. To see the absolute coordinate screen, press the [WORK] soft key. To
nt
see the machine coordinate screen, press the [MACHIN] soft key.
1 1267900
nc
F 3500
.c
w
[ WORK ][ ][ MACHIN ][ ][ ]
w
83
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–62705EN/03
D Alarm screen If an alarm is issued during operation, the group number of the slave
causing the alarm is indicated at the right end of the message field on the
screen. Check the details on the alarm screen. For example, (13) means
that the first and third power motion units are in the alarm state.
1. Press the [MSG] function selection soft key. Just the error code is
displayed on the screen.
om
442 210 232
e r.c
[ POS ][ ][ ][SYSTEM ][ MSG ]
nt
Up to forty codes can be displayed on the screen.
ce
For details of the alarm, refer to the connection manual of the
corresponding Power Mate.
D Operating the active The active slave is subjected to the ZOOM function, which will be
slave described later, and parameter overwrite. The title of the active slave is
nc
displayed in a color different from the display color of the other slave
titles.
84
B–62705EN/03 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION
D Single–slave display/ Whether the screen displays the data of just a single unit or of four units
Four–slave display in four segments is specified in the SLV bit (bit 0 of parameter 960).
To switch the four–slave display to the single–slave display, press the
[ZOOM] soft key, which is displayed after the continuous menu key
is pressed several times. The single–slave display shows the data
of the active slave. To switch the single–slave display to the four–slave
display showing the data of four slaves including the active slave, press
the [ZOOM] key.
When five or more slaves are connected, the four–slave display has two
om
or more pages. To see the slave data that is not displayed on the current
page, press soft key [±NEXT].
r.c
SYSTEM 88A101 SYSTEM 88A101
e
3.GROUP2 / β
SYSTEM
nt
88A101
4.GROUP3 / β
SYSTEM 88A101
ce
nc
85
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–62705EN/03
om
[ WORK ][ ][MACHIN ][ ][ ]
r.c
When the soft keys are displayed as shown above, “SELECT ACTIVE
SLAVE [>]” is displayed.
e
[ ± NEXT ][ ° BACK ][ ZOOM ][ ][ ]
nt
When the soft keys are displayed as shown above, “SELECT ACTIVE
SLAVE [↓] [↑]” is displayed.
D Key–in field
ce
When the [(OPRT)] soft key is pressed, the message line may turn into
a key–in field as required. The numeric data input by using MDI keys is
displayed after the prompt (>).
On the parameter and diagnosis screens, the key–in field appears when
nc
just a numeric value is input. The soft key [(OPRT)] need not be pressed.
.c
w
w
w
86
B–62705EN/03 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION
1.15.3
Parameter Input/Output
D Saving parameters Parameters can be saved in CNC memory or a memory card as a data file
of program format. Specify the first digit of the registration program
number in parameter 8760. Programs with predetermined numbers are
created for individual slaves. When the parameters are saved in CNC
memory, a program having the specified program number is created.
When the parameters are saved in a memory card, a file is created, to
om
which the file name consists of the specified program number and an
extension PMM.
Example: When parameter 8760 is set to 8000
The program number for group n is 8000 + n*10.
r.c
The group number n is indicated in the title area of each slave.
CAUTION
In case that the parameters are saved in a memory card, If
the specified program number already exists on memory
e
card, the corresponding program is overwritten with new
data.
nt
Specify a desired input device in the MD1 and MD2 bits (bits 1 and 2 of
parameter 960). Connect a memory card. Alternatively, check the free
ce
area of CNC memory. Then, follow the steps given below:
[ NO.SRC ][ ][ ][ ][ INPUT ]
.c
3. Press the continuous menu key . The following soft keys appear:
w
[ ][ READ ][ PUNCH ][ ][ ]
4. Press the [READ] soft key. The following soft keys appear:
w
[ ][ ][ ][CANCEL ][ EXEC ]
w
87
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–62705EN/03
D Writing parameters The data file of parameters saved in CNC memory or a memory card as
a program is written into the slave determined by the program number.
The program number and memory device are determined as described in
“Saving parameters.”
[ NO.SRC ][ ][ ][ ][ INPUT ]
om
3. Press the next–menu key. The following soft keys appear:
[ ][ READ ][ PUNCH ][ ][ ]
4. Press the [PUNCH] soft key. The following soft keys appear:
r.c
[ ][ ][ ][CANCEL ][ EXEC ]
e
5. Press the [EXEC] soft key.
During output, “INPUT” blinks in the message field.
nt
The screen cannot be changed to another screen during parameter
input/output.
ce
When the RESET key is pressed, or when an alarm status is detected in
communication, the input/output stops.
nc
.c
w
w
w
88
B–62705EN/03 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION
1.15.4
Notes
D Connecting an I/O Link When the Power Motion series is used as a slave of an I/O Link, the CNC
assigns I/O addresses. The salve data is input and output in units of 16
bytes. Therefore, 128 input/output points are necessary. Up to eight
slaves can be connected.
om
D Ignoring the power After the data necessary for each slave connected is set and checked, the
motion manager function communication of the power motion manager (PMM) can be stopped to
send a command from the CNC ladder to the slave.
When the PMN bit (bit 3 of parameter 960) is set to 1, all communication
r.c
between CNC and the slave via the I/O Link is open to the ladder.
While the bit is held 1, the screen shows just the title, function name, and
other items that are independent of the communication. The following
message appears to indicate that communication has stopped.
e
COMMUNICATION PROHIBITED BY P960#3
necessary, display and select the power motion manager screen again
by pressing function key SYSTEM
.
(2) Slave
.c
89
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–62705EN/03
1.16 This section describes the BIOS setup for the following MMC–IV.
BIOS SETUP OF THE Order code Printed circuit board code
MMC–IV A02B–0207–J001 A02B–0207–C020
A02B–0207–J002 A02B–0207–C021
A02B–0207–C022
1.16.1 The BIOS setup is a program for setting the operating environment of the
BIOS Setup MMC–IV. The BIOS setup, however, need not be executed to set up a
om
typical operating environment. A typical operating environment for the
MMC–IV is factory–set. Inadvertently modifying the setting may cause
a failure.
The BIOS setup should be executed when:
– A printed circuit board is replaced.
r.c
– A hard disk unit is replaced.
– The peripheral configuration is changed. (A floppy disk drive or
keyboard is connected or disconnected, for example. Whether
execution of the BIOS setup is needed varies with the BIOS
e
parameters.)
– POST (Power On Self Test) has issued an error message relating to
nt the setup.
The setting made by the BIOS setup is stored into SRAM on the printed
circuit board of the MMC–IV main body. The SRAM is provided with a
battery backup to retain the recorded settings.
ce
For the BIOS setup, a full keyboard is necessary.
nc
1.16.2 The keys used for set–up have the following functions.
Keys Used for – and keys : Move the cursor to the next item.
.c
Operation on the
Set–Up Screen – and keys : Move the cursor to the previous item.
PAGE
w
– PAGE
key : Move to the previous page of the set–up
w
menu.
– spacebar
and – keys : Display the desired value at a set–up menu
item.
w
90
B–62705EN/03 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION
om
CTRL + ALT + ESC keys. The Standard System Parameters display
appears on the screen.
If it does not appear, retry starting at step 2.
PAGE
r.c
of the set–up menu, respectively.
Standard System Parameters screen
Phoenix SETUP Utility (Version 1.00)
(C) Phoenix Technologies Ltd. 1985, 1992 All Rights Reserved
e
Page 1 of 3
∗∗ Standard System Parameters ∗∗
ntSystem Time:
System Date:
12: 00: 00
Sep 14, 1993
ce
Diskette A : 3.5”, 1. 44MB
Diskette B : Not Installed Cyl Hd Pre LZ Sec Size
Hard Disk 1 : AUTO 1 722 10 0 722 23 81
Hard Disk 2 : Not Installed
Base Memory : 640 KB
Extended Memory: 3072 KB
nc
91
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–62705EN/03
om
disk drive, specify ”3.5–inch, 1.44MB.”
If no floppy disk drive is connected, specify ”Not Installed.”
Diskette B The type of a second floppy disk is specified. To use a portable 3.5–inch
floppy disk drive, specify ”3.5–inch, 1.44MB.” If no second floppy disk
drive is connected, specify ”Not Installed.”
Hard Disk 1 The type of a hard disk drive built in the MMC–IV main unit is specified.
”AUTO 1” is factory–set. Do not change in this item.
r.c
Hard Disk 2 The type of a second hard disk drive is specified. Because the MMC–IV
main unit does not contain a second hard disk drive, ”Not Installed” is
factory–set. Do not change in this item.
Base Memory The capacity of the base memory detected by POST is displayed. Do
not change the setting.
e
Extended The capacity of the extended memory detected by POST is displayed.
Memory Do not change the setting.
nt
Video Card
CPU Speed
The display rating of the CRT display is specified. ”VGA/EGA” is facto-
ry–set. Do not change the setting.
The CPU operating speed is specified.
Fast :The CPU clock is at full speed.
ce
Slow :The CPU operates at low speed.
NumLock on at How the Num Lock feature is handled at system boot is specified.
boot Yes :The system is booted up with the Num Lock feature
switched on.
No : The system is booted up with the Num Lock feature
switched off.
nc
Quick Boot It is specified whether the memory is tested when power is applied.
Off : The memory test is performed.
On : The memory test is skipped.
Always select ”Off”.
.c
w
w
w
92
B–62705EN/03 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION
Page 2 of 3
∗∗ Device Feature Control ∗∗
om
Esc F2 Space/- PgUp/Dn
r.c
Menu Sys Info Field Value Page
e
Serial Port The I/O address of serial port 1 is specified.
”03F8h” is factory–set.
nt
Track Ball
Parallel Port
The I/O address of serial port 2 is specified.
”02F8h” is factory–set.
The I/O address of the parallel port is specified.
”03BCh” is factory–set.
ce
Internal Cache It is specified whether to enable or disable the cache memory in the
CPU.
Enabled : The built–in cache memory is enabled.
Disabled : The built–in cache memory is disabled.
Floppy Boot It is specified whether to boot the system from a floppy disk.
nc
Vertical It is specified whether the entire surface of the LCD display screen is
Compensation used. Always select ”Enabled.”
w
w
93
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–62705EN/03
Page 3 of 3
∗∗ Power Management Feature Control ∗∗
Power Management Disabled
om
System Standby Speed:Divide by 2
r.c
Menu Sys Info Field Value Page
e
Power Management
Always select ”Disabled”.
nt
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w
94
B–62705EN/03 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION
1.16.4 This section describes how to save the information specified in the set–up
How to End the menu and to exit the set–up menu.
“Set–Up” Pressing the ESC key on the set–up menu causes the Exiting SETUP
menu to appear on the right section of the screen.
** Exiting SETUP **
om
ESC Continue with SETUP.
F4
Save Values, exit
setup, and reboot.
r.c
F5 Load default values
for allpages.
e
nt
(1) Pressing the ESC key resumes the set–up menu. You can continue
to set up on the set–up menu.
ce
(2) Pressing the F4 key saves the set information before ending the
set–up program. After the set–up program ends, the MMC–IV is
reset, and the system is booted.
nc
(3) Pressing the F5 key cancels all set information and loads the initial
settings.
.c
(4) Pressing the F6 key ends the set–up program without changing the
previous settings; the information you set up is not saved.
w
w
95
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–62705EN/03
1.17 This section describes the BIOS setup for intelligent terminals 1 and 2 and
the following MMC–IV.
BIOS SETUP OF
Order code Printed circuit board code
INTELLIGENT
A02B–0207–J031 A02B–2203–0180
TERMINALS 1 AND 2 A02B–0207–J032 A02B–2203–0180
1.17.1 The BIOS setup is a program for setting the operating environment of the
BIOS Setup MMC–IV or intelligent terminal. The BIOS setup, however, need not be
om
executed to set up a typical operating environment. A typical operating
environment for the MMC–IV or intelligent terminal is factory–set.
Inadvertently modifying the setting may cause a failure.
The BIOS setup should be executed when:
– A printed circuit board is replaced.
r.c
– A hard disk unit is replaced.
– The peripheral configuration is changed. (A floppy disk drive or
keyboard is connected or disconnected, for example. Whether
execution of the BIOS setup is needed varies with the BIOS
e
parameters.)
– POST (Power On Self Test) has issued an error message about setup.
nt
The setting made by the BIOS setup is stored into SRAM in the MMC–IV
or intelligent terminal. The SRAM is provided with a battery backup to
retain the recorded settings.
ce
For the BIOS setup, a full keyboard is necessary.
nc
1.17.2 The keys used on the set–up screen have the following functions:
Keys Used for – and keys : Move the cursor.
Operation on the
.c
– ENTER
key : Selects the item to which the cursor is
w
positioned.
– ESC key : Abandons the current setting.
w
w
96
B–62705EN/03 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION
3. Press the F1 key on the initial screen once, as shown in Fig. 1.17.3
(a). The BIOS setup starts a few seconds later, with the display of the
menu screen. In some cases, the BIOS setup starts automatically,
showing error screen (1), as shown in Fig. 1.17.3 (c). If the error screen
om
appears, press the , , and ENTER
keys as indicated in Figs.
1.17.3 (a), (b), and (c). The menu screen appears. If the BIOS setup
does not begin, return to step 2 above.
4. The menu screen appears. The triangle indicates that the
r.c
corresponding item has been changed. Check the new setting. If
necessary, make a modification.
e
Copyright (C) Matsushita Electric Industrial
Co.,LTD 1995 Release 01 1.02
nt0640KB System Memory
7168KB Extended Memory
Indicating that pressing
ce
the F1 key starts BIOS
setup.
nc
Configuration/Setup Utility
w
Select Options:
System Summary
Devices and I/O Ports
w
97
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–62705EN/03
om
<F1> Help < > Move
<ESC> Exit <Enter> Select
r.c
Fig. 1.17.3 (c) Error Screen (1) Displayed after Automatic
Activation
e
Error
Activation
Configration Error
w
98
B–62705EN/03 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION
1.17.4
Details of the Set–up
Items
Indicates the current system configuration. This information cannot be
changed.
Indicates the basic I/O settings, which are as listed below:
om
Item Description
Serial Port A I/O Address The I/O address and IRQ of serial port A are specified.
3F8–IRQ4 is usually specified.
Serial Port B I/O Address The I/O address and IRQ of serial port B are specified.
2F8–IRQ3 is usually specified.
r.c
Parallel Port I/O Address The I/O address and IRQ of the parallel port are specified.
3BC–IRQ7 is usually specified.
Parallel Port Mode The operation mode of the parallel part is specified. Stan-
e
dard corresponds to AT mode while Extended corresponds
to PS/2 mode.
Standard is usually specified.
nt
Parallel Port Extended
Mode
Mouse
Bidirectional is specified if the parallel port mode is
Extended.
Install is specified when a mouse is connected.
ce
Diskette Drive A The media type for drive A is specified.
Diskette Drive B The media type for drive B is specified.
Video Setup... The type of the video chip is indicated. This setting cannot
be changed.
nc
IDE Drives Setup... The HDD type is indicated. This setting cannot be
changed.
The date and time can be changed. If an invalid value is included, correct
.c
99
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–62705EN/03
A password and other access right settings are specified.
om
Set or change To set or change the power–on password, this
Power–on item is selected after the above two items have
Password been set.
Delete Power–on This item is selected to delete the power–on
Password password.
Password Prompt When Off is specified, the password input
r.c
immediately before booting is unnecessary.
(The set–up password is still necessary.)
Administrator Enter Administrator An administrator password is input. The pass-
Password Password word must consist of seven or more characters.
Enter Administrator The same password is input again.
e
Password Again
Set or change To set or change the administrator password,
Administrator this item is selected after the above two items
nt Password
Delete Administrator
Password
are set.
This item is selected to delete the administrator
password.
ce
Power–on Pass- When YES is specified, the power–on pass-
word changeable by word can be changed.
user
nc
NOTE
The administrator password has a higher priority than the
power–on password. If the BIOS setup is started with the
power–on password when both passwords have been
specified, only the system summary and power–on
.c
100
B–62705EN/03 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION
Indicates the basic I/O settings, which are as listed below:
Item Description
Keyboard NumLock State This item specifies whether the keyboard NumLock is set
to on or off at power–up.
Keyboard Speed The typematic rate of the keyboard is specified.
Disketteless Operation When Enable is specified, no configuration error will occur,
irrespective of whether a floppy disk drive is connected.
Enable is usually specified.
om
Keyboardless Operation When Enable is specified, no configuration error will occur,
irrespective of whether a keyboard is connected. Enable is
usually specified.
Automatic Configuration When Enable is specified, setting an environment will not
result in a configuration error. The environment is updated
automatically. Enable is usually specified.
r.c
PCMCIA ATA Card Enable should be specified when a PCMCIA ATA card is
used.
First Startup Device A boot sequence is specified.
Second Startup Device
Third Startup Device
Fourth Startup Device
e
Power On Self Test When Quick is specified, no memory test is performed at
power–up. Only ENHANCED can be specified.
nt
Virus Detection When the contents of the boot sector of the hard disk drive
are changed, notes relating to virus protection are dis-
played. (These notes are also displayed at the first booting
after Enable is specified.)
ce
Item Sub–item Description
Cache Control Cache State Whether the internal cache is set to on or off is
nc
usually specified.
w
Item Description
101
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–62705EN/03
1.17.5 This section describes how to save and end the BIOS setup and how to
How to End the Set–up abort the BIOS setup.
1. Saving and ending the BIOS setup
(1) Position the cursor to “ExitSetup” on the menu screen, then press
the Enter key.
(2) Position the cursor to “Yes, Save and exit the Setup Utility.” Press
the Enter key. The system is automatically rebooted.
2. Aborting the BIOS setup
om
(1) Position the cursor to “ExitSetup” on the menu screen, then press
the Enter key.
(2) Position the cursor to “No, Exit the Setup Utility without saving.”
Press the Enter key. The system is automatically rebooted.
e r.c
nt
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w
102
B–62705EN/03 2. HARDWARE
2 HARDWARE
om
2.1 GENERAL OF HANDWARE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
2.2 CONFIGURATION OF PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD
AND LED DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
r.c
2.3 LIST OF UNIT AND PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD . 142
2.4 HOW TO REPLACE THE MODULES . . . . . . . . . . . 146
2.5 REPLACING THE FUSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
2.6 HOW TO REPLACE THE BATTERIES . . . . . . . . . . 150
2.7 REPLACING THE FAN MOTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
e
2.8 REPLACING THE LCD BAKLIGHT FOR
DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
nt
2.9 ADJUSTING THE FLAT DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
2.10 MAINTENANCE OF HEAT PIPE TYPE HEAT
EXCHANGER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
ce
2.11 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENT . . . . . . . . . . . 166
2.12 POWER SUPPLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
2.13 ACTION AGAINST NOISE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
nc
.c
w
w
w
103
2. HARDWARE B–62705EN/03
2.1
GENERAL OF
HANDWARE
D Series 21
om
(21–TB) S Main CPU S Power PCB (built–in)
S Loader control S Memory DC–DC converter
S Remote buffer System software, S DI/DO
(21–MB) Macro program, S Reader/puncher I/F
S Remote buffer Ladder program, S MDI control
Parameter, and etc. S Display control
S PMC control S Manual pulse generator
r.c
S I/O Link control control
S Servo control
S Spindle control
S Memory card I/F
S LED display
e
nt
ce
nc
.c
w
2–slot
3–slot
104
B–62705EN/03 2. HARDWARE
D Series 210
om
Parameter, and etc. S Manual pulse generator
S PMC control control
S I/O Link control
S Servo control
S Spindle control
S Memory card I/F
S LED display
e r.c
nt
ce
nc
S HSSB board
w
w
2–slot
w
4–slot
105
2. HARDWARE B–62705EN/03
2.2
CONFIGURATION OF
PRINTED CIRCUIT
BOARD AND LED
DISPLAY
2.2.1
om
Main PCB
(1) A16B–3200–0020
D Module mounting
location
r.c
(CP8 : Battery for memory)
(1) (2)
e
CPU
nt Memory card
ce
ROM ROM ROM ROM
106
B–62705EN/03 2. HARDWARE
Mounting
Module name Module specification Remarks
position
(1) PMC Control A20B–2900–0142 RA1, with I/O LINK
module
d l A20B–2900–0143 RA1, without I/O LINK
A20B–2901–0660 RA3, with I/O LINK
A20B–2901–0661 RA3, without I/O LINK
(2) Memory and A20B–2901–0760 SRAM : 256KB, FROM 256KB, with analog spindle control
S i dl module
Spindle d l
om
A20B–2901–0761 SRAM : 256KB, FROM 256KB, with serial spindle control
A20B–2901–0764 SRAM : 0KB, FROM 128KB, with analog spindle control
A20B–2901–0765 SRAM : 0KB, FROM 128KB, with serial spindle control
(3) Servo module A20B–2902–0290 For 3rd, 4th axis
r.c
NOTE
1 256KB SRAM is mounted on the main board. When both
this memory & spindle module A20B–2901–0760 or
A20B–2901–0761 is used, the total SRAM capacity
becomes 512KB.
e
2 The control circuit for the first and second axes is configured
on the main board.
D Block diagram
nt
ce
Bus I/ F SRAM 256KB
nc
Servo module
107
2. HARDWARE B–62705EN/03
(2) A16B–2201–0721
D Module mounting
location
om
Rotary switch for maintenance
r.c
SPDL–1 (JA7A): Serial spindle
A–OUT1 (JA8A): Analog spindle
(4) (5) (6) (7) (8) SERVO1 (JS1A): 1st axis (Servo amp. module)
SERVO2 (JS2A): 2nd axis (Servo amp. module)
SERVO3 (JS3A): 3rd axis (Servo amp. module)
e
SERVO4 (JS4A): 4th axis (Servo amp. module)
SCALE1 (JF21): 1st axis linear scale signal
nt SCALE2 (JF22): 2nd axis linear scale signal
SCALE3 (JF23): 3rd axis linear scale signal
SCALE4 (JF24): 4th axis linear scale signal
SC–ABS (JF25): Battery for absolute scale
ce
nc
D Kind of mounting
modules
Position Name code Remarks
.c
108
B–62705EN/03 2. HARDWARE
D Block diagram
om
RAM module
Servo control module
r.c
F–ROM module
Servo amp. module, Pulse
Servo I/F module coder, Linear scale
e
Memory card ³ Memory card Servo amp. module, Pulse
interface nt
Servo I/F module coder, Linear scale
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w
109
2. HARDWARE B–62705EN/03
(3) A16B–2202–0900
D Module mounting
location
(1)
(CP8: Battery for memory)
CPU
om
Memory card
ROM
Rotary switch for maintenance
r.c
IOLINK (JD1A): I/O LINK
ROM for boot
e
SPDL–1 (JA7A): Serial spindle
(2) (3)
nt (4)
SERV01 (JS1A): 1st axis (Servo amp. module)
110
B–62705EN/03 2. HARDWARE
D Types of modules
mounted
Mounting
Module name Specification Remarks
location
(1) F–ROM module A20B–2901–0721 2MB
A20B–2901–0720 4MB
(2) PMC control module A20B–2900–0142 RA1, with I/O Link
A20B–2900–0143 RA1, without I/O Link
A20B–2901–0660 RA3, with I/O Link
om
A20B–2901–0661 RA3, without I/O Link
(3) Memory and spindle A20B–2901–0760 SRAM: 256KB, FROM: 256KB, Analog spindle control
module A20B–2901–0761 SRAM: 256KB, FROM: 256KB, Serial spindle control
A20B–2901–0762 SRAM: 256KB, FROM: 128KB, Analog spindle control
r.c
A20B–2901–0763 SRAM: 256KB, FROM: 128KB, Serial spindle control
A20B–2901–0764 SRAM: 0KB, FROM: 128KB, Analog spindle control
A20B–2901–0765 SRAM: 0KB, FROM: 128KB, Serial spindle control
A20B–2901–0766 SRAM: 256KB, FROM: 256KB, Serial spindle control
e
(4) Servo module A20B–2902–0290 For third/fourth axis
nt
NOTE
A servo control circuit for the first/second axis is mounted on
the main board.
ce
D Block diagram
nc
Servo module
111
2. HARDWARE B–62705EN/03
D LED display
A16B–2201–0721 (1) LED status in power on routine (Green LED)
A16B–2202–0900 j:OFF J:ON
STATUS jjjj Power off
STATUS JJJJ State in which software is being loaded to DRAM after
power–on, or when CPU operation is stopped be-
cause of an error
STATUS JjJJ Waiting for other CPU’s answer (ID setting)
STATUS jjJJ Detect other CPU’s answer (Finished of ID setting)
om
STATUS JJjJ FANUC BUS initialized
STATUS jJjJ PMC initialization finished
STATUS JjjJ All PCBs configuration finished
STATUS JJJj PMC initial running finished
STATUS jJJj Waiting for digital servo initialization
r.c
STATUS Jjjj All initialized, running
e
STATUS jJjj RAM parity alarm occured in main CPU board
ALARM JJj
nt
STATUS jJjj
ALARM jJJ
STATUS jJjj
Servo alarm (watch dog alarm) occured
112
B–62705EN/03 2. HARDWARE
2.2.2
I/O Printed Circuit
Board
(1) A16B–2201–073V,
A16B–2201–092V
D Module mounting
om
lacation
r.c
MPG (JA3B): Manual pulse generator
e
(1)
nt I/O: Machine side DI/DO
I/O: Matrix DI/DO for machine
ce
nc
113
2. HARDWARE B–62705EN/03
(2) A16B–2201–091V,
A16B–2202–098V,
A16B–3200–012V
D Module mounting
lacation
om
DC–IN (CP1A): Control unit 24V input
Power supply PCB
DC–OUT (CP1B): 24V output for CRT
(1)
I/O: Machine side DI/DO
I/O: Machine side DI/DO
e r.c
CRT (JA1): CRT video signal
nt MDI (JA2): MDI key signal
ce
RS232–1 (JD5A): RS–232–C 1st channel
114
B–62705EN/03 2. HARDWARE
(3) A16B–2203–007V
D Module mounting
lacation
om
(1)
I/O: Machine side DI/DO
I/O: Machine side DI/DO
e r.c
CRT (JA1): CRT video signal
D Kind of module
Position Name Code Remarks
(1) Graphic module A20B–2900–0310 Graphic control
115
2. HARDWARE B–62705EN/03
2.2.3
Power Supply Printed
Circuit Board
(1) A20B–1005–0421,
A20B–1005–0420
D Module mounting (Mounted on the I/O printed circuit board)
om
location
e r.c
nt
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w
D LED display A green LED is provided at position A in the figure above. The LED lights
when +24 V is input.
116
B–62705EN/03 2. HARDWARE
2.2.4
Option 1 Board Name Specifications Function
Option 1 board A16B–2200–0913 Remote buffer
D LED display
Status of communication function
om
STATUS jjjj
ALARM jjj
r.c
D Communication function
j:OFF, J:ON, :Don’t care l:Blink
e
STATUS JJJJ Initial status after power on (CPU is not run yet)
ALARM Jjj
nt
STATUS jJ
ALARM jjj
STATUS ll
ALARM jjj
Remote buffer CPU initialized, running
function ROM
w
w
JNA
F–BUS
back plane
connector
w
D Type of modules
Display of system
No. Name Specifications Function
configuration screen
(1) Commu- A20B–2900–0361 Commu- COMMUNICATION MODULE
nication nication
control control
module
117
2. HARDWARE B–62705EN/03
2.2.5
Loader Control Board Name Code Function
Loader control board A16B–2202–0880 Loader control function
om
2 STATUS JJJJ The power has just been turned on, or the
CPU is not operating
3 STATUS jJJJ RAM is initialized
4 STATUS JjJJ The software ID has been set. The keys are
initialized. All data is cleared.
r.c
5 STATUS jjJJ Software initialization is being awaited
(wait state 1)
6 STATUS JJjJ Software initialization is being awaited
(wait state 2)
7 STATUS jJjJ The position coder is initialized
e
8 STATUS jJJj Digital servo initialization is being awaited
9 STATUS Jjjj Initialization has been completed
nt (steady state)
118
B–62705EN/03 2. HARDWARE
D Location of modules
Connector Connector
LED
name number Use
om
AMP1 JS1A Servo amplifier for first axis
AMP2 JS2A Servo amplifier for second axis
(3) (4) (5) AMP3 JS3A Servo amplifier for third axis
AMP4 JS4A Servo amplifier for fourth axis
r.c
Display of system
No. Name Specifications Function
e
configuration screen
(1) – – – –
nt
(2)
(3)
DRAM
mod le
module
PMC
module
d l
A20B–2901–0941 Loader sys-
A20B–2901–0942
tem RAM
or 2nd axis
.c
w
w
w
119
2. HARDWARE B–62705EN/03
2.2.6
HSSB Interface Board
2.2.6.1
Parts layout
(1) Interface board for Drawing Number : A20B–2002–0210
CNC B
om
SW1
ST1
AL2(RED)
ST2
JNA ST3 AL1(RED)
ST4
r.c
COP7
(HSSB)
e
(2) Interface Board for Drawing Number : A20B–8001–0300
Personal Computer
type A
nt
ce
COP7
(HSSB)
nc
LED2
(GREEN)
LED1
(RED)
.c
w
COP7
(HSSB)
LED2
(GREEN)
LED1
(RED)
120
B–62705EN/03 2. HARDWARE
2.2.6.2
System block diagram
om
COMMON RAM
r.c
(2) Interface board for
personal computer
e
(Includes type 1 and 2)
ISA–BUS HSSB COP7
nt
CARD
EDGE
Decode circuit
CONTROLLER Optical Module (HSSB)
ce
Setting : Interface board for PC type 2
Switch JJJ only
nc
.c
2.2.6.3
Configuration switch Interfacece Board
Setting
I/F Board for CNC B
w
SW1
8421
ALL=OFF
w
121
2. HARDWARE B–62705EN/03
2.2.6.4
LED display
om
A20B–8001–0300 I/F board for PC Type 1 LED1 LED2
A20B–8100–0100 I/F board for PC Type 2 LED1 LED2
ON – – Communication is stopped.
– ON – Parity Error at common RAM is occured.
– – ON CNC status is good.
r.c
(2) LED Display (Status)
J : ON j : OFF
e
LED Status
Stat s
Status
7seg.LED ST4 to ST1
nt
4321
JJJJ
JJJj
Start up status after power–on.
122
B–62705EN/03 2. HARDWARE
2.2.7
MMC–IV PCB
2.2.7.1
A02B–0207–C020,
A02B–0207–C021,
A02B–0207–C022
om
(1) PART LAYOUT
MARKING
UPPER LOWER FUNCTION
r.c
TMA LED
CPU 9 STATUS ALARM LED INDICATOR
910
11 13
4 GND NC CRT JA1B ⇐ NC VIDEO SIGNAL
DRAM 12
MODULE 1 CRT JA1A ⇐ VIDEO SIGNAL
8
⇔ SERIAL PORT 1
e
7 R232–1 JD5F
6
ODP
SWA R232–2 JD5G ⇔ SERIAL PORT 2
SOCKET
LCD VARIABLE REGISTOR
DRAM
MODULE 2
nt VRA1
FDD
ADJUST
JD8
FOR LCD DISPLAY
⇔ FLOPPY DISK UNIT
ce
SWA5
TMA3
SWA4 PARALLEL PORT
TMA2
SWA3 CENTRO JD9 ⇔ (CENTRONICS)
EX KEY JD21 ⇔ EXTENDEN KEYBOARD
nc
TMA1
BIOS ROM KEYBOARD CD32A ⇔ FULL KEYBOARD
+5V GND
.c
SWA2
JNA
123
2. HARDWARE B–62705EN/03
(2) ADJUSTMENT
LOCATIONS
DRAM Module 1
DRAM Module 2
om
CPU CPU
Socket i486SX
(18) (7)(8)(9)(10)(11)
(15)
r.c
PCMCIA (19)
Socket (16)
(12)(13)(14)
(17)
LED
e
(20)
Location
ce
(1) SWA3 The board– (1) 1 2 3 (3) 1 2 (4) 3 2 1
(2) SWA4 Specifies
S ecifies the use mounted d i486SX SWA3 TMA3 SWA5
(3) TMA3
3 of the CPU and iss used
(4) SWA5 CPU socket
(2) 1 2 3
SWA4
nc
SWA4
w
NOTE
In this setting, i486DX CPU is necessary.
MMC–IV cannot run without i486DX CPU on CPU socket.
w
w
124
B–62705EN/03 2. HARDWARE
om
used SWA10 3 1
r.c
(11) TMA9
⇔
e
SWA6 to SWA13 and the BIOS display unit setting must be set according
nt
to the actual display unit to be connected.
SWA6 to SWA13 and the BIOS display unit setting are factory–adjusted
according to the user’s specifications. The settings must be modified in
ce
the following cases:
i) When the BIOS setup parameters, including the display unit setting,
are cleared or destroyed. (The default display unit (LCD) is
selected.)
nc
ii) When the BIOS display unit setting is changed such that it does not
correspond to the connected display unit
iii) When the connected display unit is changed such that it does not
.c
CRT l 1 1
125
2. HARDWARE B–62705EN/03
om
* If the display unit is used for an extended period with
these settings, the lifetime of the unit will be shortened.
When nothing is displayed with the settings indicated by a solid star L,
adjust the setting as described below:
(1) Adjust SWA6 to SWA13 to the opposite of the actually connected
r.c
display unit.
When a CRT is connected, adjust SWA6 to SWA13 to the LCD
positions.
When an LCD is connected, adjust SWA6 to SWA13 to the CRT
positions.
e
(2) Change the BIOS setting to SIMULTANEOUS.
nt
(3) Set SWA6 to SWA13 according the actually connected display unit.
When nothing is displayed with the settings indicated by a hollow star l,
modify the settings of SWA6 to SWA13.
ce
BIOS SETUP UTILITY SCREEN (SECOND PAGE)
Phoenix SETUP Utility (Version 1.00)
(c)Phoenix Technologies Ltd. 1985, 1992 All Rights Reserved
nc
Page 2 of 3
** Device Feature Control **
Display: LCD
Video Mode Graphics : Normal
Internal Cache: Enabled Video Mode Text: Normal
Vertical Compensation: Disabled
w
LCD (default)
CRT
SIMULTANEOUS
w
126
B–62705EN/03 2. HARDWARE
om
Insert the standard driver/library disk in drive A, and enter the
following command.
C:¥> A:LCDCHECK
r.c
A gray scale pattern is displayed on the screen. It has 8 different
shades ranging from black at the left to white at the right. The lower
half screen consists of vertical stripes interlaced at one–bit intervals.
Rough sketch of the pattern
e
nt
ce
LCD CHECK PATTERN Ver1.0
for FANUC MMC–IV
Black White
Gray scale with 8 different shades. The lower
half of the screen has vertical stripes interlaced
at one–bit intervals.
w
(4) Operation
Pressing anykey erases the gray scale pertern and causes the DOS
w
prompt to appear.
127
2. HARDWARE B–62705EN/03
(4) LED INDICATOR The MMC–IV printed circuit board has two rows of status indicate LEDs
at the top of the front panel:
The upper row consists of four green STATUS LEDs.
The lower row consists of three red ALARM LEDs.
In the accompanying tables, the LED statuses MMC–IV
are represented as follows:
: Not lit
: Lit 1234
: Don’t care STATUS jjjj
ALARM jjj
om
(1) Normal statuses
LED
No
No. MMC–IV STATUS
STATUS ALARM
1 The power is turned off.
r.c
2 The MMC–IV reset status is released.
3 The hard disk drive is being accessed.
e
LED
No
No. MMC–IV STATUS
nt
1
2
STATUS ALARM
An NMI occurs in the MMC–IV CPU.
The ambient temperature around the hard
disk drive is below 5°C or above 55°C.
ce
A parity alarm occurred in the backplane
3
DRAM.
nc
.c
w
w
w
128
B–62705EN/03 2. HARDWARE
2.2.7.2
A16B–2203–0180
om
R232–1 (JD5F) :Serial port 1
SWA6–13 R232–2 (JD5G) :Serial port 2
Fuse LCD ADJUST :Adjuster for LCD display
(+3.3V) Card PC
r.c
(+12V)
DRAM :Parallel port (Centronics)
module CENTRO (JD9)
e
LED (POWER) :+3.3V indicator
129
2. HARDWARE B–62705EN/03
om
SWA8
LCD SW1 SWA13
SWA10 SWA12
SWA9 SWA11
r.c
SWA6
SWA7
SWA8
TMA4, 6-9 Eliminates flicker TMA9 If the NC screen flickers try
e
off the
h NC screen TMA8 i
moving h jjumper plug
the l
until the flicker is eliminated
TMA7
nt TMA6
TMA4
ce
* It is not necessary to set up the BIOS according to the using display.
D Setting of variable
resistor Name Description Setting
nc
130
B–62705EN/03 2. HARDWARE
(3) LED display The details of the LED display on the new MMC–IV board is as follows.
: Not lit MMC–IV
: Lit
: Don’t care
1234
STATUS jjjj
(1) LED (STATUS/ALARM) ALARM jjj
Normal status
LED
om
No
No. Details
STATUS ALARM
1 The power it turned off.
2 The HDD is being accessed
3 The MMC–IV reset is released
r.c
Alarm status
LED
No
No. Details
STATUS ALARM
The ambient temperature around the HDD
e
1
is below 5°C or above 55°C
Parity alarm occurred in the back panel
2
nt
(2) LED (FUSE)
DRAM
The new MMC–IV board has two fuses in it. This LED indicates that
ce
either fuse melted down.
In this case please replace fuse according to the Subsec.2.5.2.
(3) LED (POWER)
This LED indicates that the power supply circuit for +3.3V become
nc
131
2. HARDWARE B–62705EN/03
2.2.8
Intelligent Terminal
*
BAT1(BATTERY) CN1(LCD)
*
VR1
om
JD33(RS232–1)
CA39
(FAN) JD34(RS232–2)
r.c
JD9(CENTRO)
PC
CD32(KEYBOARD)
CARD
e
HSSBC COP7(HSSB)
nt
CN8(HDD)
SW1
SW2
CN2 (FDD power)
SW4
ce
SW3
GND
SW5 SW4 SW5 SW3
–5V
*
+5V JNS (ISA extension backplane connector)
nc
–24V
CD34(FDD)
+3.3V
–24V Thermostat
–12V
.c
–12V
* CP5(+24V)
Fuse (5A)
w
: Check pin
CN7 CNH2 CNH1 : Jumper plug
(LCD power)
w
*
* The positions differ on the printed circuit boards of comprehensive version 01A and 02A.
w
132
B–62705EN/03 2. HARDWARE
D Adjustment
PC
CARD
om
r.c
LED (6)
e
(5)
(2) (1)
nt (4) (3)
ce
(1) Jumper plug settings
No. Name Description Setting
nc
(2) (1)
(3) SW3 Reserved The factory adjusted
factory–adjusted A (5) B SW5 A (5) B SW5
(4) SW4 setting should not be
((5)) SW5 h g d O
changed. One off th
these
w
the mono-
chrome STN
display. (6) VR1
133
2. HARDWARE B–62705EN/03
D LED display
DA16(GREEN)
DA17(GREEN)
DA18(GREEN)
DA19(RED)
COP7 DA20(RED)
om
CD32
CN2
Name Status
DA20 Indicates that a battery alarm has occurred. Replace the battery of
r.c
the intelligent terminal.
DA19 Indicates that the HSSB transfer has been aborted. The following
causes are possible:
– The CNC is turned off.
– The optical fiber cable is disconnected.
e
– The CNC or PC interface board is defective.
DA18 Lit while the CNC is operating normally.
nt
DA17
DA16
HDD access lamp
Lit while +5V is being supplied.
79mm to 113mm
(If this range is 20 20
exceeded, the board
w
Up to 170mm Unit: mm
NOTE
FANUC will not ensure the operation nor perform the
maintenance of a commercial ISA extension board.
134
B–62705EN/03 2. HARDWARE
om
Slot B
r.c
Metal vibration isolator A
e
nt Screw
Slot A
ce
Metal vibration isolator B
Screw hole B
Screw hole A
nc
D Notes
(1) Address map D The memory space between D00000h and FFFFFFh is used by the
intelligent terminal and cannot be used by the ISA board. The other
w
(2) Interrupt and DMA D The intelligent terminal uses the following IRQ signals:
w
135
2. HARDWARE B–62705EN/03
(3) Others When any of the following conditions is satisfied, normal operation may
not be possible:
D The ISA bus signal is subjected to pull–up/pull–down processing.
D The refresh cycle of the ISA bus is used.
Other conditions may be added in the future.
(4) Troubleshooting
om
(1) The power is turned on, but nothing • Are all LEDs off? ⇒ Go (11)
i displayed.
is di l d ↓ No Yes
Y
r.c
• Is the CNC interface ⇒ The intelligent terminal type
board as shown below? Yes is not set to within the correct
temperature range.
(See Section 2.11, ”Environ-
mental Requirement.”)
e
: ON
: OFF
nt or
ST4
Interface board
B for mini–slot
ce
↓ No
• Are the settings of SW1 → Correct the settings.
to SW5 correct? No
(1) See the description of the jumper plug settings.
nc
⇓ Yes
Is the printed circuit board defective?
(2) DA19 is on. • Is the optical fiber cable connected? → Connect the cable.
(HSSB iis not ready.)
d ) ⇓ Yes No
N
.c
136
B–62705EN/03 2. HARDWARE
2.2.9
Intelligent Terminal 2
D Specification :
A20B–2100–0240
CN3
(INVERTER)
om
Thermal +3.3V BAT1
+24V
+12V
+5V
CNH1
–12V
–24V
CNH2 –5V
(BATTERY)
TM10
r.c
GND
HSSBC
e
CN8 (HDD)
CD37
(TOUCH PANEL)
nt
SW7
SW6
SW5
SW4
(FDD Power)
SW3
SW2
SW1
ce
CN2
CN1 (LCD)
COP7
Thermal CD32A (HHSB)
JD34 (RS232–2)
JD33 (RS232–1)
JD9 (CENTRO)
(KEYBOARD)
FUSE CP5
(+24V)
(5A)
nc
CD32B
CD34 (FDD) (MOUSE)
LED
.c
w
w
w
137
2. HARDWARE B–62705EN/03
D Adjustment
om
e r.c
(7)(6)(5)(4) (3) (2) (1)
nt
ce
LED
nc
A
(7) SW7 (7) (6) (5) (4)
138
B–62705EN/03 2. HARDWARE
D LED display
COP7
JD33 JD34 JD9 CN2
DA59 (GREEN)
DA60 (GREEN)
DA61 (GREEN)
om
DA62 (RED)
DA63 (RED)
r.c
Name Color Status
DA59 GREEN Power is turned on (+5V).
DA60 GREEN HDD access LED.
e
DA61 GREEN CNC status is normal.
139
2. HARDWARE B–62705EN/03
D Mounting Position of
Maintenance Supplies
Bettery
Fan
LCD Backlight
om
Fuse Socket
r.c
Fuse
e
D Specification of
Maintenance Supplies
nt Name Specification
Battery A02B–0200–K102
ce
Fuse A13B–0172–K020
Fan A90L–0001–0423#105
LCD Backlight A61L–0001–0163#BL
nc
.c
w
w
w
140
B–62705EN/03 2. HARDWARE
D Trouble Shooting
Problem Measure ( ⇒ : Yes → : No)
(1) Power supply is good, but nothing • Are LED all off? ⇒ Go (11)
di l
displayed.
d ↓ No Yes
Y
om
: ON
: OFF
ST1
or
ST4
I/F board A for thin slot I/F board B for mini slot
r.c
↓ No
• Are the SW1 to SW7 correct? → Change setting
⇓ Yes N
No
e
(2) HSSB is not ready. • Is the optical fiber cable connected? → Connect.
(DA62 iis off.)
ff ) ⇓ Yes No
N
nt
• Is the CNC on?
⇓ Yes
→
No
N
Turn on the CNC.
Is the P.C.B. or the HSSB I/F board (CNC side) not good?
ce
(3) LCD backlight blinks. • Periodical blink indicates a fan alarm or a battery alarm.
Check whether the fan is not rotating or a battery alarm occur (DA63 is on).
(4) COM, LPT is not usable. Check BIOS parameters.
nc
141
2. HARDWARE B–62705EN/03
2.3
LIST OF UNIT AND
PRINTED CIRCUIT
BOARD
2.3.1
Control Unit P.C.B.
om
Name Specification Remarks 21-TB 210-TB 21-MB 210-MB
Power supply P.C.B. A A20B–1005–0421 Small capacity f f
Power supply P.C.B. B A20B–1005–0420 Large capacity f f f f
A16B–3200–0020 Ordering No. A02B–0210–H001 f
r.c
Main board A16B–2201–0721 Ordering No. A02B–0179–H001 f
Ordering No. A02B–0218–H001
A16B–2202–0900 f f f f
A02B–0219–H002
Ordering No. A02B–0179–H011
Bult–in I/O board A1 A16B–2201–0732 f f
A02B–0218–H010#A1
e
Bult–in I/O board A2 A16B–2201–0737 Ordering No. A02B–0218–H010#A2 f f
Ordering No. A02B–0179–H016
Bult–in I/O board B1 A16B–2201–0910 f f
A16B–2203–0040
A16B–3200–0031
Bult–in I/O board B Ordering No. A02B–0210–H011 f
A16B–2203–0041
A16B–3200–0035
w
142
B–62705EN/03 2. HARDWARE
om
HDD unit A02B–0207–C054 In new MMC–IV board f f
High–speed serial bus A20B–2002–0210 f f
interface board (CNC side)
High–speed serial bus A20B–8001–0300 Type 1 f f
i t f
interface b
board
d (PC side)
id )
(A20B–8001–0581) Type 2 f f
A20B–8100–0100
r.c
Intelligent terminal A16B–3300–0010 DRAM 8MB f f
A16B–3300–0011 DRAM 12MB f f
Intelligent terminal type 2 A20B–2100–0240 f f
Inverter P.C.B. A20B–2002–0500 In the intelligent terminal type 2 f f
Touch panel controller A20B–8001–0620 In the intelligent terminal type 2 f f
e
Card PC (DRAM 4MB) A13B–0178–H001 In the intelligent terminal type 2 f f
Card PC (DRAM 16MB) A13B–0178–H002 In the intelligent terminal type 2 f f
Card PC (DRAM 24MB)
HDD unit
ISA extension unit
A13B–0178–H003
A13B–0178–H030
A13B–0178–H040
nt
In the intelligent terminal type 2
In the intelligent terminal type 2
In the intelligent terminal type 2
f
f
f
f
f
f
ce
(with ISA extension)
ISA extension unit A13B–0178–H049 In the intelligent terminal type 2 f f
(without ISA extension)
ISA extension backplane A20B–2002–0240 f f
for intelligent terminal
nc
143
2. HARDWARE B–62705EN/03
2.3.2
Others
om
4–slot A02B–0218–C004 For Series 210–TB/MB
7.2” monochrome LCD control board A20B–2001–0840
8.4” color LCD control board A16B–2300–0082
9.5” monochrome LCD control board A20B–2001–0840
9.5” color LCD control board A16B–2300–0081
A02B–0210–C041#TA For Series 21/210–TB (English MDI)
r.c
Horizontal type 9” CRT/MDI
A02B–0210–C041#TAS For Series 21/210–TB (Symbolic MDI)
Separate 9” CRT A02B–0210–C111 For Series 21/210–TB
Separate 7.2” monochrome LCD A02B–0200–C081 For Series 21/210–TB
Separate 9.5” monochrome LCD A02B–0200–C115 For Series 21/210–TB
e
Separate 8.4” color LCD A02B–0218–C050 For Series 21/210–TB
A02B–0210–C120#TA For Series 21/210–TB (English MDI)
Separate small MDI
nt
A02B–0210–C120#TAS
A02B–0210–C122#TA
A02B–0210–C122#TAS
For Series 21/210–TB (Symbolic MDI)
For Series 21/210–TB (English MDI)
For Series 21/210–TB (Symbolic MDI)
ce
A02B–0218–C120#TR For Series 21/210–TB (English MDI)
Separate full–size
full size MDI
A02B–0218–C120#TS For Series 21/210–TB (Symbolic MDI)
A02B–0218–C121#TR For Series 21/210–TB (English MDI)
A02B–0218–C121#TS For Series 21/210–TB (Symbolic MDI)
nc
144
B–62705EN/03 2. HARDWARE
om
Separate 9”PDP A02B–0200–C100 For Series 21/210–MB
Separate 7.2” monochrome LCD A02B–0200–C081 For Series 21/210–MB
Separate 9.5” monochrome LCD A02B–0200–C115 For Series 21/210–MB
Separate 8.4” color LCD A02B–0218–C050 For Series 21/210–MB
A02B–0210–C120#MA For Series 21/210–MB (English MDI)
Separate small MDI
A02B–0210–C120#MAS For Series 21/210–MB (Symbolic MDI)
r.c
A02B–0210–C122#MA For Series 21/210–MB (English MDI)
A02B–0210–C122#MAS For Series 21/210–MB (Symbolic MDI)
A02B–0218–C120#MR For Series 21/210–MB (English MDI)
Separate full–size
full size MDI
A02B–0218–C120#MS For Series 21/210–MB (Symbolic MDI)
e
A02B–0218–C121#MR For Series 21/210–MB (English MDI)
A02B–0218–C121#MS For Series 21/210–MB (Symbolic MDI)
145
2. HARDWARE B–62705EN/03
2.4
HOW TO REPLACE
THE MODULES
2.4.1
Removing (1) Pull the latches of the module socket outwards. (Fig.(a))
(2) Pull out the module upward. (Fig.(b))
om
2.4.2
Insertion (1) Insert the new module board diagonally with B–SIDE outward.
(Fig.(b))
(2) While pushing on the upper edge of the module board, raise it until it
r.c
is locked. (Fig.(c))
e
nt (a)
ce
nc
No.1 pin
.c
w
(b)
w
w
(c)
146
B–62705EN/03 2. HARDWARE
2.5
REPLACING THE
FUSES
2.5.1 When a fuse built–in I/O board blows in the power supply unit of the
Replacing the Fuses CNC, find and correct the cause of the failure and replace the fuse.
Fig.2.5.1 shows the fuse mounting diagram.
for Power Supply of
Control Unit Fuse specification : A60L–0001–0046 #7.5R
om
r.c
I/O board
Fuse
e
nt
ce
nc
.c
2.5.2 When fuses on the new MMC–IV board melted down, find the cause and
Replacing the Fuses take measures. After that, replace the fuse.
w
147
2. HARDWARE B–62705EN/03
2.5.3
Replacing the Fuses WARNING
for Intelligent Terminal Before replacing a blown fuse, it is necessary to remove the
2 cause of the blown fuse. For this reason, only the personnel
who have a working knowledge of maintenance and safety
are allowed to carry out this work. When replacing a fuse
with the cabinet open, be careful not to touch the
high–voltage circuit section (marked and shielded with
om
a shock hazard prevention cover). If you touch the
high–voltage circuit section when it is uncovered, you will
get an electric shock.
(1) At first, Check the cause that the fuse has been broken and remove
the cause.
r.c
(2) Prepare a new Fuse (A13B–0172–K020).
(3) Make sure that I.T.2 is turned off the power.
(4) Enable to work from rear side of I.T.2 by taking it out from panel,
e
etc.
(5) Remove the old fuse, and put a new fuse to the socket exactly.
nt
(6) Mount I.T.2 again.
(7) Turn on the power, then confirm that I.T.2 is turned on.
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w
148
B–62705EN/03 2. HARDWARE
2.5.4 This section describes the location and replacement of the LCD fuse.
Replacing the Fuse for
LCD WARNING
Before replacing a blown fuse, it is necessary to remove the
cause of the blown fuse. For this reason, only the personnel
who have a working knowledge of maintenance and safety
are allowed to carry out this work. When replacing a fuse
with the cabinet open, be careful not to touch the
high–voltage circuit section (marked and shielded with
om
a shock hazard prevention cover). If you touch the
high–voltage circuit section when it is uncovered, you will
get an electric shock.
D
e r.c
Fuse FS1
nt
ce
LCD Unit (Rear view)
D
(1) If the fuse blows, first find and eliminate the cause. Then, replace the
nc
fuse.
(2) Pull the old fuse up.
(3) Push a new fuse into the fuse holder.
.c
D
Ordering code : A02B–0200–K103 *
Rating : 5.0 A
w
149
2. HARDWARE B–62705EN/03
om
Battery for Memory The CNC has a battery to memorize data of part programs, offset data,
Backup system parameters and so on. When the battery was reaching the low
level, the CNC would display BAT on the screen before losing the
important data in the memory.
r.c
When you find the sign BAT , please replace the battery as Subsec. 2.6.1
within a week. If you do not replace the battery, the data in memory could
get lost.
Battery for Absolute When the machine is equipped with absolute encoder. System such as an
e
Pulse Coder absolute pulse coder or absolute linear scale, there is a battery for them
separately from the battery for memory backup.
nt
When you get an alarm message No. 307 or 308 APC alarm, please
replace the battery within a week following the instructions in 2.6.2 or
2.6.3, or the absolute position could be lost and it would be required to
ce
take a procedure of manual reference point return.
Other batteries The MMC–IV and intelligent terminal use a battery to retain the BIOS
parameters and clock information. When the battery voltage drops to a
nc
certain level, the entire screen blinks. If this occurs, replace the battery
immediately, as described in Section 2.6.4 or 2.6.5.
.c
5. The battery used for memory back up is located on the front of the main
board.
w
Remove the battery cover on the main board by holding the upper and
lower part of the battery cover and pulling it towards you. Then take
off the battery.
6. Remove the connector (CP8) on the main board towards you.
7. Connect the connector of new battery to main board.
8. Mount a battery and put the battery cover back on.
9. Close the cabinet.
10.Turn on the power to the machine (CNC) to check that no alarm
appears on the CRT screen.
150
B–62705EN/03 2. HARDWARE
Connector on
cable
CP8
BATTERY
Battery
Battery
unit
unit
Connector on
PCB side
om
Battery
r.c
Battery Replacement
e
WARNING
Turn off the power to the entire machine before opening the
nt
cabinet.
Be careful not to touch the high–voltage circuits
(marked and covered by shock prevention covers)
ce
when opening the cabinet and replacing the battery.
There is a danger of electric shock if the protective cover is
removed from a high–voltage circuit.
nc
CAUTION
Never replace the battery with other than the specified type
(A02B–0177–K106).
.c
151
2. HARDWARE B–62705EN/03
om
other.)
Thread
r.c
Ç Ç
Lid
e
nt
5. Having exchanged the batteries put the lid back on.
6. Procedure completes.
ce
2.6.3 In case that the α series servo drive is used, the battery for absolute pulse
Replacing Batteries for coder could be provided on the α series servo amplifier module instead
nc
of the battery case as shown in 1.3. In this case the battery is not an
Absolute Pulse Coder alkaline battery but a lithium battery, A06B–6073–K001. Prepare the
(α Series Servo battery in advance and replace it by the following procedure.
Amplifier Module)
.c
WARNING
w
152
B–62705EN/03 2. HARDWARE
om
2 Remove the battery case on the front panel of α series servo amplifier
module (SVM).
The battery case can be removed by holding the top of the case and
pulling the case towards you.
r.c
Battery case Connector
Connector CX5X
CX5X
e
nt α series
ce
SVM
Battery compartment
Battery
nc
A06B–6073–K001
153
2. HARDWARE B–62705EN/03
2.6.4 A battery is mounted on the new MMC–IV board to remember the BIOS
Replacing the Battery setting. When voltage of the battery is down, alarm message BAT is
for New MMC–IV displayed on the CNC screen. When the message is displayed, please
replace both of the CNC side battery and the new MMC–IV side battery
promptly.
How to replace the new MMC–IV side battery
1. Use the specified battery (A02B–0200–K102).
2. Turn on the CNC more than 5 minutes.
om
3. Turn off the machine.
4. Remove the new MMC–IV board from the CNC controller
5. Remove the connector of the dead battery on the board, and connect
the connector of the new battery.
r.c
6. Remove the dead battery from the board and mount the new battery.
7. Install the new MMC–IV board in the CNC controller.
8. Turn on the CNC and confirm not to display alarm message.
e
WARNING
D Turn off the machine before opening the door of the cabinet.
D Do not touch the parts of high voltage.
nt
CAUTION
ce
D Do not use except for the specified battery.
D If the battery connector is removed more than 5 minutes, the
BIOS setting of the new MMC–IV board will be lost. In this
case, BIOS setup menu will be displayed on the MMC
nc
154
B–62705EN/03 2. HARDWARE
2.6.5
Replacing the Battery The time from disconnecting the cable of old battery to connect-
for Intelligent Terminal ing the cable of new battery should be shorter than 5 minutes.
(1) For the worst, write BIOS parameters down. (Refer to Sec.1.16 and
Sec.1.17.)
(2) Prepare a new battery (A02B–0200–K102).
Use a lithium battery (A98L–0031–0017) for an intelligent terminal
of type 2 and earlier types.
om
(3) After I.T.2 is turning on for 5 seconds or more, turn off the power
of I.T.2, then enable to work from rear side of I.T.2 by taking it out
from panel, etc.
(4) Pull out battery connector, then remove the battery from the holder.
(5) Lead the cable of new battery as Fig.2.6.5.
r.c
(6) Connect the cable, put the new battery in the holder.
(7) Mount Intelligent Terminal Type2 again.
(8) Turn on the power, then confirm that BIOS parameters has not erased
e
(in case that BIOS parameters has erased, BIOS set–up will start
automatically).
nt Lithium Battery
ce
nc
Front
.c
w
BAT1
155
2. HARDWARE B–62705EN/03
2.7
REPLACING THE
FAN MOTOR
2.7.1 Fan ordering information
1. Remove the control section printed circuit board underneath the fan to
om
be replaced.
2. There is a backplane inside the slot. The fan motor cable is connected
to the backplane. Grasp the left and right side of the cable connector
attached to the backplane and remove it.
3. Open the upper lid of the control section rack. Insert a philips head
r.c
screwdriver into the hole at the center front of the lid. The latch
holding the cover in place can be released by prying with the
screwdriver in the direction shown in (3) of Fig.2.7.1.
4. Open the lid sufficiently and remove the fan motor. Since the fan itself
e
is not screwed into the rack, it can be easily removed.
5. Install the new fan motor. Guide the fan motor cable through the hole
nt
and into the rack.
6. Close the lid until the latch locks.
7. Attach the fan motor cable to the connector on the back plane. At this
ce
time,affix the middle portion of the cable to the hooks at the back of
the rack.
8. Insert the removed control section printed circuit board.
nc
(4) (3)
.c
w
Fan motor
Cable
w
w
Connector
Back plane
156
B–62705EN/03 2. HARDWARE
2.7.2
Replacing the Fan for (1) Make sure that I.T. is turned off the power.
Intelligent Terminal (2) Prepare a new Fan (A90L–0001–0423#105).
(3) Disconnect the Fan connector. The connector is latched. Disconnect
the cable while pressing the latch at the bottom of the connector
down, using a screwdriver or other tools.
(4) Loosen the 2 screws fixing the Fan, and remove the old fan.
(5) Screw the new Fan at 2 points, and connect the fan connector to
om
CN39B.
e r.c
nt
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w
157
2. HARDWARE B–62705EN/03
2.8 Upon reaching the end of its service life, the backlight unit must be
replaced. The unit can be replaced either by the user or by a FANUC
REPLACING THE service engineer.
LCD BACKLIGHT
FOR DISPLAY
D Replacing the backlight A cold cathode tube (CFL) is used as the backlight of the 7.2″ STN.
of the 7.2″ STN Ordering information: A61L–0001–0142#BL
(1) Removing the CFL
om
CFL
r.c
Lamp cover Direction of
extraction Remove the CFL.
e
1) Reset the three hooks. 1) Pull out the reflective film. 1) Remove the CFL.
2) Remove the CFL cover.
nt
(2) Installing a new CFL
2) If the CFL has been broken,
carefully remove all pieces of glass.
ce
Groove for
extraction
nc
1) Mount the new CFL. At this time, wrap 1) While lifting the frame end, place 1) Reinstall the lamp cover.
the reflective sheet around the CFL. the reflective sheet under the frame. 2) Bend the three hooks.
w
Remark) When the screen display is not required, the display and
w
158
B–62705EN/03 2. HARDWARE
D Replacing the LCD (1) If I.T.2 has the Touch Panel, disconnect the CN1 on the Touch Panel
backlight for intelligent Controller PCB. And loosen the 6 screws, and remove the cover.
terminal 2 (Remove the battery from the battery holder to workpiece. But do
not disconnect the battery connector.)
om
r.c
CN1
e
nt
ce
(2) Loosen the screw at 4 points, and disconnect the 2 connectors
(CP1:on the Inverter, CN1:on the main PCB), and remove the LCD
nc
unit.
.c
w
w
CP1
w
CN1
159
2. HARDWARE B–62705EN/03
(3) Loosen one screw and pull out the LCD Backlight as below figure,
and exchange it.
om
Backplane of LCD
PCB
r.c
PCB
e
nt
ce
(4) Assemble the unit in a reverse order.
(Note that the cables don’t put between the plates etc.)
nc
.c
w
w
w
160
B–62705EN/03 2. HARDWARE
2.9
ADJUSTING THE
FLAT DISPLAY
2.9.1 Fine adjustment of the video signal is supported to enable its use with
Adjusting the Color color liquid crystal displays and plasma displays. This adjustment is
necessary to compensate for errors resulting from the combination of NC
Liquid Crystal Display devices and cables.
and Plasma Display
om
Adjustment of the video signal is necessary if you have replaced the
display unit, cable, or a hardware component of the display circuit in the
NC, either as part of regular field maintenance or the correct a failure.
Locations of switches
and jumper pins
r.c
SW2 SW1
TM1
SW1
e
Color liquid crystal display Plasma display (rear view)
nt (rear view)
Adjustment
ce
D Eliminating flicker D Analog color liquid crystal display: Jumper pin TM1
Change the jumper pin to another side.
Normally one of these settings will eliminate flicker.
nc
D Adjusting the horizontal D Analog color liquid crystal display : Switch SW1
position
w
NOTE
Do not attempt to change any controls or settings other than
those described above.
If any controls or settings other than those described above
are changed, the appearance of the display will be
abnormal.
161
2. HARDWARE B–62705EN/03
2.9.2 The monochrome liquid crystal display is provided with a setting switch
How to Replace the tuner for precisely adjust contrast.
This setting is necessary to accommodate subtle differences among the
Monochrome Liquid NC units, cables, and LCDs to be used.
Crystal Display
D Tuning locations Color Liquid Crystal Display(Rear Part)
om
VRD1
e r.c
D Contrast setting (VRD1) VRD1 can be used to adjust the contrast.
nt
NOTE
Do not change those other than the above settings and
controls, or otherwise the screen display may become
ce
abnormal.
nc
.c
w
w
w
162
B–62705EN/03 2. HARDWARE
2.10 It is necessary to regulary clean the heat transformer, because the heat
transformation ability will be reduced by the accumulation of dust. The
MAINTENANCE OF frequency of the cleaning needed differs according to the installation
HEAT PIPE TYPE environment and therefore should be determined by your own judgment
HEAT EXCHANGER accordint to the degree of dirt.
om
Air filter cleaning and replacement method
1 When cleaning and replacing the filter, be sure to cut off the fan’s
electric power source.
r.c
2 Detach the filter cover and take out the filter inside.
e
towards the inside by minus screwdriver, etc.
nt
ce
3 Protect the filter from silting due to dust by blowing air on both sides.
nc
.c
w
pulled.
163
2. HARDWARE B–62705EN/03
om
Power cable for fan
(detach the connector)
e r.c
nt Installation screws B (1) Installation screws A (2)
Earth cable (if the installation screw on the fan
side is detached, it can be taken out)
Detach the two installation screws (A) of the external fan unit, and detach the unit
ce
from the main unit by sliding it down. Detach the power source cable to the fan and
the earth cable. Also detach installation screws (B).
1 Wipe the dirt, condensation, etc., which has accumulated on the fan
motor and fan installation case with a dry cloth, etc. When the
w
However, take care not to allow the detergent to enter the electrical
sections such as the internal rotor of the fan motor.
w
164
B–62705EN/03 2. HARDWARE
1 Detach the heat exchanger format the unit and either blow off with air,
wipe off with a dry cloth, or brush the accumulated dirt, condensation,
etc.
om
When the dirt is especially severe
1 Detach the internal fan unit, the terminal unit, and the cable from the
main unit.
Main unit
r.c
Terminal unit and cable
e
nt
ce
nc
2 Using a neutral detergent, remove the dirt from the main unit fan
section by brushing. At this time, take care not to bend the fin of the
element.
3 After cleaning, dry well.
.c
D Installation
w
2 Install the internal fan unit in the main body of heat transformer.
3 Mount the main heat exchanger unit on the panel, then install the
external fan unit.
At this time, do not forget to connect the fan power cable and the earth
cable.
165
2. HARDWARE B–62705EN/03
2.11 The peripheral units, such as the control unit and CRT/MDI, have been
designed on the assumption that they are housed in closed cabinets. In this
ENVIRONMENTAL manual “cabinet” refers to the following:
REQUIREMENT (1) Cabinet manufactured by the machine tool builder for housing the
control unit or peripheral units;
(2) Cabinet for housing the flexible turnkey system provided by FANUC:
(3) Operation pendant, manufactured by the machine tool builder, for
housing the CRT/MDI unit or operator’s panel ;
(4) Equivalent to the above.
om
The environmental conditions when installing these cabinets shall
conform to the following table.
r.c
Change in temper- 1.1°C/minute max.
ature
Relative Normal : 75% or less
humidity Temporary (with 1 month) : 95% or less
Vibration In operation : 0.5 G or less
e
Environment Normal machine shop environment
(The environment must be considered if the cabinets
are in a location where the density of dust, coolant, and/
nt or organic solvent is relatively high.)
166
B–62705EN/03 2. HARDWARE
NOTE
1 Operating ambient temperature
The temperature sensor on the MMC–IV or intelligent
terminal printed circuit board monitors whether the
temperature is within the specified range. (The operator
can check the state using the CNC diagnosis screen.)
1) If the ambient temperature is outside the specified
range at power–on
Only the CNC and PMC are turned on.
om
Once the temperature moves within the specified
range, the MMC–IV is automatically turned on.
2) If the ambient temperature moves outside the specified
range during operation after normal power–on
An error occurs when the system attempts to access
r.c
the hard disk.
2 Vibration
The CNC control unit or built–in hard disk drive may exhibit
vibration at an arbitrary frequency.
e
Once the CNC control unit has been installed in the
machine, check that no vibration occurs.
nt
Be particularly careful to eliminate any vibration when
using the memory card socket.
ce
Data stored on the hard disk may be damaged or destroyed as
a result of a mis–operation or system failure, even when the
above–listed conditions are satisfied. In particular, turning off
nc
to another medium.
w
w
w
167
2. HARDWARE B–62705EN/03
2.12 The following units related to the CNC control unit require input power
of 24 VDC "10% (excluding the 14″ CRT/MDI unit):
POWER SUPPLY
Table 2.12 Power supply
Power supply
Unit Power supply
voltage
21–TB 24 VDC"10% 2.4A (only control unit)
control unit A ("10% includes
21–TB momentary 3.4A (only control unit)
control unit B surges and
ri les.))
ripples
om
21–MB 3.4A (only control unit)
control unit
Series 210 3.5A (only control unit)
control unit When HSSB is used.
Series 210 5.5A (only control unit)
control unit When MMC–IV is used.
r.c
Loader control 0.7A (only 21–TB)
option board
9″ CRT/MDI unit 0.8A
9″ PDP unit 2.0A
7.2″ STN unit 0.8A
e
9.5″ STN unit 0.8A
8.4″ TFT color unit 0.8A
nt
14″ CRT/MDI unit
9.5″ TFT/MDI unit
170 to 264VAC
24 VDC"10%
( 10% iincludes
("10% l d
0.6A
0.8A
I/O Unit–A Depends on the type and number
ce
momentary of modules. Refer to “I/O
surges and Unit–MODEL A Connection and
ripples.) Maintenance Manual” (B–61813E).
D Intelligent terminal
nc
NOTE
w
(b) Timing
The power for the intelligent terminal should be switched on and
off within "100 ms of the CNC power being switched on and off.
168
B–62705EN/03 2. HARDWARE
om
ISA 3500mA
–12V ISA 180mA
–5V ISA 74mA
r.c
25 W (during normal operation)
NOTE
The heat dissipation increases with the addition of a
e
peripheral device or ISA expansion board.
nt
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w
169
2. HARDWARE B–62705EN/03
2.13 The CNC has been steadily reduced in size using surface–mount and
custom LS1 technologies for electronic components. The CNC also is
ACTION AGAINST designed to be protected from external noise. However, it is difficult to
NOISE measure the level and frequency of noise quantitatively, and noise has
many uncertain factors. It is important to prevent both noise from being
generated and generated noise from being introduced into the CNC. This
precaution improves the stability of the CNC machine tool system.
The CNC component units are often installed close to the parts generating
noise in the power magnetics cabinet. Possible noise sources into the CNC
are capacitive coupling, electromagnetic induction, and ground loops.
om
When designing the power magnetics cabinet, guard against noise in the
machine as described in the following:
r.c
2.13.1 The cables used for the CNC machine tool are classified as listed in the
Separating Signal following table :
Bind the cables in each group as described in the action column.
Lines
Group Signal line Action
e
A Primary AC power line Bind the cables in group A separately
(N t 1) from
(Note f groups B and
d C or cover
Secondary AC power line
nt AC/DC power lines (containing the
power lines for the servo and spindle
motors)
group A with an electromagnetic shield
grou
(Note 2).
Connect spark killers or diodes with
y
the solenoid and relay.
ce
AC/DC solenoid
AC/DC relay
B DC solenoid (24VDC) Connect diodes with DC solenoid and
relay
relay.
DC relay (24 VDC) Bind the cables in group B separately
from group A or cover group B with an
nc
C Cable between the CNC and Bind the cables in group C separately
servo amplifier from group A or cover group C with an
l t ti shield.
electromagnetic hi ld
Cable for position and velocity feed-
back Separate group C as far from group B
w
as possible
possible.
Cable between the CNC and spindle
amplifier Be sure to perform shield processing.
NOTE
1 The groups must be 10 cm or more apart from one another
when binding the cables in each group.
2 The electromagnetic shield refers to shielding between
groups with grounded steel plates.
170
B–62705EN/03 2. HARDWARE
Cabinet
Duct
To operator’s
om
panel,
motor, etc.
Group A Group B, C
r.c
Cover
e
2.13.2 The following ground systems are provided for the CNC machined tool:
Ground 1. Signal ground system (SG)
nt
The signal ground (SG) supplies the reference voltage (0V) of the
electrical signal system to the machine.
2. Frame ground system (FG)
ce
The frame ground system (FG) is used for safety, and suppressing
external and internal noises. In the frame ground system, the frames
and cases of the units, panels, and shields for the interface cables
between the units are connected.
nc
unit Operator’s
panel
w
w
Machine
tool
Power magnet-
ics cabinet
Distribution board
171
2. HARDWARE B–62705EN/03
om
cable or more.)
S Use the cable containing the AC power wire and the system gound
wire so that power is supplied with the ground wire connected.
2.13.3
r.c
Connecting the Signal
Ground (SG) of the
Control Unit
e
Control unit
nt
ce
nc
M3 or M4
w
M3 or M4 terminal for
signal ground (SG) Ground cable: wire with a
sectional area of 2mm2 Ground cable
or more
w
w
System ground
Frame ground Ground plate of
(FG) = the cabinet
Connect the 0 V line of the electronic circuit in the control unit with the
ground plate of the cabinet via the signal ground (SG) terminal.
The SG terminal is located on the printed circuit board at the rear of the
control unit.
172
B–62705EN/03 2. HARDWARE
2.13.4 The AC/DC solenoid and relay are used in the power magnetics cabinet.
Noise Suppressor A high pulse voltage is caused by coil inductance when these devices are
turned on or off.
This pulse voltage induced through the cable causes the electronic circuits
to be disturbed.
To reduce the pulse voltage, use a spark killer for an AC device or a diode
for a DC device.
om
(1) CR spark killer
Use a spark killer for AC circuit consisting of a resistor and capacitor
in series. This type of spark killer is called a CR spark killer.
(A varistor is useful in clamping the peak voltage of the pulse voltage,
but cannot suppress the sudden rise of the pulse voltage. FANUC
r.c
therefore recommends a CR spark killer.)
The reference capacitance and resistance of the spark killer shall
conform to the following based on the current (1(A)) and DC
resistance of the stationary coil :
e
1) Resistance (R):Equivalent to DC resistance of the coil
2) Capacitance (C): I 2 to I 2 (µF)
nt
Equivalent circuit of the spark killer
10 20
R C
ce
Spark killer
nc
AC relay
Motor
.c
Spark killer
w
w
Diode
DC relay
173
2. HARDWARE B–62705EN/03
2.13.5 The CNC cables that required shielding should be clamped by the method
Cable Clamp and shown below. This cable clamp treatment is for both cable support and
proper grounding of the shield. To insure stable CNC system operation,
Shield Processing follow this cable clamp method.
Partially peel out the sheath and expose the shield. Push and clamp by
the plate metal fittings for clamp at the part. Metal fittings for clamp are
attached to the control unit. The ground plate must be made by the
machine tool builder, and set as follows:
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
om
Õ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
Control unit
Machine side
ÇÇ
installation
ÇÇ
board
r.c
ÇÇ
Õ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
Ground plate
ÇÇ
e
Ô Ÿ
ÕÕ ÇÇ
nt Ô Ÿ
ÕÕ
Metal fittings
for clamp ÇÇ
Ÿ ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ce
Shield cover
nc
.c
w
w
w
174
B–62705EN/03 3. INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA
After you change a SRAM module, you must set various data again.
This chapter describes the procedures to input and output the parameters,
om
the part programs and the tool offset values.
r.c
3.2 INPUTTING/OUTPUTTING DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
3.3 DATA INPUT/OUTPUT ON THE
ALL IO SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
e
nt
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w
175
3. INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA B–62705EN/03
3.1
SETTING
PARAMETERS
FOR INPUT/OUTPUT
D Setting procedure of First, enable parameter writing by performing steps 1 to 3, below.
parameters
1. Set to MDI mode or emergency stop state.
2. Press OFFSET
SETTING key several times or press soft key [SETING] to display
om
SETTING (HANDY) screen.
3. Set the cursor to PARAMETER WRITE and, press 1 and INPUT
r.c
4. Press SYSTEM key several times to display the following screen.
e
0001 FCV
nt Y 0
0
0012 RMV
X 0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
MIR
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
ce
Z 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
B 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0020 I/O CHANNEL
S 0 T0000
nc
(bit parameter)
4) Soft key [+INPUT] : Input value is added to the value at cursor
(word type)
5) Soft key [INPUT] : Input value is replaced with the value at
cursor (word type)
6) Soft key [READ] : Parameters are input from reader/puncher
interface.
7) Soft key [PUNCH] : Parameters are output to reader/puncher
interface.
176
B–62705EN/03 3. INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA
7. Convenient method
om
(Ex.1) 1 2 3 4 EOB 4 5 6 7 EOB 9
9 9 9 INPUT
r.c
0 1234
0 4567
⇒
0 9999
0 0
e
nt (Ex.2) 1 2 3
1234
EOB 9 9 9 9 INPUT
ce
0 0
⇒
0 9999
0 0
nc
⇒
0 1234
0 0
w
177
3. INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA B–62705EN/03
om
3.2.1 Be sure that data output cannot be done in an alarm status.
Confirming the Parameters required for output are as follows :
(When changing a parameter, do so in MDI mode or in the emergency stop
Parameters Required for state.)
r.c
Data Output #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0000 ISO
e
1 : Output with ISO code (FANUC cassette)
* In the example shown here, an I/O unit is connected to JD5A for data
input and output (I/O channel = 0).
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
.c
178
B–62705EN/03 3. INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA
om
5 Portable tape reader
6 FANUC PPR, FSP–G, FSP–H
1: 50 5: 200 9: 2400
r.c
2: 100 6: 300 l10: 4800
3: 110 7: 600 11: 9600
4: 150 8: 1200 12: 19200 [BPS]
e
3.2.2
Outputting CNC
Parameters
nt
In case of PPR, steps 2 and 3 are not required.
1. Select EDIT mode.
2. Press PROG key and soft key PRGRM to select a program text.
ce
PROG
4. Press SYSTEM key and soft key [PARAM] to display parameter screen.
6. Press soft key [PUNCH] and [EXEC],and the parameters are started
to be output.
w
w
w
179
3. INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA B–62705EN/03
3.2.3
Outputting PMC 1. Select MDI mode.
Parameters 2. Press OFFSET
SETTING key then soft key [SETTING] to select a setting screen.
om
5. Press soft key [PMCPRM] and soft key [KEEPRL]
6. Set the cursor to K17 and set the first bit to 1.
X X X X X X 1 X INPUT
r.c
Thus, data input/output screen has been selected.
7. Select EDIT mode.
8. Press soft key then key .
e
9. Press soft key [I/O] and set the parameters on I/O.
Item selection cursor moves to the following item after data of an item
is set.
nt
10.In CHANNEL NO item, input 1 INPUT to select I/O channel 1.
11.In DEVICE item, press soft key [FDCAS] to select the floppy cassette.
ce
12.In KIND DATA item, press soft key [PARAM].
13.In FUNCTION item, press soft key [WRITE].
14.In FILE No item, specify a file name. In this example input as follows:
nc
@ P M C INPUT
15.Press soft key [EXEC]. Then PMC parameters are started to be output.
16.After the PMC parameters have been output, set PARAMETER
.c
WRITE to 0.
17.Press RESET to release alarm 100.
w
w
3.2.4
Outputting Pitch Error 1. Select EDIT mode.
Compensation Amount
w
2. Press SYSTEM key several times, press soft key [PARAM], and
[PITCH] to select the SETTING screen for pitch error amount.
3. Press soft key [(OPRT)] and .
4. Press soft key [PUNCH] and [EXEC], then pitch error compensation
amount is started to be output.
180
B–62705EN/03 3. INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA
3.2.5 When custom macro function is equipped, values of variable no. 500 and
Outputting Custom later are output.
Macro Variable Values 1. Press OFFSET
SETTING key.
om
values are output.
3.2.6
1. Select EDIT mode.
r.c
Outputting Tool
Compensation Amount 2. Press OFFSET
SETTING key and soft key [OFFSET] to display the tool
compensation amount screen.
3. Press [(OPRT)] key and soft key .
e
4. Press soft key [PUNCH] an [EXEC] key, and the tool compensation
nt
amount is started to be output.
ce
3.2.7
Outputting Part Program 1. Confirm the following parameters. If 1 is set, set to the MDI mode and
set it to 0.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
nc
PROG
181
3. INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA B–62705EN/03
3.2.8
Inputting CNC 1. Set to the emergency stop state.
Parameters 2. Confirm that the patameters required to input data is correct.
1) Press OFFSET
SETTING key several times, and press [SETING] to display
SETTING screen.
2) Confirm that PARAMETER WRITE=1.
3) Press SYSTEM key to select the parameter screen.
om
4)
0020 Selectionof I/O channel
r.c
1 : Channel 1 (I/O printed circuit board JD5A)
2 : Channel 2 (I/O printed circuit board JD5B)
3 : Channel 3 (Option 1 board JD5C)
e
5)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0101 nt NFD
6)
0102 Specification number of I/O device
w
2 FANUCFloppy cassette F1
3 PROGRAM FILE Mate, FANUC FA Card adapter, FANUC
Floppy casette adapter, FSP–H, FANUC Handy File
w
4 Not used
5 Portable tape reader
6 FANUC PPR, FSP–G, FSP–H
182
B–62705EN/03 3. INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA
7)
0103 Baud rate
1: 50 5: 200 9: 2400
2: 100 6: 300 l10: 4800
3: 110 7: 600 11: 9600
4: 150 8: 1200 12: 19200 [BPS]
3. Press soft key
4. Press soft key [READ] and [EXEC]. Then input of parameters are
om
started.
5. After parameters have been inputted, turn off power and turn it on.
6. Alarm 300 is issued if the system employs an absolute pulse coder.
In such a case, perform reference position return again.
r.c
3.2.9 Set the emergency stop state.
Operation of 12 is not required when PPR is used.
1. Turn off (KEY4=1) the program protect key.
e
2. Press OFFSET
SETTING key and soft key [SETTING] to select the SETTING
screen.
nt
3. Confirm that PARAMETER WRITE=1.
4. Press SYSTEM key and soft key [PMC].
ce
5. Press soft key [PMCPRM] and soft key [KEEPRL].
6. Set the cursor to K17 and set bit 1 to 1.
0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 INPUT .
nc
10.In DEVICE item, press [FDCAS] key to select the floppy cassette.
11.In FUNCTION item, press soft key [READ] to input data
12.In FILE NO item, press 2
w
14.After data has been read, turn off power and turn it on.
183
3. INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA B–62705EN/03
om
6. Press soft key [(OPRT)] and key.
7. Press soft key [READ] and [EXEC], then the pitch error
compensation amount is started to be input.
8. After data has been input, press OFFSET
SETTING key twice to display the
r.c
SETTING screen and return the PARAMETER WRITE to 0.
3.2.11 If the system is equipped with the custom macro fucntion, input the
variable values.
e
Inputting Custom Macro
For PPR, item 4 is not required.
Variable Values
1. Confirm that EDIT mode is selected.
nt
2. Turn off the program protect key (KEY2=1).
3. Press PROG key then soft key [PRGRM] to display program contents.
ce
4. Press soft key [(OPRT)], , [F SRH], and 4 [EXEC] to select
a file.
5. Press soft key [(OPRT)] and key .
nc
number 500 and confirm the custom macro variables are set correctly.
Of the data displayed, 0 and vacant differ in meaning.
Vacant is an undefined variable. To set vacant, press soft key
[INPUT].
10.Select EDIT mode again.
11.Press PROG key to select the program display screen.
12.Press address O and a program number (0001 for example) ,then press
DELETE to delete the program.
184
B–62705EN/03 3. INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA
om
5. Press OFFSET
SETTING key, and soft key [OFFSET] to display the tool
compensation amount screen.
6. Press soft key [(OPRT)] and key.
7. Press [READ] key and [EXEC] key and data input is started.
r.c
3.2.13 Confirm the following parameters. If 1 is set, set it to 0.
Inputting Part Programs (Change it in MDI mode).
e
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3201 NPE RAL
nt
#1 (RAL) When programs are registered:
l 0 : All programs are registered.
1 : Only one program is registered.
ce
#6 (NPE) When programs are registered in part program storage area, M02,M30
and M99 are:
0 : regarded as the end of program.
l 1 : not regarded as the end of porgram.
nc
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3202 NE9 NE8
.c
#0 (NE8)
l 0: Programs of 8000s can be edited.
1: Programs of 8000s are protected.
w
#4 (NE9)
l 0: Programs of 9000s can be edited.
w
185
3. INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA B–62705EN/03
om
DEVICE NUM. 0 PUNCH CODE ISO
BAUDRATE 4800 INPUT CODE ASCII
STOP BIT 2 FEED OUTPUT FEED
NULL INPUT (EIA) NO EOB OUTPUT (ISO) CR
TV CHECK (NOTES) ON BAUDRATE CLK. INNER
CD CHECK (232C) OFF RESET/ALARM ON
PARITY BIT OFF SAT COMMAND HOST
r.c
INTERFACE RS422 COM PROTCOL A
END CODE EXT COM CODE ASCII
(0:EIA 1:ISO)>1_
MDI **** *** *** *** 12:34:56
e
PRGRM PARAM OFFSET MACRO (OPRT)
186
B–62705EN/03 3. INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA
om
1 Press function key SYSTEM
.
r.c
3 Press soft key [ALL IO] to display the ALL IO screen.
NOTE
1 If program or floppy is selected in EDIT mode, the program
directory or floppy screen is displayed.
e
2 When the power is first turned on, program is selected by
default.
nt READ/PUNCH (PROGRAM) O1234 N12345
ce
I/O CHANNEL 3 TV CHECK OFF
DEVICE NUM. 0 PUNCH CODE ISO
BAUDRATE 4800 INPUT CODE ASCII
STOP BIT 2 FEED OUTPUT FEED
nc
(0:EIA 1:ISO)>1_
MDI **** *** *** *** 12:34:56
w
NOTE
Baud rate clock, CD check (232C), reset/alarm report, and
w
4 Select the soft key corresponding to the desired type of data (program,
parameter, and so forth).
5 Set the parameters corresponding to the type of input/output unit to be
used. (Parameter setting is possible regardless of the mode.)
187
3. INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA B–62705EN/03
3.3.2 A program can be input and output using the ALL IO screen.
Inputting and When entering a program using a cassette or card, the user must specify
the input file containing the program (file search).
Outputting Programs
File search
1 Press soft key [PRGRM] on the ALL IO screen, described in Subsec.
om
3.3.1.
2 Select EDIT mode. A program directory is displayed.
3 Press soft key [(OPRT)]. The screen and soft keys change as shown
below.
D A program directory is displayed only in EDIT mode. In all other
r.c
modes, the ALL IO screen is displayed.
O0001 N00010
e
PROGRAM (NUM.) MEMORY (CHAR.)
USED : 60 3321
FREE : 2 429
nt O0010 O0001 O0003 O0002 O0555 O0999
O0062 O0004 O0005 O1111 O0969 O6666
O0021 O1234 O0588 O0020 O0040
ce
>_
nc
4 Enter address N.
5 Enter the number of the file to be found.
D N0
w
D N–9998
When –9998 is specified, the next file is found. Then, each time
a file input/output operation is performed, N–9999 is automatically
inserted. This means that subsequent files can be sequentially
found automatically.
This state is canceled by specifying N0, N1 to N9999, or N–9999,
or upon a reset.
6 Press soft keys [F SRH] and [EXEC].
CAN EXEC
The specified file is found.
188
B–62705EN/03 3. INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA
Inputting a program
1 Press soft key [PRGRM] on the ALL IO screen, described in Subsec.
3.3.1.
2 Select EDIT mode. A program directory is displayed.
3 Press soft key [(OPRT)]. The screen and soft keys change as shown
below.
om
D A program directory is displayed only in EDIT mode. In all other
modes, the ALL IO screen is displayed.
O0001 N00010
r.c
PROGRAM (NUM.) MEMORY (CHAR.)
USED : 60 3321
FREE : 2 429
e
O0062 O0004 O0005 O1111 O0969 O6666
O0021 O1234 O0588 O0020 O0040
nt >_
EDIT **** *** *** *** 14:46:09
ce
F SRH READ PUNCH DELETE (OPRT)
nc
189
3. INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA B–62705EN/03
Outputting programs
1 Press soft key [PRGRM] on the ALL IO screen, described in Subsec.
3.3.1.
2 Select EDIT mode. A program directory is displayed.
3 Press soft key [(OPRT)]. The screen and soft keys change as shown
below.
om
D A program directory is displayed only in EDIT mode. In all other
modes, the ALL IO screen is displayed.
O0001 N00010
r.c
PROGRAM (NUM.) MEMORY (CHAR.)
USED : 60 3321
FREE : 2 429
e
O0062 O0004 O0005 O1111 O0969 O6666
O0021 O1234 O0588 O0020 O0040
nt >_
EDIT **** *** *** *** 14:46:09
ce
F SRH READ PUNCH DELETE (OPRT)
nc
4 Enter address O.
5 Enter a desired program number.
If –9999 is entered, all programs in memory are output.
To output a range of programs, enter O∆∆∆∆, OVVVV . The
.c
190
B–62705EN/03 3. INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA
Deleting files
1 Press soft key [PRGRM] on the ALL IO screen, described in Subsec.
3.3.1.
2 Select EDIT mode. A program directory is displayed.
3 Press soft key [(OPRT)]. The screen and soft keys change as shown
below.
om
D A program directory is displayed only in EDIT mode. In all other
modes, the ALL IO screen is displayed.
O0001 N00010
r.c
PROGRAM (NUM.) MEMORY (CHAR.)
USED : 60 3321
FREE : 2 429
e
O0062 O0004 O0005 O1111 O0969 O6666
O0021 O1234 O0588 O0020 O0040
nt >_
EDIT **** *** *** *** 14:46:09
ce
F SRH READ PUNCH DELETE (OPRT)
nc
CAN EXEC
The k–th file, specified in step 5, is deleted.
w
w
w
191
3. INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA B–62705EN/03
3.3.3 Parameters can be input and output using the ALL IO screen.
Inputting and
Outputting Parameters
Inputting parameters
1 Press soft key [PARAM] on the ALL IO screen, described in Subsec.
om
3.3.1.
2 Select EDIT mode.
3 Press soft key [(OPRT)]. Soft keys change as shown below.
r.c
READ PUNCH
e
4 Press soft key [READ], then [EXEC].
CAN EXEC
The parameters are read, and the “INPUT” indicator blinks at the
lower–right corner of the screen. Upon the completion of input, the
nt
“INPUT” indicator is cleared from the screen.
To cancel input, press soft key [CAN].
ce
Outputting parameters
nc
READ PUNCH
w
w
192
B–62705EN/03 3. INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA
3.3.4 Offset data can be input and output using the ALL IO screen.
Inputting and
Outputting Offset Data
1 Press soft key [OFFSET] on the ALL IO screen, described in Subsec.
om
3.3.1.
2 Select EDIT mode.
3 Press soft key [(OPRT)]. Soft keys change as shown below.
r.c
READ PUNCH
e
CAN EXEC
The offset data is read, and the “INPUT” indicator blinks at the
lower–right corner of the screen.
nt
Upon the completion of input, the “INPUT” indicator is cleared from
the screen.
To cancel input, press soft key [CAN].
ce
Outputting offset data
nc
1 Press soft key [OFFSET] on the ALL IO screen, described in Subsec.
3.3.1.
2 Select EDIT mode.
.c
READ PUNCH
w
w
193
3. INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA B–62705EN/03
3.3.5 Custom macro common variables can be output using the ALL IO screen.
Outputting Custom
Macro Common
Variables
om
1 Press soft key [MACRO] on the ALL IO screen, described in Subsec.
3.3.1.
2 Select EDIT mode.
3 Press soft key [(OPRT)]. Soft keys change as shown below.
r.c
READ PUNCH
e
4 Press soft key [PUNCH], then [EXEC].
CAN EXEC
The custom macro common variables are output, and the “OUTPUT”
nt
indicator blinks at the lower–right corner of the screen. Upon the
completion of output, the “OUTPUT” indicator is cleared from the
screen.
ce
To cancel output, press soft key [CAN].
NOTE
To input a macro variable, read the desired custom macro
nc
194
B–62705EN/03 3. INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA
3.3.6 The ALL IO screen supports the display of a directory of floppy files, as
Inputting and well as the input and output of floppy files.
Outputting Floppy
Files
om
1 Press the rightmost soft key (continuous menu key) on the ALL
IO screen, described in Subsec. 3.3.1.
2 Press soft key [FLOPPY].
3 Select EDIT mode. The floppy screen is displayed.
r.c
4 Press soft key [(OPRT)]. The screen and soft keys change as shown
below.
D The floppy screen is displayed only in EDIT mode. In all other
e
modes, the ALL IO screen is displayed.
>
.c
6 Enter the number of the desired file, then press soft key [F SET].
F SET CAN EXEC
7 Press soft key [EXEC]. A directory is displayed, with the specified
w
195
3. INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA B–62705EN/03
om
File No.=2
>2_
EDIT * * * * * * * *** *** 12:34:56
F SRH CAN EXEC
r.c
A directory in which the first file is uppermost can be displayed
simply by pressing the page key. (Soft key [F SRH] need not be
pressed.)
e
nt
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w
196
B–62705EN/03 3. INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA
Inputting a file
1 Press the rightmost soft key (continuous menu key) on the ALL
IO screen, described in Subsec. 3.3.1.
2 Press soft key [FLOPPY].
3 Select EDIT mode. The floppy screen is displayed.
om
4 Press soft key [(OPRT)]. The screen and soft keys change as shown
below.
The floppy screen is displayed only in EDIT mode. In all other
modes, the ALL IO screen is displayed.
r.c
READ/PUNCH (FLOPPY) O1234 N12345
e
nt
ce
>
MDI **** *** *** *** 12:34:56
F SRH READ PUNCH DELETE
nc
197
3. INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA B–62705EN/03
Outputting a file
1 Press the rightmost soft key (continuous menu key) on the ALL
IO screen, described in Subsec. 3.3.1.
2 Press soft key [FLOPPY].
3 Select EDIT mode. The floppy screen is displayed.
om
4 Press soft key [(OPRT)]. The screen and soft keys change as shown
below.
The floppy screen is displayed only in EDIT mode. In all other
modes, the ALL IO screen is displayed.
r.c
READ/PUNCH (FLOPPY) O1234 N12345
e
nt
ce
>
MDI **** *** *** *** 12:34:56
F SRH READ PUNCH DELETE
nc
D Setting a file number: Enter the number of the desired file, then
press soft key [F SET].
D Setting a program number: Enter the number of the desired
w
198
B–62705EN/03 3. INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA
Deleting a file
1 Press the rightmost soft key (continuous menu key) on the ALL
IO screen, described in Subsec. 3.3.1.
2 Press soft key [FLOPPY].
3 Select EDIT mode. The floppy screen is displayed.
om
4 Press soft key [(OPRT)]. The screen and soft keys change as shown
below.
The floppy screen is displayed only in EDIT mode. In all other
modes, the ALL IO screen is displayed.
r.c
READ/PUNCH (FLOPPY) O1234 N12345
e
nt
ce
>
MDI **** *** *** *** 12:34:56
F SRH READ PUNCH DELETE
nc
7 Press soft key [EXEC]. The specified file is deleted. After the file
has been deleted, the subsequent files are shifted up.
w
w
w
199
4. INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC B–62705EN/03
This chapter describes the signals between the machine operator’s panel,
magnetics cabinet and the PMC, connection of the signals between PMC
om
and CNC, and confirmation method of on/off state of these signals.
It also describes system configuration of PMC, parameters of PMC,
ladder and how to display time chart of the signals on the screen.
It also describes a method of inputting/outputting PMC parameters to an
external device.
r.c
4.1 GENERAL OF INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
4.2 SPECIFICATION OF PMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
4.3 PMC SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
e
4.4 LIST OF SIGNALS BY EACH MODE . . . . . . . . . . . 237
nt
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w
200
(D1) 4.1
PMCDGN (0) Input potential (0V) Contact point (open)
PMCDGN (1) Input potential (24V) Contact point (close)
Machine side DI/DO (Sink type DO)
B–62705EN/03
*DEC *ESP, SKIP, PMCDGN (0) DV (OFF) Output potential (0V) Load (OFF)
GENERAL OF
201
+
F Y
DV
PMC address RV
nt
FANUC decides Internal relay R0.0 to R999.7 MTB decides
addresses
and signals
Variable timer T0.0 to T079.7
e
addresses
RV
Matrix D0
om
4.INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC
4. INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC B–62705EN/03
4.2
SPECIFICATION OF
PMC
4.2.1
Specification Model PMC–RA1 PMC–RA3
Programming method lan- Ladder Ladder
guage
Number of ladder level 2 2
om
Level–1 Cycle Time 8 ms 8 ms
Basic Instruction Execution 5.0 0.15
Time (µs/step) (µs/step)
Program capacity Approx. 3,000
S Ladder (step) Approx. 3,000 Approx. 5,000
r.c
Approx. 5,000 Approx. 8,000
Approx. 12,000
Approx. 16,000
S Symbol(Note)/comment 32 to 128KB 32 to 128KB
S Message
e
2 to 64KB 2 to 64KB
S C Language No No
nt
Instruction
Internal relay
Message request
(Basic)
(Function)
12 kinds
49 kinds
(R) 1100 byte
(A) 25 byte
14 kinds
66 kinds
(System uses R9000 to R9099)
(200 Kinds)
ce
Non–volatile
S Var. Timer (T) 80 byte (40 pairs)
S Counter (C) 80 byte (20 pairs)
S Keep relay
nc
(K) 20 byte
S Data table (D) 1860 byte
Fixed timer 100 (Specification timer No.)
I/O
.c
(sink type)
S Built–in I/O card C (DI/DO) 48 points/48 points maximum for the machine
(source type) 64 points/32 points maximum for the opera-
w
tor’s panel
S Built–in I/O card D (DI/DO) 96 points/72 points maximum for the machine
(source type)
S Built–in I/O card E (DI/DO) 96 points/64 points maximum for the machine
(source type)
Storage media Flash–ROM
Note) There is no object–level compatibility.
NOTE
Max. size of a symbol and a comment are each 64KB.
202
B–62705EN/03 4.INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC
4.2.2
Address Char- Kinds Byte Addresses Remarks
acter
Input signal from X0 to X127 FANUC I/O Link
X the machine to the 142
PMC (MT to PMC) X1000 to X1011 Built–in I/O card *1)
Output signal from Y0 to Y127 FANUC I/O Link
Y the PMC to the ma-
ma 142
chine (PMC to MT) Y1000 to Y1005 Built–in I/O card *1)
Input signal from
the NC to the PMC
om
F 256 F0 to F255
(NC to PMC)
Output signal from
G the PMC to NC 256 G0 to G255
(PMC to NC)
R0 to R999
R Internal relay 1100 Operation results,
r.c
R9000 to R9099
reserved system area
e
K0 to K16
K Keep relay 20
K7 to K19 Reserved system area
nt
D
T
Data table
Variable timer
1860
80
D0 to D1859
T0 to T79
203
4. INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC B–62705EN/03
4.2.3 The table below lists the addresses for the interface signals between the
Address List CNC and PMC.
X1001
om
X1002
X1003
X1004
r.c
X1005
X1006
e
X1007
X1010
ce
X1011
X1012 *ESP
nc
NOTE
1 Signals enclosed in thick lines are DI signals for matrix
.c
configuration.
2 In DI signals except for *ESP, if the function of a DI signal
is not used, it can be used for a general purpose DI signal.
w
w
w
204
B–62705EN/03 4.INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC
Y1001
Y1002
Y1003
Y1004
om
Y1005
Y1006
Y1007
r.c
Y1008
Y1009
Y1010
e
Y1011
nt
Y1012
Y1013
ce
NOTE
1 Signals enclosed in thick lines are DI signals for matrix
configuration.
2 The signals with dash cannot be used.
nc
.c
w
w
w
205
4. INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC B–62705EN/03
X1001
X1002
X1003
X1004
om
X1005
X1006
X1007
r.c
X1009
X1010
e
X1011
X1012 *ESP
nt
X1013 *DEC4 *DEC3 *DEC2 *DEC1
ce
NOTE
1 Those signals indicated by a solid oblique line cannot be
used.
Those signals indicated by a dotted oblique line cannot be
nc
206
B–62705EN/03 4.INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC
Y1001
Y1002
Y1003
Y1004
om
Y1005
Y1006
Y1007
Y1008
r.c
Y1009
Y1010
e
Y1011
Y1012
nt
Y1013
ce
NOTE
Those signals indicated by a solid oblique line cannot be
used.
Those signals indicated by a dotted oblique line cannot be
nc
207
4. INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC B–62705EN/03
G003
om
G005 BFIN AFL TFIN SFIN EFIN MFIN
r.c
G008 ERS RRW *SP *ESP *IT
e
G011 *JV15 *JV14 *JV13 *JV12 *JV11 *JV10 *JV9 *JV8
nt
G012
G013
*FV7 *FV6 *FV5 *FV4 *FV3 *FV2 *FV1 *FV0
ce
G014 ROV2 ROV1
G015
nc
G016
G017
G020
w
G021
w
G022
G023
w
G024
G025
G026
G027 CON
208
B–62705EN/03 4.INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC
G031
om
G035 SIND2 SSIN2 SGN2 R1212 R1112 R1012 R0912
G036
G037
r.c
G038
G039
G040
e
G041 HS2ID HS2IC HS2IB HS2IA HS1ID HS1IC HS1IB HA1IA
nt
G042
G043
DMMC
ZRN DNCI
HS31D HS31C
MD4
HS31B
MD2
HS31A
MD1
ce
G044 MLK BDT1
G045
nc
G051
w
G052
G053 TMRON
w
G056
G057
G059
209
4. INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC B–62705EN/03
G061 RGTAP
G062
G063
G064
om
G065
G067
r.c
G068
G069
e
G071 RCHA RSLA SOCNA MCFNA SPSLA *ESPA ARSTA
nt
G072
G073
RCHHGAMFNHGAINCMDA OVRA DEFMDA NRROA ROTAA
MPOFA
INDXA
MORCMA
ce
G074 MRDYB ORCMB SFRB SRVB CTH1B CTH2B TLMHB TLMLB
G084
G085
G086
G087
G088
G089
210
B–62705EN/03 4.INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC
G091
G092
G093
G094
om
G095
G097
r.c
G098 EKC7 EKC6 EKC5 EKC4 EKC3 EKC2 EKC1 EKC0
G099
e
G101
nt
G102
G103
–J4 –J3 –J2 –J1
ce
G104
G105
nc
G107
G109
G110
w
G111
w
G112
G113
w
G115
G117
G118
G119
211
4. INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC B–62705EN/03
G121
G122
G123
G124
om
G125
G127
r.c
G128
G129
e
G131
nt
G132
G133
+MIT4 +MIT3 +MIT2 +MIT1
ce
G134 –MIT4 –MIT3 –MIT2 –MIT1
G135
nc
G137
G138
.c
G139
G140
w
G141
w
212
B–62705EN/03 4.INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC
G152
G153
om
G155 EMSBKB EC6B EC5B EC4B EC3B EC2B EC1B EC0B
r.c
G158 EID7B EID6B EID5B EID4B EID3B EID2B EID1B EID0B
e
G161 EID31B EID30B EID29B EID28B EID27B EID26B EID25B EID24B
nt
G162
G163
ce
G164
G165
nc
G174
G175
G176
G177
213
4. INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC B–62705EN/03
om
G185 EID31D EID30D EID29D EID28D EID27D EID26D EID25D EID24D
G186
G187
G188
r.c
G189
G190
e
G191
214
B–62705EN/03 4.INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC
D I/O card E
(21–TB, 210–TB)
→
Address Bit number
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
X1000
X1001
om
X1002
X1003
r.c
X1005
X1006
e
X1007
X1008
X1009
nt *ESP
X1011
nc
NOTE
1 The bit positions indicated with shading can be
used only for I/O board (96/64).
.c
2 The signals indicated in the box (heavy solid lines) are for
high–speed receivers as well as for a group with a
switchable common.
w
215
4. INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC B–62705EN/03
PMC →
Address Bit number
Y1000 Y000
Y1001 Y001
Y1002 Y002
Y1003 Y003
om
Y1004 Y004
Y1005 Y005
Y1006 Y006
r.c
Y1007 Y007
NOTE
The bit positions indicated with shading can be
e
used only for I/O board (96/64).
nt
ce
4.2.4
Built–in Debug Function Contents
Function Display of sequence pro- Dynamic display of ladder diagram
gram
nc
S Keep relay
S Data table
Sequence program edit Ladder diagram editing a ladder edit module is
w
function required)
216
B–62705EN/03 4.INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC
4.2.5 (1) R9000 (Operation output register for the ADD, SUB, MULB, DIVB,
System Reserve Area and COMPB functional instructions)
of Internal Relay #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
om
(2) R9000 (Error output for the EXIN, WINDR, WINDW, MMCWR,
MMCWW, MMC3R, and MMC3W functional instructions)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
R9000
r.c
The instruc-
tion ended in
error.
(3) R9002 to R9005 (Operation output registers for the DIVB functional
e
instruction)
The data remaining after the DIVB functional instruction is executed
ntin output.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
R9002
ce
R9003
Register for
remainder
R9004 (used by DIVB
nc
instruction)
R9005
R9091
w
always OFF
always ON
Cyclic signal of 200
ms (104 ms ON, 96
w
ms OFF)
Cyclic signal of 1 se-
cond. (504 ms ON,
496 ms OFF)
NOTE
1 Each signal is initially off.
2 R9091.0 and R9091.1 are set cyclically at the beginning of
the first ladder level.
3 Each signal (ON–OFF signal) has an accuracy of "8 ms.
217
4. INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC B–62705EN/03
R9091.5
104ms 96ms
200ms
R9091.6
504ms 496ms
om
1s
r.c
4.2.6
Execution Period of
PMC
e
Sequence program
From NC nt END1
(1)
1st level
(High–speed se-
quence)
ce
2nd level
(Normal sequence)
(2)–1
Synchronized
nc
buffer
(2)–2
(2)–n
w
From MT
END2
w
8msec
Period
w
218
B–62705EN/03 4.INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC
4.3
PMC SCREEN
om
PMC CONTROL SYSTEM MENU MONIT RUN
r.c
PMCPRM : PARAMETER (T/C/K/D)
RUN/STOP : RUN/STOP SEQUENCE PROGRAM When
EDIT : EDIT SEQUENCE PROGRAM built–in
program-
I/O : I/O SEQUENCE PROGRAM
mer is run-
SYSPRM : SYSTEM PARAMETER ning.
e
MONIT : PMC MONITOR
EDIT × f
I/O f f
SYSPRM × f
219
4. INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC B–62705EN/03
om
LOG1
X008.4 *ESP
EMERGENCY
STOP
END1
r.c
PORD POR
POWER ON
RESET
e
TOP BOTTOM SRCH W–SRCH N–SRCH
nt
Other soft keys
F–SCRH ADRESS
ce
Switched each
time pressed
SYMBOL
D Contents displayed 1. Green (Low brightness) display Contacts :open Relay :off
nc
220
B–62705EN/03 4.INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC
[Remarks]
D The search function searches a signal in the forward direction and
displays the ladder with the searched signal at its head. Because there
may exist plural contacts, repeat the search operation to find plural
locations, repeat the search operation to find plural locations with the
specified signal.
D If a specified signal is not found up to the end of the program (ladder),
execution returns to the head of a program and search continues.
D Dump display on ladder Ladder diagram and signal status dump can displayed together.
om
diagram The dump is displayed over 2 lines at the last line of ladder diagram by
pressing the [DUMP] soft key.
PAGE
PAGE
keys or [SEARCH] soft key is used for changing of PMC
address.
r.c
The [DUMP] soft key has the follwing functions.
(1) [BYTE] : Byte type display (1 BYTE)
“G0000 00 14 00 00 01 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00”
“G0016 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00”
e
(2) [WORD] : Word type display (2 BYTE)
“G0000 1400 0000 0001 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000”
nt “G0016 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000”
(3) [D.WORD] : Long word type display (4 BYTE)
“G0000 00001400 00000001 00000000 00000000”
ce
“G0016 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000”
instruction.
D Stop of ladder diagram The ladder display can be stopped by manual operation or trigger of
w
can be checked.
The stop conditions as a trigger are specified by rising or falling edge
detection of the designated signal.
w
221
4. INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC B–62705EN/03
om
ADR: Trigger setting address
r.c
* Setting form adr ;p1 ;p2+[TRGON/TRGOFF]soft key
NOTE
e
“;”=“EOB” adr (trigger address) ;p1 (trigger point) ;p2 (trigger
checking number (1 to 65535))
nt
* Because parameters are stored in the nonvolatile memory, they are not
lost even if the power is turned off.
ce
When bit 2 of keep relay K18 is set to 1 after parameters for sampling
are specified, the trigger function automatically starts when the power
is turned on.
For this operation, press [TRIGER] soft key to bring the following
nc
menu.
SEARCH ADRESS TRIGER WINDOW
RET
.c
NEXT
w
222
B–62705EN/03 4.INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC
om
RET
r.c
The function of the soft key [WINDOW] is as follows:
(1) [DIVIDE] : The screen will be divided.
The dividing display of ladder diagram can be
displayed for the designated NET number.
e
(NET number+[DIVIDE])
(2) [CANCEL] : The dividing display of ladder diagram display ends.
nt
(3) [DELETE]
(4) [SELECT]
(The screen returns to normal display.)
: The screen division subject to operation is ended.
: Change the screen subject to division operation.
ce
The screen in operation is displayed by “purple” title
line, another screen is displayed by “blue” title line.
In monochrome CRT, the screen is displayed by
changing brightness.
nc
D ON–LINE EDIT When bit 1 in the keep relay K17 is 1, this function is available and
PMC–RA3 in 4084 series [ONLEDT] soft key is displayed.
w
When the ladder program is executing, a part of the ladder program can
be changed.
w
223
4. INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC B–62705EN/03
4.3.3 Press soft key [PMCDGN] then PMC’s diagnostic screen is displayed.
PMCDGN Screen
D TITLE screen The title data registered when a ladder program is prepared is displayed.
Page number
om
PMC TITLE DATA #1 MONIT RUN
PMC PROGRAM NO. :
EDITION NO. :
PMC CONTROL PROGRAM
SERIES : 4063 EDITION : 08
(SERIES : 4065 EDITION : 08)
r.c
PMC TYPE CONTROL : RB3 PROGRAM : RB3
MEMORY USED : KB
LADDER : KB
SYMBOL : KB
e
MESSAGE : KB
SCAN TIME : MSEC
SCAN MAX : 016 MS MIN : 008 MS
nt TITLE
ÄÄÄ
ÄÄ
ÄÄÄ
1st page PMC PROGRAM NO. : Set when PMC
ÄÄ ÄÄ
ÄÄ
EDITION NO. : is
nc
prepared
ÄÄ ÄÄ
ÄÄ
PMC CONTROL PROGRAM
SERIES : EDITION : Series and edition of PMC
control software
MEMORY USED : KB
LADDER
ÄÄ
:
ÄÄ
KB Memory used and
.c
224
B–62705EN/03 4.INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC
D STATUS screen On/Off state of input/output signals and internal relay is displayed.
om
Signal state
G0003 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 reverses for
FIN signals with *.
G0004 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0: On
1: Off
r.c
SEARCH
[Search Method]
e
• Page keys
PAGE
PAGE
:Forward and Backward by screen
• Cursor keys
nt :Forward and Backward by diagnostic number
• To search a specified address or signal name, input an address number
or signal name and press [SEARCH].
ce
D Alarm screen Displays an alarm generated in PMC.
Alarm dis-
play
ER32 NO I/O DEVICE
For details of
alarms, refer
to Appendix A
.c
List of Alarms.
w
w
ALM Blinked
225
4. INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC B–62705EN/03
D TRACE screen Every time a specified signal changes, the signal status is memorized in
the trace memory. This function is useful for identifying intermittent
troubles.
1 Trace parameter screen
om
ADDRESS TYPE : (0:PMC/1:PHY)
ADDRESS :
MASK DATA :
2NDTRACE ADDRESS CONDITION
ADDRESS TYPE : (0:PMC/1:PHY)
ADDRESS :
r.c
MASK DATA :
T.DISP EXEC
e
Changes to a trace memory display screen (Screen on
the next page)
nt
a. TRACE MODE: Select the trace mode
Select each item by cursor keys
ce
0=Records changes of 1–byte signals
1=Records changes of independent 2–byte signals
2=Records changes of consecutive 2–byte signals
b. ADDRESS TYPE:
nc
E1⇒ 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1
However, even if bit 4,3,2 and 1 changes, tracing (memory
registration) cannot be done but signal status is memorized when a
w
tracing is executed.
[Correspondence of binary and hexadecimal number]
00002 : 016 00012 : 116 00102 : 216 00112 : 316
01002 : 416 01012 : 516 01102 : 616 01112 : 716
10002 : 816 10012 : 916 10102 : A16 10112 : B16
11002 : C16 11012 : D16 11102 : E16 11112 : F16
226
B–62705EN/03 4.INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC
ÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀ
0001 * * * * * * * *
0002 I I * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
0003 * I * * * * * * * * * * * * * * Latest status
0004 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I mark : 1
om
0005 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . * mark : 0
0006 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
0007 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
0008 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
r.c
TRCPRM STOP
e
(screen of previous page)
b. Soft key [EXEC]: Starts tracing.
nt Trace memory is cleared and each time a
specified signal changes, its status is recorded.
Trace memory is 256 bytes and if tracing is
ce
executed 128 times by 2–byte tracing, tracing
is executed again from the head of memory.
c. Soft key [STOP]: Ends the tracing.
nc
*The tracing parameters are held even if the power is turned off.
#7 #6
ÀÀÀÀ #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
K017
227
4. INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC B–62705EN/03
4.3.4
Memory Display
(M.SRCH)
D Display of Screen and 1) Pressing the [M.SRCH] soft key changes the screen to that shown in
Operation Fig. 3.5. The displayed soft keys also change.
2) Enter a physical address in hexadecimal from which the contents of the
memory are to be displayed. Then pressing the [SEARCH] key
displays 256 byte of stored data starting from the specified address.
om
Example) Enter 100000, then pressing the [SEARCH] keydisplays
the contents of the memory starting from 100000H.
PAGE
r.c
displays data of the corresponding type.
If an address at which the memory is not used is specified, a system
error occurs.
D Function of store
e
To store data in memory, set bit 4 of keep relay K17 to 1, move the cursor
memory to a position at which the address of the data to be changed in RAM is
displayed, and enter data in units of data type in hexadecimal.
nt
Example) Entering 0F41, then pressing the
0F41 at the address specified by the cursor
INPUT key stores
ce
PMC CONTENTS OF MEMORY MONIT RUN
100000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 ................
100010 4142 4344 4546 4748 494A 4B4C 4D4E 4F50 ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP
100020 2020 2020 2020 2020 2020 2020 2020 2020
nc
100030 5152 5354 5556 5758 595A 2020 2020 2020 QRSTUVWXYZ
100040 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 ................
100050 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 ................
100060 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 ................
100070 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 ................
.c
100080 4641 4E55 4320 434F 2E2C 5444 0000 0000 FANUC CO.LTD....
100090 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 ................
1000A0 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 ................
1000B0 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 ................
1000C0 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 ................
w
1000D0 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 ................
1000E0 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 ................
1000F0 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 ................
w
SEARCH INPUT
w
228
B–62705EN/03 4.INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC
D ANALYS screen Change of signals is displayed as the same display as that on the
(Ladder editing card is oscilloscope.
required) 1 Parameter setting screen (1st page)
PMC–RA3 in 4084 series
om
CONDITION : 0 (c)
(0: START 1: TRIGGER–ON 2: TRIGGER–OFF)
r.c
SCOPE DELETE INIT ADDRESS
e
Select each item by
cursor key
nt
(a) Set a sampling time.
(b) Specifies an address from which recording of signals is started.
(c) Set a condition under which recording is initiated.
ce
0 : Started by soft key [START]
1 : Started by rise of a trigger signal after you press the soft key
[START]
2 : Started by fall of a trigger signal after you press the soft key
nc
[START]
(d) Set a trigger mode
0 : Record signal status after the trigger condition is satisfied
1 : Record signal status before and after the trigger condition is
.c
satisfied.
2 : Record signal status before the trigger condition is satisfied.
3 : Record signal status when the trigger condition is satisfied.
w
229
4. INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC B–62705EN/03
SIGNAL ADDRESS
1 : X0000.0 9 : Y0000.0
2 : X0000.1 10 : R0000.1
3 : X0002.0 11 :
Up to 16
4 : X0005.0 12 :
om
signals
5 : 13 :
6 : 14 :
7 : 15 :
8 : 16 :
r.c
SCOPE DELETE INIT ADDRESS
e
b. Soft key [DELETE] : Delete data on the cursor position
c. Soft key [INIT] : Initialize parameters of signal waveform display
d.nt Soft key [ADDRESS] or [SYMBOL] :
Switch addresses and symbols for display
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w
230
B–62705EN/03 4.INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC
3 SCOPE screen
om
+---------+---------+---------+------
0 256(MSEC)
r.c
SGNPRM START T.SRCH ADDRESS
e
“J” and “–” are used for display if graphic function is not equipped.
a. Soft key [SGNPRM] : Returns to parameter screen.
nt
b. Soft key [START] or [STOP] :Start or stop the record.
(If TRIGGER MODE=3, signal is displayed when you press STOP
key.)
ce
c. Soft key [T.SRCH] :Displayed for a specified time.
d. Soft key [ADDRESS] or [SYMBOL] :Switch addresses and
symbols for display
e. Soft key [EXCHG] : Change order of signals displayed.
nc
S Press [TO] and [EXEC], then the signal changes its order.
f. Soft key [SCALE] : Changes time scale for graphic display. Scale
changes from 256 to 512, and to 1024 msec every time you press the
w
key.
g. Cursor key : Scrolls time axis forward and backward
w
w
231
4. INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC B–62705EN/03
4.3.5
D Inputting PMC
parameters from the MDI 1 Set to MDI mode or emergency stop state.
2 Set PARAMETER WRITE (on setting screen) to 1 or set the program
protect signal (KEY4) to 1.
PWE KEY4
om
Timer f –
Counter f f Either one
Keep relay f –
Data table f f Either one
r.c
3 Press a soft key and select a required screen.
[TIMER] :Timer screen
[COUNTR] :Counter screen
e
[KEEPRL] :Keep relay screen
[DATA] :Data table screen
nt
4 Press cursor key and move the cursor to a desired number.
5 Input a numeric key and press INPUT key and data is input.
ce
6 After the data is input, set PARAMETER WRITE or KEY4 on setting
screen to 0.
D TIMER screen This screen is used for setting timer time of the functional instruction
nc
(SUB 3).
Page no. (screen is scrolled by page key)
Timer no. specified by functional instruction
Address specified by ladder
.c
04 T06 0 14 T26 0
05 T08 0 15 T28 0
06 T10 0 16 T30 0
w
07 T12 0 17 T32 0
08 T14 0 18 T34 0
09 T16 0 19 T36 0
10 T18 0 20 T38 0
TIMER COUNTR KEEPRL DATA
Timer set time : Timer no. 1–8 is max. 1572.8 sec and its accuracy is
48ms.
Timer no. 9 is max. 262.1 sec and its accuracy is 8ms.
232
B–62705EN/03 4.INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC
D COUNTER screen This screen sets and displays max. value of counter and current value of
the counter instruction (SUB 4).
om
01 C00 100 1
02 C04 50 2 PRESET
03 C08 0 0 and
CURRENT
04 C12 0 0 can be set
05 C16 0 0 up to 9999,
06 C20 0 0 respectively.
r.c
07 C24 0 0
08 C28 0 0
09 C32 0 0
10 C36 0 0
e
TIMER COUNTR KEEPRL DATA
ÀÀÀÀ
05 K04 00000000 15 K14 00000000
ÀÀÀÀ
06 K05 00000000 16 K15 00000000
w
ÀÀ
w
233
4. INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC B–62705EN/03
ÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀ ÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀ
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
ÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀ ÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀ
om
K017
r.c
1 : Built–in programmer is used.
#2(AUTORUN) 0 : A sequence program is executed automatically after the power is
turned on.
e
1 : A sequence program is executed by sequence program soft key.
#4(MEMINP) 0 : Data input cannot be done in memory contents display function.
nt
1 : Data input can be done in memory contents display function.
#5(TRCSTAT) 0 : Signal tracing starts by soft key [EXEC] in signal trace function.
ce
1 : Signal tracing starts automatically by power on in signal trace
function.
#6(ANASTAT) 0 : Pressing [EXEC] key initiates sampling by signal waveform display
nc
function.
1 : Turning power to on initiates sampling by signal waveform display
function.
#7(DTBLDSP) 0 : The PMC parameter data table control screen is displayed.
.c
ÀÀÀÀ ÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀ
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
ÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀ ÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀ
K018
ÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀ ÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀ
w
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
K019
w
* The system uses the unused data areas for the PMC management
software. The settings should not be changed. Usually, all bits are set
to 0.
234
B–62705EN/03 4.INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC
om
005 data table
Data length
006
Table
007 parameter
008 Data table
head ad-
dress
G.DATA G.CONT NO.SRH INIT
r.c
Group no. of
data table
e
b. NO. OF GROUPS [G.CONT]: Set the no. of groups of data table.
c.nt Group No. [NO.SRH]: Move the cursor to a specified group.
d. Soft key [INIT]: Initializes the setting of data table.
No. of groups is 1, ADDRESS is D0000, PARAMETER is 0000000,
ce
TYPE is 0, NO. OF DATA is 1860.
This operation is done usually when a sequence program is prepared.
When PMC parameters are set, internal parameters are not affected.
nc
PARAMETER
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2
ÀÀÀÀÀÀ
#1 #0
ÀÀÀÀÀÀ
K019
.c
0 : Binary format
1 : BCD format
w
TYPE
w
PAGE
selected.
(The screen cannot be switched when the field indicating the number
of screens is blank.)
235
4. INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC B–62705EN/03
Group number
Page number
om
003 D0003 0
004 D0004 0
005 D0005 0
006 D0006 0
007 D0007 0
008 D0008 0
r.c
009 D0009 0
e
b.
nt
a. Soft key [C.DATA]
Group No.
: Returns to the data table setting screen.
(Previous screen)
[G–SRCH] : Head of the specified group is selected.
ce
c. Address [SEARCH] : Searches an address in a group currently
selected.
nc
.c
w
w
w
236
B–62705EN/03 4.INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC
4.4
LIST OF SIGNALS BY
EACH MODE
Group SYMBOL Signal names Address
*+L1 to *+L4 Overtravel signal G114
*-L1 to *-L4 Overtravel signal G116
*ABSM Manual absolute signal G006#2
*DEC1 to *DEC4 Deceleration signal for reference position return X1013
om
*EAXSL Control axis selection status signal (PMC axis control) F129#7
*ESP X1012#4
Emergency sto
stop signal
*ESP G008#4
*ESPA G071#1
stop signal (serial spindle)
Emergency sto s indle)
*ESPB G075#1
r.c
*FLWU Follow–up signal G007#5
* *FV0 to *FV7 Feedrate override signal G012
*FV0E to *FV7E Feedrate override signal (PMC axis control) G151
*FV0O to *FV7O Software operator’s panel signal (*FV0 to *FV7) F078
e
*HROV0 to *HROV6 1% step rapid traverse override signal G096#0 to #6
*IT Interlock signal G008#0
*IT1 to *IT4
*JV0 to *JV15
nt
Interlock signal for each axis
Manual feedrate override signal
G130
G010,G011
*JV0O to *JV15O Software operator’s panel signal (*JV0 to *JV15) F079,F080
ce
*SP Feed hold signal G008#5
*SSTP Spindle stop signal G029#6
*TLV0 to *TLV9 Tool life count override signal G049#0 to G050#1
nc
237
4. INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC B–62705EN/03
om
CFINB Spindle switch completion signal (serial spindle) F050#1
CHPA F046#0
Power line switch signal (serial spindle)
s indle)
CHPB F050#0
C
CON Cs contour control change signal G027#7
CTH1A,CTH2A G070#3,#2
r.c
Clutch/gear signal (serial sspindle)
indle)
CTH1B,CTH2B G074#3,#2
CUT Cutting feed signal F002#6
DEFMDA G072#3
Differential mode command (serial spindle)
s indle)
DEFMDB G076#3
e
DEN Distribution end signal F001#3
DM00 F009#7
D
DM01
DM02
DM30
nt
Decode M signal
F009#6
F009#5
F009#4
ce
DMMC Direct operation select signal G042#7
DNCI DNC operation select signal G043#5
DRN Dry run signal G046#7
nc
EABUFB F134#1
Buffer full signal (PMC axis control)
EABUFC F137#1
EABUFD F140#1
w
EAX1 to EAX4 Control axis select signal (PMC axis control) G136
E
EBSYA F130#7
EBSYB Axis control command read completion signal
g F133#7
w
238
B–62705EN/03 4.INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC
om
ECLRA G142#6
ECLRB G154#6
Reset signal (PMC axis control)
ECLRC G166#6
ECLRD G178#6
ED0 to ED15 Data signal for external data input G000,G001
r.c
EDENA F130#3
EDENB F133#3
Auxiliary function executing signal (PMC axis control)
EDENC F136#3
EDEND F139#3
e
EF External operation signal F008#0
EFD External operation signal for high–speed interface F007#1
EFIN
EFINA
EFINB
nt
External operation function completion signal G005#1
G142#0
G154#0
ce
Auxiliary function completion
com letion signal (PMC axis control)
EFINC G166#0
E
EFIND G178#0
EGENA F130#4
nc
EGENB F133#4
Axis moving signal (PMC axis control)
EGENC F136#4
EGEND F139#4
EIALA F130#2
.c
EIALB F133#2
Alarm signal (PMC axis control)
EIALC F136#2
EIALD F139#2
w
239
4. INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC B–62705EN/03
om
EMBUFD G178#2
EMFA F131#0
EMFB F134#0
Auxiliary function strobe signal (PMC axis control)
EMFC F137#0
EMFD F140#0
r.c
EMSBKA G143#7
EMSBKB G155#7
Block stop
sto disable signal (PMC axis control)
EMSBKC G167#7
EMSBKD G179#7
e
ENB Spindle enable signal F001#4
ENBKY External key input mode selection signal G066#1
EOTNA
EOTNB
EOTNC
nt
Negative direction overtravel signal (PMC axis control)
Negative–direction
F130#6
F133#6
F136#6
ce
E EOTND F139#6
EOTPA F130#5
EOTPB F133#5
Positive direction overtravel signal (PMC axis control)
Positive–direction
nc
EOTPC F136#5
EOTPD F139#5
EOV0 Override 0% signal (PMC axis control) F129#5
EREND Read completion signal for external data input F060#0
.c
Block sto
stop signal (PMC axis control)
ESBKC G166#3
ESBKD G178#3
w
ESOFB G154#4
Servo off signal (PMC axis control)
ESOFC G166#4
ESOFD G178#4
ESTB Read signal for external data input G002#7
ESTPA G142#5
ESTPB G154#5
Axis control tem
temporary
orary sto
stop signal (PMC axis control)
ESTPC G166#5
ESTPD G178#5
240
B–62705EN/03 4.INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC
om
GR1O,GR2O,GR3O Gear selection signal (output ) F034#0 to #2
HROV 1% step rapid traverse override select signal G096#7
HS1A to HS1D Manual handle feed axis selection signal G018#0 to #3
HS1AO Software operator’s panel signal (HS1A) F077#0
HS1BO Software operator’s panel signal (HS1B) F077#1
r.c
HS1CO Software operator’s panel signal (HS1C) F077#2
H HS1DO Software operator’s panel signal (HS1D) F077#3
HS1IA to AHS1ID Manual handle interruption axis select signal G041#0 to #3
HS2A to HS2D Manual handle feed axis selection signal G018#4 to #7
e
HS2IA to HS2ID Manual handle interruption axis select signal G041#4 to #7
HS3A to HS3D Manual handle feed axis selection signal G019#0 to #3
HS3IA to HS3ID
IGNVRY
IGVRY1 to IGVRY4
nt
Manual handle interruption axis select signal
All–axis VRDY OFF alarm ignore signal
Each–axis VRDY OFF alarm ignore signal
G042#0 to #3
G066#0
G192
ce
INCH Inch input signal F002#0
INCMDA G072#5
Incremental command (Serial sspindle)
indle)
INCMDB G076#5
nc
I INCSTA F047#1
Incremental type
ty e orientation signal (Serial spindle)
s indle)
INCSTB F051#1
INDXA G072#0
stop position
Change command of orientation sto osition (Serial sspindle)
indle)
INDXB G076#0
.c
K
KEYO Software operator’s panel signal (KEY1 to KEY4) F075#6
LDT1A F045#4
Load detection signal 1 (serial spindle)
s indle)
w
LDT1B F049#4
L
LDT2A F045#5
Load detection signal 2 (serial spindle)
s indle)
LDT2B F049#5
w
241
4. INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC B–62705EN/03
om
MF3 3rd M function strobe signal F008#5
MFIN Auxiliary function completion signal G005#0
MFIN2 2nd M function completion signal G004#4
MFIN3 3rd M function completion signal G004#5
MFNHGA Main spindle MCC status signal
g while changing
g g spindles G072#6
r.c
MFNHGB (serial spindle) G076#6
MH Manual handle feed select check signal F003#1
MI1 to MI4 Mirror image signal G106
MINC Incremental feed select check signal F003#0
e
MINP External program input start signal G058#0
MJ JOG feed select check signal F003#2
MLK
MLK1 to MLK4
MLKO
nt
All–axis machine lock signal
Each–axis machine lock signal
Software operator’s panel signal (MLK)
G044#1
G108
F075#4
ce
MMDI Manual data input select check signal F003#3
M
MMEM Automatic operation select check signal F003#5
MMI1 to MMI4 Mirror image check signal F108
nc
MPOFB G077#2
MRDYA G070#7
Machine ready signal (serial spindle)
s indle)
MRDYB G074#7
MREF Manual reference position return selection check signal F004#5
MRMT DNC operation select check signal F003#4
MSBK Single block check signal F004#3
MTCHIN TEACH IN select check signal F003#7
MV1 to MV4 Axis moving signal F102
MVD1 to MVD4 Axis moving direction signal F106
242
B–62705EN/03 4.INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC
om
OVC Override cancel signal G006#4
OVCE Override cancellation signal (PMC axis control) G150#5
OVRA G072#4
Analog override command (serial sspindle)
indle)
OVRB G076#4
PC1DTA Signal
g indicating
g the status of the detected one–rotation F047#0
r.c
PC1DTB position coder signal (serial spindle) F051#0
POAR2A Signal
g for approximate spindle orientation with a position F046#5
POAR2B coder (serial spindle) F050#5
P PN1,PN2,PN4,PN8,P
e
Workpiece number search signal G009#0 to 4
N16
PRGDPL program screen display mode signal F053#1
PRTSF
PSW01 to PSW10
R01I to R12I
nt
Target parts count reached signal
Position switch signal
F062#7
F070#0 to F071#1
G032#0 to G033#3
ce
Spindle
S indle motor sspeed
eed command signal
R01I2 to R12I2 G034#0 to G035#3
R01O to R12O S12–bit code signal F036#0 to F037#3
RCFNA F046#3
Output
Out ut switch com
completion
letion signal (serial sspindle)
indle)
RCFNB F050#3
nc
RCHA G071#7
Power line status check signal (serial sspindle)
indle)
RCHB G075#7
RCHHGA High–output
g MCC status signal
g while changing
g g output G072#7
.c
R RGSPM F065#1
Spindle
S indle rotation direction signal
RGSPP F065#0
RGTAP Rigid tapping signal G061#0
w
243
4. INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC B–62705EN/03
om
RTO Software operator’s panel signal (RT) F077#6
RWD Rewinding signal F000#0
S00 to S31 Spindle speed code signal F022 to F025
SA Servo ready signal F000#6
SAR Spindle speed arrival signal G029#4
r.c
SARA F045#3
Speed
S eed arrival signal (serial spindle)
s indle)
SARB F049#3
SBK Single block signal G046#1
SBKO Software operator’s panel signal (SBK) F075#3
e
SDTA F045#2
Speed
S eed detection signal (serial spindle)
s indle)
SDTB F049#2
SF
SFIN
SFRA
nt
Spindle speed strobe signal
Spindle function completion signal
F007#2
G005#2
G070#5
ce
CW command signal (serial spindle)
s indle)
SFRB G074#5
SGN G033#5
Spindle
S indle motor command polarity
olarity select signal
SGN2 G035#5
nc
Spindle
S indle select signal (serial spindle)
s indle)
SPSLB G075#2
SPSTP Spindle stop complete signal G028#6
SRN Program restart signal G006#0
SRNMV Program restart under way signal F002#4
SRVA G070#4
CCW command signal (serial sspindle)
indle)
SRVB G074#4
SSIN G033#6
Spindle
S indle motor command polarity
olarity select signal
SSIN2 G035#6
244
B–62705EN/03 4.INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC
om
TFIN Tool function completion signal G005#3
TL01 to TL64 Tool group number select signal G047#0 to #6
TLCH Tool change signal F064#0
TLCHI Individual tool change signal F064#2
TLMA F045#6
r.c
Torque limit signal (serial sspindle)
indle)
TLMB F049#6
T
TLMHA G070#1
Torque limit command HIGH signal (serial sspindle)
indle)
TLMHB G074#1
TLMLA G070#0
e
Torque limit command LOW signal (serial sspindle)
indle)
TLMLB G074#0
TLNW New tool select signal F064#1
TLRST
TLRSTI
TLSKP
nt
Tool change reset signal
Individual tool change reset signal
Tool skip signal
G048#7
G048#6
G048#5
ce
TMRON General–purpose integrating meter start signal G053#0
UI000 to UI015 Input signal for custom macro G054,G055
UINT Interrupt signal for custom macro G053#3
U
nc
245
5. DIGITAL SERVO B–62705EN/03
5 DIGITAL SERVO
om
5.1 INITIAL SETTING SERVO PARAMETERS . . . . . . 247
5.2 SERVO TUNING SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
5.3 ADJUSTING REFERENCE POSITION
r.c
(DOG METHOD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
5.4 DOGLESS REFERENCE POSITION SETTING . . . . 255
e
nt
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w
246
B–62705EN/03 5. DIGITAL SERVO
5.1 This section describes how to set initial servo parameters, which is used
for field adjustment of machine tool.
INITIAL SETTING
1. Turn on power at the emergency stop condition.
SERVO PARAMETERS
2. Set the parameter to display the servo tuning screen.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3111 SVS
om
3. Turn off the power once then turn it on again.
4. Display the servo parameter setting screen by the following
operation: SYSTEM key [SV.PARA].
5. Input data required for initial setting using the cursor and page key.
r.c
SERVO SETTING
X AXIS Y AXIS
e
(1) INITIAL SET BIT 00000000 00000000 PRM 2000
(2) MOTOR ID NO. 47 47 PRM 2020
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
nt AMR
CMR
FEED GEAR N
(N/M) M
DIRECTION SET
00000000
2
1
125
111
00000000
2
1
125
111
PRM
PRM
PRM
PRM
PRM
2001
1820
2084
2085
2022
ce
(8) VELOCITY PULSE NO. 8192 8192 PRM 2023
(9) POSITION PULSE NO. 12500 12500 PRM 2024
(10) REF.COUNTER 8000 8000 PRM 1821
nc
#0 (PLC01) 0 : Values of parameter 2023 and 2024 are used as they are:
1 : Values of parameter 2023 and 2024 are multiplied by 10.
w
247
5. DIGITAL SERVO B–62705EN/03
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 Motor model
1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 5–0S
0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 4–0S, 3–0S
om
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 other than above
NOTE
Set “00000000” for serial pulse coder C.
r.c
(4) CMR
PRM 1820 Command multiply ratio
e
CMR
2) When CMR is 0.5 to 48 Set value=2×CMR
nt
(5) Turn off the power then back on.
(6) Feed gear N/M
ce
PRM 2084 n for flexible feed gear
NOTE
For serial pulse coder B, use a value not exceeding 250,000
w
<<Examples of calculation>>
w
1/1000 mm 1/10000 mm
One revolution 8mm n=1/m=125 n=2/m=25
of motor 10mm n=1/m=100 n=1/m=10
12mm n=3/m=250 n=3/m=25
248
B–62705EN/03 5. DIGITAL SERVO
om
High resolution setting 2000 xxxx xxx 0 xxxx xxx 1
Separate detector 1815 0010 0010 0010 0000 0010 0010 0010 0000
No. of velocity feedback pulses 2023 8192 819
No. of position feedback pulses 2024 NS 12500 NS/10 1250
r.c
NOTE
1 NS is the number of position feedback pulses per one
revolution of the motor (multiplied by four)
2 The 5–0S to 3–0S motors have different numbers of poles.
e
Set parameter 2001.
3 Even if the system employs a closed loop, bit 3 of parameter
nt2002 is 1 and bit 4 is 0.
249
5. DIGITAL SERVO B–62705EN/03
5.2
SERVO TUNING
SCREEN
om
1 : Servo tuning screen is displayed.
5.2.2 1. Press SYSTEM key and soft key [SV. PARA] in this order.
r.c
2. Press soft key [SV.TUN] to select the servo tuning screen.
e
(1) FUN.BIT 00000000 ALARM 1 00000000 (9)
(2) LOOP GAIN 3000 ALARM 2 00000000 (10)
(3) TURNING SET. 0 ALARM 3 10000000 (11)
nt
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
SET PERIOD
INT.GAIN
PROP.GAIN
FILER
50
113
–1015
0
ALARM 4
ALARM 5
LOOP GAIN
POS ERROR
00000000
00000000
2999
556
(12)
(13)
(14)
(15)
ce
(8) VELOC.GAIN 125 CURRENT% 10 (16)
SPEED RPM 100 (17)
(PRM 2021)+256
(8) Velocity gain Set value= ×100
256
250
B–62705EN/03 5. DIGITAL SERVO
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Alarm1 OVL LV OVC HCA HVA DCA FBA OFA
DGN (200) :
#0 (OFA) : Overflow alarm
#1 (FBA) : Disconnection alarm
#2 (DCA) : Discharge alarm
#3 (HVA) : Excessive voltage alarm
om
#4 (HCA) : Abnormal current alarm
#5 (OVC) : Overcurrent alarm
#6 (LV) : Insufficient voltage alarm
r.c
#7 (OVL) : Overload alarm
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Alarm2 ALD EXP
DGN (201) ⇓
e
Over- 0 — — — Amplifier overheat
load
alarm 1 — — — Motor overheat
nt
Discon-
nection
alarm
1
1
—
—
—
—
0
1
Built–in pulse coder disconnection
(Hardware)
Separate type pulse coder disconnec-
ce
tion (Hardware)
0 — — 0 Pulse coder disconnection (software)
nc
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Alarm3 CSA BLA PHA RCA BZA CKA SPH
DGN (202) :
.c
Counting is in error.
If the RCA bit is set to 1 when both the FBA bit (bit 1 of alarm 1) and
ALD bit of alarm 2 are set to 1 and the EXP bit of alarm 2 (internal
hardware disconnection) is set to 1, a count miss alarm (CMAL)
occurs in the α pulse coder.
#4 (PHA) : Serial pulse coder or feedback cable is abnormal.
Counting the feedback signal is in error.
#5 (BLA) : Battery voltage is in low (warning).
#6 (CSA) : Hardware of serial pulse coder is abnormal.
251
5. DIGITAL SERVO B–62705EN/03
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Alarm4 DTE CRC STB PRM
DGN (203) :
#4 (PRM) : Parameter detected by the Digital servo is invalid.
#5 (STB) : Communication error of serial pulse coder.
Transmitted data is in error.
#6 (CRC) : Communication error of serial pulse coder.
om
Transmitted data is in error.
#7 (DTE) : Communication error of serial pulse coder.
There is no response.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
r.c
Alarm5 OFS MCC LDM PMS
DGN (204) :
#3 (PMS) : No. of feedback pulses are in error because pulse coder α series or
e
feedback cable is faulty.
#4 (LDM) : LED of pulse coder α series is abnormal.
#5 (MCC) :
#6 (OFS) :
ntContacts of electro–magnetic contactor of servo amplifier is blown
A/D conversion of current value of digital servo is abnormal.
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w
252
B–62705EN/03 5. DIGITAL SERVO
5.3
ADJUSTING
REFERENCE
POSITION
(DOG METHOD)
5.3.1
General
om
Speed
Rapid traverse
(PRM1420α)
r.c
FL rate
(PRM1425 α )
Time
e
Rapid traverse acc./dec. time constant (PRM1620 α )
*DECα nt
ce
PCZ
Grid
10mm/rev
10000P +
.c
Reference
GRID counter FFG PC
w
10000P/rev
Counter capacity
(Flexible feed gear)
10000P
w
D Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
PRM 1002 DLZ
253
5. DIGITAL SERVO B–62705EN/03
When the resolution is 0.0001mm, set the value in the unit ten times
the detection unit.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
PRM 1815 APC APZ OPT
om
#1(OPT) 0 : Position detection is performed by the pulse coder built in the motor.
1 : Separate type pulse coder or linear scale is used.
#4(APZ) Zero position of absolute pulse coder is :
0 : Not established
r.c
1 : Established
(Turns to 1 after establishment)
To manually change the value of the APZ bit from 0 to 1 without first
returning to the reference position
when using serial pulse coder α , follow this procedure: Back up the
e
data with the battery and give the motor one or more turns.
Turn the power off then on again, then change the APZ bit setting
ntfrom 0 to 1.
#5(APC) 0 : Position detector is other than absolute pulse coder.
ce
1 : Position detector is absolute pulse coder.
Used
PRM 1821 Reference counter capacity per axis [P]
Example)
w
w
(1µ m)
300mm ⇒ reference counter 30000
20000
15000
10000 etc
254
B–62705EN/03 5. DIGITAL SERVO
5.4 When there are no dog nor limit switch for reference position return, this
function enables the tool to return the reference position that is set by
DOGLESS MTB.
REFERENCE When the absolute position detector is used, the reference position once
POSITION SETTING set remains also during power off. When the absolute detector is replaced
or absolute position is lost, perform this setting.
5.4.1
om
General
Speed
r.c
FL rate (PRM 1425)
Time
JOG
e
ZRN
+Jα
GRID
nt
..........................
ce
ZP α
nc
5.4.2
.c
Operation 1 Move the tool near the reference position using a manual operation.
2 Select the reference position return mode or switch.
3 Press a button for an axis–and–direction–select–signal + or –, and the
w
255
5. DIGITAL SERVO B–62705EN/03
5.4.3
Associated Parameters
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
PRM 1002 DLZ
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
om
PRM 1006 ZMI
r.c
direction set by this parameter irrespective of an axis selection signal.
e
nt
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w
256
B–62705EN/03 6. AC SPINDLE (SERIAL INTERFACE)
This chapter outlines the serial interface and analog interface spindle
amplifiers and explains related parameters.
om
6.1 AC SPINDLE (SERIAL INTERFACE) . . . . . . . . . . . 258
6.1.1 Outline of Spindle Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
6.1.2 Spindle Setting and Tuning Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
r.c
6.1.3 Automatic Setting of Standard Parameters . . . . . . . 267
6.2 AC SPINDLE (ANALOG INTERFACE) . . . . . . . . . . 268
6.2.1 Outline of Spindle Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
e
The following drawing number is indicated on the upper part of the
spindle unit of the serial interface spindle amplifier:
nt
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w
257
6. AC SPINDLE (SERIAL INTERFACE) B–62705EN/03
6.1
AC SPINDLE
(SERIAL INTERFACE)
6.1.1
Outline of Spindle
Control
S instruction M instruction
om
NC PMC
M03,M04,M05,M19
FIN
*SSTP(Spindle stop)
r.c
Motor speed SOVx( Spindle override)
SF,GR10,GR20,GR30
(For machining center)
e
GR1,GR2 (For lathe)
S SOR( Orientation)
(PRM 3735 to 3752) nt 0
1 R01O to R12O
ce
Orientation speed
(PRM 3705#1, 3732, R01I to R12I
3706#5) 0 1
SIND
nc
Output polarity
(PRM 3706#7,6) SGN(0=+,1=–)
0 1
SSIN
.c
*ESP,MRDY,
SFR,SRV,ORCM
etc.
SST, SDT, SAR, LDT1,
w
LDT2
ORAR, ALM etc.
Interface
w
function
Optical cable
w
Serial spindle
amplifier Interface
function
Spindle
Operator’s motor
panel PC
Load meter
LM
Speed meter
SM Spindle
258
B–62705EN/03 6. AC SPINDLE (SERIAL INTERFACE)
6.1.1.1
Method A of Gear Output Motor speed
om
PRM 3735
0
0 PRM 3741 PRM 3742 PRM 3743 S code
r.c
6.1.1.2
Method B of Gear Output Motor speed
Change for Machining 4095 Max
Center(PRM 3705#2=1)
e
PRM 3736
6.1.1.3
For Lathe Output Motor speed
.c
4095 Max
Gear 1 Gear 2 Gear 3
Gear 4
w
w
0 S code
0 PRM 3741 PRM 3742 PRM 3743 PRM 3744
w
259
6. AC SPINDLE (SERIAL INTERFACE) B–62705EN/03
6.1.2
Spindle Setting and
Tuning Screen
6.1.2.1
Display method (1) Confirm the parameters
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
om
3111 SPS
r.c
data.
(3) Press the continuous menu key .
(4) Press the soft key [SP.PRM]. Then, the spindle setting and tuning
e
screen appears.
(5) The following screens are provided. These screens can be selected
nt
using soft keys.
1) [SP.SET] : Spindle setting screen
2) [SP.TUN] : Spindle tuning screen
ce
3) [SP.MON] : Spindle monitor screen
6.1.2.2
nc
(PARAMETER)
(3)GEAR RATIO 50
(4)MAX SPINDLE SPEED 3000
w
D Gear selection The gear select status on the machine side is displayed.
w
260
B–62705EN/03 6. AC SPINDLE (SERIAL INTERFACE)
D Parameters
S11:1st Main S12:1st Sub S21:2nd Main S22:2nd Sub
Gear ratio(HIGH) 4056 4056
4216 4216
Gear ratio(MIDIUM HIGH) 4057 4057
Gear ratio(MIDIUM LOW) 4058 4058
4217 4217
Gear ratio(LOW) 4059 4059
Max. spindle speed
(gear1) 3741 3741
om
Max. spindle speed
(gear3) 3743 3743
r.c
6.1.2.3
Spindle tuning screen SPINDLE TUNING
e
OPERATION : SPEED CONTROL
nt GEAR SELECT : 1
SPINDLE
(PARAMETER)
PROP.GAIN
: S11
20
(MONITOR)
MOTOR SPEED 100
ce
INT.GAIN 50 SPINDLE SPEED 150
LOOP GAIN 3000 POS ERR S1 100
MOTOR VOLT 30 POS ERR S2 103
TIME CONST 100 SYN.ERR 3
REF. SHIFT 2046
nc
3 : Synchronization control
4 : Rigid tapping
5 : Cs contour control
w
261
6. AC SPINDLE (SERIAL INTERFACE) B–62705EN/03
D Displayed parameters The displayed parameters vary depending on the operation mode.
Spindle positioning Normal Synchronization Cs contour
control operation Orientation control Rigid tapping control
Proportional gain Proportional gain Proportional gain Proportional gain Proportional gain Proportional gain
Integral gain Integral gain Integral gain Integral gain Integral gain Integral gain
Loop gain Motor voltage Loop gain Loop gain Loop gain Loop gain
Motor voltage Regenerative power Motor voltage Motor voltage Motor voltage Motor voltage
ZRN gain (%) ORAR gain (%) Acceleration/deceleration ZRN gain ZRN gain (%)
Shift reference position Shift spindle stop position constant (%) Shift reference position Shift reference position
Shift reference position Shift reference position
om
D Displayed monitoring The displayed monitoring items vary depending on the operation mode.
items
Spindle positioning Normal Synchronization Cs contour
control operation Orientation control Rigid tapping control
r.c
Motor speed Motor speed Motor speed Motor speed Motor speed Motor speed
Feedrate Spindle speed Spindle speed Spindle speed Spindle speed Spindle speed
Position deviation S1 Position deviation S1 Position deviation S1 Position deviation S1 Position deviation S1
Position deviation S2 Position deviation Z
Synchronous deviation Synchronous deviation
Note 1)
e
|Spindle data|
Motor speed [rpm] + Max. Motor speed.(* 1)
16383
(*1) Parameter 4020: Main spindle Parameter 4196: Subspindle
nt
Note 2) The spindle speed in Cs contour control mode is in degrees/min.
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w
262
B–62705EN/03 6. AC SPINDLE (SERIAL INTERFACE)
6.1.2.4
Spindle monitor screen SPINDLE MONITOR SCREEN
ALARM : AL–27(POSITION CODER DIS.)
OPERATION : Cs AXIS OONTROL
SPINDLE SPEED : 100 DEG/MIN
MOTOR SPEED : 150 RPM
0 50 100 150 200
LOAD METER (%)
JJJJJ
CONTROL INPUT : ORCM MRDY *ESP
om
CONTROL OUTPUT : SST SDT ORAR
r.c
4: Fuse blow of AC inputline
5: Fuse blow of DC voltage
7: Excessive speed
9: Heat sink overheat
10: Low voltage of AC input
e
11: Excess voltage in DC link
12: Excess current in DC link
nt
13: CPU internal data memory error
18: ROM SUM check error
19: U phase current offset excessive
ce
20: V phase current offset excessive
24: Serial data transmission abnormal
25: Serial data transmission stop
26: Cs axis speed detecting signal failure
nc
40: Alarm of one revolution signal for Cs axis control is not detected
41: Erroneous detection of the position coder one revolution signal
42: Undetection of the position coder one revolution signal
46: Erroneous detection of the position coder one revolution signal on
threading
47: Abnormal position coder signal
48: Erroneous detection of position coder one revolution signal
263
6. AC SPINDLE (SERIAL INTERFACE) B–62705EN/03
om
1) Load meter[%] + Load meter data Max.output value
3276
of load meter (*)
r.c
D Control input signal Max.10 signals those are ON are displayed from the following signals:
e
CTH1 : Gear signal 1 SOCN : Soft start/stop cancel
CTH2 : Gear signal 2 RSL : Output switching request
nt
SRV
SFR
ORCM
: Spindle reverse rotation
: Spindle forward rotation
: Spindle orientation
RCH
INDX
:
:
Power line state confirm
Orientation stop pos.
change
ce
MEDY : Machine ready ROTA : Rotation direction of
ARST : Alarm reset signal ORCM
*ESP : Emergency stop NRRO : Shor–cut of ORCM
INTG : Speed integral control
signal
nc
D Control output signals Max. 10 signals those are ON are displayed from the following signals:
.c
signal
w
264
B–62705EN/03 6. AC SPINDLE (SERIAL INTERFACE)
6.1.2.5
Correspondence
between operation mode
and parameters on
spindle tuning screen
om
1st Main 1st Sub 2nd Main 2nd Sub
Proportional gain(HIGH) 4040 4206 4040 4206
Proportional gain (LOW) 4041 4207 4041 4207
Integral gain(HIGH) 4048 4048
4212 4212
Integral gain(LOW) 4049 4049
r.c
Motor voltage 4083 4236 4083 4236
Regenerative power 4080 4231 4080 4231
D Orientation mode
S11: S12: S21: S22:
e
1st Main 1st Sub 2nd Main 2nd Sub
Proportional gain(HIGH) 4042 4208 4042 4208
nt
Proportional gain (LOW)
Integral gain(HIGH)
Integral gain(LOW)
4043
4050
4051
4209
4213
4043
4050
4051
4209
4213
ce
Loop gain (HIGH) 4060 4060
4218 4218
Loop gain (MID, HIGH) 4061 4061
Loop gain (MID, LOW) 4062 4062
4219 4219
Loop gain (LOW) 4063 4063
nc
tion
D Synchronization control
w
265
6. AC SPINDLE (SERIAL INTERFACE) B–62705EN/03
om
Position loop gain(MID,LOW) 4067 4222 4067 4222
Position loop gain(LOW) 4068 4068
Motor voltage 4085 4238 4085 4238
ZRN gain % 4091 4239 4091 4239
Grid shift amount 4073 4223 4073 4223
r.c
D Spindle contouring Numerals are parameter numbers :
control mode
S11: S12: S21: S22:
(Cs axis control)
1st Main 1st Sub 2nd Main 2nd Sub
Proportional gain(HIGH) 4046 4046
e
Proportional gain (LOW) 4047 4047
Integral gain(HIGH) 4054 4054
nt
Integral gain(LOW)
Position loop gain(HIGH)
Position loop gain(MID,HIGH)
4055
4069
4070
4055
4069
4070
ce
Position loop gain(MID,LOW) 4071 4071
Position loop gain(LOW) 4072 4072
Motor voltage 4086 4086
ZRN gain % 4092 4092
nc
D Spindle positioning
control mode S11: S12: S21: S22:
1st Main 1st Sub 2nd Main 2nd Sub
.c
4214 4214
Integral gain(LOW) 4053 4053
Position loop gain(HIGH) 4065 4065
4221 4221
w
266
B–62705EN/03 6. AC SPINDLE (SERIAL INTERFACE)
6.1.3 The standard parameters related to each motor model can be set
Automatic Setting of automatically.
Standard Parameters D The specifications for controlling a motor depend on the specifications
defined by the machine tool builder. The parameters defined by the
machine tool builder are set as the standard values (initial values) by
this automatic setting function.
Therefore, when performing automatic operation, always set
parameters properly according to the parameter list (parameters
om
4000 and later).
1. Turn on the power in the emergency stop state.
2. Set bit 7 of parameter 4019 to 1.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
r.c
4019 LDSP
Bit 7 (LDSP) The parameters for the serial interface spindle are:
0 : Not set automatically.
e
l 1 : Set automatically.
4133
nt
3. Set a motor model code.
Motor model code
ce
Code Motor mode Amplifier
100 a 0.5 (3000/8000min–1) SPM–2.2
101 a1 (3000/8000min–1) SPM–2.2
nc
114 SPM–15
115 a P18 (750/6000min–1) SPM–15
116 a P22 (750/6000min–1) SPM–22
117 a P30 (575/4500min–1) SPM–22
4. Turn off the power then back on. Then, the parameters are read.
267
6. AC SPINDLE (SERIAL INTERFACE) B–62705EN/03
6.2
AC SPINDLE
(ANALOG
INTERFACE)
6.2.1
Outline of Spindle
Control
om
6.2.1.1
Block diagram
S command M command
r.c
PMC
NC M03 to M05, M06, M19
CW/CCW command,
Spindle speed orientation, etc.
conversion
FIN Miscellaneous function end
e
Motor speed *SSTP
Gear 1 Gear 2 Spindle stop
GR1, GR2
Gear selection (16M/18M)
parameters
PRM 3714 to 3743, 3735, 3736,
3751 and 3752 (M series)
PRM 3741 to 3744 (T series)
*ESP, MRDY SAR, LDT
SFR, SRV SST, ORAR
ORCM, TLM SDT, ALM
.c
DV
SVC
w
RV
w
Operator’s panel
Spindle
PC motor Load meter
LM
Speed meter
Spindle SM
268
B–62705EN/03 6. AC SPINDLE (SERIAL INTERFACE)
6.2.1.2
Calculation of S analog
voltage and related
parameters
[M series]
1 Gear change method A (bit 2 of parameter 3705 = 0)
om
Gear 1 Gear 2 Gear 3
(4095) 10V Max
PRM 3736
r.c
PRM 3735
0V
S code
e
0 PRM 3741 PRM 3742 PRM 3743 (RPM)
PRM 3752
nc
PRM 3751
PRM 3735
.c
0V
S code
0 PRM 3741 PRM 3742 PRM 3743 (RPM)
w
[T series]
Constant surface speed control
w
0V
S code
0 PRM 3741 PRM 3742 PRM 3743 PRM 3744 (RPM)
269
6. AC SPINDLE (SERIAL INTERFACE) B–62705EN/03
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3706 TCW CWM
om
[M series]
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3705 SGB
r.c
1 : Set by respective parameters. (Parameters 542, 543, 585, 586)
e
3742 Max. spindle speed of gear 2 (1 to 9999) [rpm]
3743
3736
nt Max. spindle speed of gear 3 (1 to 9999) [rpm]
[T series]
3741 Max. spindle speed of gear 1 (1 to 9999) [rpm]
.c
270
B–62705EN/03 6. AC SPINDLE (SERIAL INTERFACE)
6.2.1.3
Tuning S analog voltage (1) For M series, change the upper and lower limits as follows:
S When gear change method A is used: Parameter 3736 = 4095,
(D/A converter) parameter 3735 = 0
S When gear change method B is used: Parameter 3751 = 4095,
parameter 3735 = 0
. For T series, these changes are not required.
(2) Tuning the D/A converter offset
Specify zero as the spindle speed. Then, by using a digital multimeter,
om
adjust the following parameter so that the voltage at the test pin DA2
on the spindle amplifier printed circuit board is 0 mV.
1 For M series
S0; (Specify the command by MDI operation, then press the cycle start button.)
r.c
2 For T series (in case of G–code system A)
G97 S0; (Specify the command by MDI in the same manner as for M series.)
e
3731 Spindle speed (D/A converter) offset compensation value
nt
(3) Tuning the D/A converter gain
Specify the maximum spindle speed of gear 1. Then, by using a digital
multimeter, adjust the following parameter so that the voltage at the
ce
test pin DA2 on the spindle amplifier printed circuit board is 10.0 V.
1 For M series
Sxxxx ; (xxxx is the value set in parameter 3741.)
nc
(Specify the command by MDI operation, then press the cycle start button.)
(4) If the output voltage is not correct, perform the following calculation,
and change the value of parameter 3730 to adjust the gain of the D/A
converter:
Setting + 10V (Current value of PRM 3730)
value Measured voltage
(5) Execute an S command again and confirm that the output voltage is
correct.
.Restore the original parameter values.
271
7. TROUBLESHOOTING B–62705EN/03
7 TROUBLESHOOTING
om
7.2 NO MANUAL OPERATION NOR AUTOMATIC
OPERATION CAN BE EXECUTED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
7.3 JOG OPERATION CANNOT BE DONE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
7.4 HANDLE OPERATION CANNOT BE DONE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
7.5 AUTOMATIC OPERATION CANNOT BE DONE . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
7.6 CYCLE START LED SIGNAL HAS TURNED OFF . . . . . . . . . . . 291
7.7 NO DISPLAY APPEARS AT POWER–UP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
r.c
7.8 ALARM 85 TO 87
(READER/PUNCHER INTERFACE ALARM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
7.9 ALARM 90
(REFERENCE POSITION RETURN IS ABNORMAL) . . . . . . . . 300
7.10 ALARM 300
e
(REQUEST FOR REFERENCE POSITION RETURN) . . . . . . . . . 302
7.11 ALARM 301 TO 305
(ABSOLUTE PULSE CODER IS FAULTY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
nt
7.12
7.13
ALARM 306 TO 308
(ABSOLUTE PULSE CODER BATTERY IS LOW) . . . . . . . . . . .
ALARM 350
(SERIALA PULSE CODER IS ABNORMAL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
304
305
ce
7.14 ALARM 351 (SERIALA PULSE CODER
COMMUNICATION IS ABNORMAL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
7.15 ALARM 400 (OVERLOAD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
7.16 ALARM 401 (*DRDY SIGNAL TURNED OFF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
7.17 ALARM 404 AND 405 (*DRDY SIGNAL TURNED ON) . . . . . . 310
nc
272
B–62705EN/03 7.TROUBLESHOOTING
om
↓
Recovery
7.1.1
r.c
Investigating the (1) When and how many times (frequency of occurrences)
(2) With what operation
Conditions under (3) What failure occurred
which Failure Occurred
e
1 When did the failure occur?
D Date and time?
D Occurred during operation? (how long was the operation?)
nt
D Occurred when the power was turned on?
D Was there any lightening surge, power failure, or other disturbances
ce
to the power supply?
How many times has it occurred
D Only once?
D Occurred many times ? (How many times per hour, per day, or per
nc
month?)
2 With what operation did it occur ?
D What was the NC mode when the failure occurred?
D Jog mode/memory operation mode /MDI mode /reference position
.c
return mode
If during program operation,
1) Where in the program ?
w
273
7. TROUBLESHOOTING B–62705EN/03
om
(indicated by AL–XX (XX is a number))
D Is the screen correct ?
D If machining dimensions are incorrect
1) How large is the error ?
2) Is the position display on the CRT correct ?
r.c
3) Are the offsets correct ?
4 Other information
D Is there noise origin around machine?
If the failure has not occurred frequently, the cause may be external
e
noise to the power supply or inductive noise on machinery cables.
Operate other machines connected to the same power line and see
nt if noise come from the relays or compressors.
D Is it taken any countermeasure for noise in machine side?
See Sec. 2.13 “Action against Noise”
ce
D Check the following for the input power supply voltage :
1) Is there variation in the voltage ?
2) Are the voltages different depending on the phase ?
nc
5 When you contact our service center, specify the following items :
1) Name of the NC unit
w
274
B–62705EN/03 7.TROUBLESHOOTING
7.2
NO MANUAL OPERA-
TION NOR AUTOMAT-
IC OPERATION CAN
BE EXECUTED
Points (1) Execute the following procedure when no manual nor automatic
operation is done
om
(2) Check whether position display shows correct position
(3) Check CNC status display
(4) Check CNC internal status using diagnostic function
Causes and
Countermeasures
r.c
1. Position display (1) Check CNC status display (Refer to Section 1.9 CNC STATUS
(relative, absolute, DISPLAY for detail.)
machine coordinate) (a) Emergency stop status (Emergency stop signal is turned on)
e
does not change
If status display shows EMG the emergency stop signal is input.
Check the following signal using the PMC’s diagnostic function
X1008
#7
nt #6
(PMCDGN).
#5 #4
*ESP
#3 #2 #1 #0
(T series)
ce
X1012 *ESP (M series)
G0008 *ESP
nc
(PMCDGN).
1) An input signal from the PMC functions
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
w
275
7. TROUBLESHOOTING B–62705EN/03
(Example of display)
JOG : Manual operation (JOG) mode
HND : Manual handle (MPG) mode
MDI : Manual data input (MDI) mode
MEM : Automatic operation (Memory) mode
EDIT: EDIT (Memory edit) mode
<Mode select signal>
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0043 MD4 MD2 MD1
om
↓ ↓ ↓
Manual operation (JOG) mode 1 0 1
Manual handle (MPG) mode 1 0 0
Manual data input (MDI) mode 0 0 0
Automatic operation (Memory) mode 0 0 1
r.c
EDIT (Memory edit) mode 0 1 1
(2) Check diagnostic data 000 to 025 of the CNC Check an item for which
1 is displayed
e
No. Message Display
000 WAITING FOR FIN SIGNAL :0
nt 001 MOTION
002 DWELL
a.003 IN–POSITION CHECK
:0
:0
:0
ce
004 FEEDRATE OVERRIDE 0% :0
b.005 INTERLOCK / START LOCK : 1 (Example)
006 SPINDLE SPEED ARRIVAL CHECK :0
nc
010 PUNCHING :0
011 READING :0
012 WAITING FOR (UN) CLAMP :0
c.013 JOG FEEDRATE OVERRIDE 0% :0
.c
Items with a to d relate with manual and automatic operation and its
detail is shown below.
w
a. In–position check is It shows that positioning is not yet completed. Check the contents of the
being done following diagnostic number. (It is 1 in the following condition)
w
2) Servo system may be abnormal. Refer to servo alarm 400, 410, and
411.
276
B–62705EN/03 7.TROUBLESHOOTING
b. Interlock or start lock There are a plural interlock signals. Check at first which interlock signal
signal is input is used by the machine tool builder at the parameters shown below.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3003 DIT ITX ITL
om
1) Interlock signal (*IT) is input.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0008 *IT
r.c
2) Axis interlock signal (*ITn) is input.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0130 *IT4 *IT3 *IT2 +IT1
e
3) Interlock signal per axis and direction ("MITn) is input.
S M series
G0132
nt #7 #6 #5 #4 #3
+MIT4
#2
+MIT3
#1
+MIT2
#0
+MIT1
ce
G0134 –MIT4 –MIT3 –MIT2 –MIT1
S T series
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
X0004 –MIT2 +MIT2 –MIT1 +MIT1
nc
c. Jog feedrate override is Check the signals using PMC’s diagnostic function (PMCDGN)
0% #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0010 *JV7 *JV6 *JV5 *JV4 *JV3 *JV2 *JV1 *JV0
w
: :
1101 1000 1110 1111 100.00%
: :
0000 0000 0000 0001 655.34%
0000 0000 0000 0000 0.00%
d. NC is in a reset state In this case, RESET is also displayed on the status display. Check it using
the procedure of 1 above.
277
7. TROUBLESHOOTING B–62705EN/03
om
e r.c
nt
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w
278
B–62705EN/03 7.TROUBLESHOOTING
7.3
JOG OPERATION
CANNOT BE DONE
om
1. Position display (1) Check mode selection status (JOG mode is not selected).
(relative, absolute, When status display shows JOG, it is normal.
machine cooordinate) When status display does not show JOG, mode select signal is not
does not change selected correctly. Confirm the mode select signal using PMC’s
diagnostic function (PMCDGN).
r.c
<Mode select signal>
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0043 MD4 MD2 MD1
↓ ↓ ↓
e
Manual operation (JOG) mode 1 0 1
nt
(2) Feed axis and direction select signal is not input Check the signal using
PMC’s diagnostic function (PMCDGN).
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
ce
G0100 +J4 +J3 +J2 +J1
Example)
nc
002 DWELL :0
a. 003 IN–POSITION CHECK :0
004 FEEDRATE OVERRIDE 0% :0
w
279
7. TROUBLESHOOTING B–62705EN/03
a. In–position check is It shows that positioning is not yet completed. Check the contents of the
being done following diagnostic number. (It is 1 in the following condition)
DGN 0300 Position Error >PARAM 1826 In–position width
1) Check the parameters according to the parameter list.
1825 Servo loop gain per axis (Normal : 3000)
2) Servo system may be abnormal. Refer to servo alarm 400, 410, and
411.
b. Interlock or start lock There are a plural interlock signals. Check at first which interlock signal
om
signal is input is used by the machine tool builder at the parameters shown below.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
PARAM 3003 DIT ITX ITL
r.c
#2 ITX=0 shows interlock signal *ITn is effective. To 2)
#3 DIT=0 shows interlock signal"MITn is effective. To 3)
Check state of effective interlock signals using the diagnostic function
(PMCDGN) of the PMC.
e
1) Interlock signal (*IT) is input.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0008 nt*IT=0 shows that interlock signal is input.
*IT
ce
2) Axis interlock signal (*ITn) is input.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0130 *IT4 *IT3 *IT2 +IT1
D T series
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
w
280
B–62705EN/03 7.TROUBLESHOOTING
c. Jog feedrate override is Check the signals using PMC’s diagnostic function (PMCDGN)
0% #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0010 *JV7 *JV6 *JV5 *JV4 *JV3 *JV2 *JV1 *JV0
om
1111 1111 1111 1110 0.01%
: :
1101 1000 1110 1111 100.00%
: :
0000 0000 0000 0001 655.34%
r.c
0000 0000 0000 0000 0.00%
d. NC is in a reset state In this case, RESET is also displayed on the status display. Check it using
the procedure of 1 above.
e
(4) Jog feed rate setting (Parameter) is not correct.
1423 Jog feedrate per axis
nt
(5) Manual feed per revolution is selected ( T series)
This funciton feeds an axis synchronized with spindle rotation and
ce
whether this function is used or not is selected by the following
parameter:
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1402 JRV
nc
the detector of the spindle (position coder) and the cable between
the position coder and the CNC if it is short–circuited or
ungrounded.
w
w
281
7. TROUBLESHOOTING B–62705EN/03
7.4
HANDLE OPERATION
(MPG) CANNOT BE
DONE
Points (1) Check another manual operation (JOG) is accepted.
(2) Check CNC status display.
Causes and
Countermeasure
om
1 JOG operation is not Consult with item 7.2 and 7.3.
acceptable, either
2 When only handle (1) Check CNC status display at lower left corner of the CRT.
r.c
operation (MPG) cannot (Refer to 1.9 CNC STATUS DISPLAY for details)
be done When the status display shows HND, mode selection is correct.
If it is not HND, mode select signal is not input correctly. Check the
mode select signal using the PMC’s diagnostic function(PMCDGN).
e
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0043 MD4 MD2 MD1
nt Manuale handle mode
↓
1
↓
0
↓
0
ce
(2) Manual handle feed axis select signal is not input.
Check the signals using PMC’s diagnostic function (PMCDGN).
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0018 HS2D HS2C HS2B HS2A HS1D HS1C HS1B HS1A
nc
When axis select switch for manual handle feed is selected on the
machine operator’s panel, if the signals are input as follows, it is
.c
normal.
Selected axis HSnD HSnC HSnB HSnA
w
no selection 0 0 0 0
1st axis 0 0 0 1
2nd axis 0 0 1 0
3rd axis 0 0 1 1
4th axis 0 1 0 0
w
NOTE
w
282
B–62705EN/03 7.TROUBLESHOOTING
↓ ↓
MP2 MP1 Multiplication
0 0 1
1 0 10
0 1 m
om
1 1 n
r.c
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
7102 HNGx
e
1 : reverse direction
7110
nt
(4) Checking manual pulse generator
(a) Incorrect of cable
No. of MPGs used (1 to 3)
ce
Check disconnection of cable or short circuit.
(b) Manual pulse generator is faulty
When you rotate the MPG, the following signal is output.
Measure the signal with synchroscope at screw terminal on back of
nc
Back of MPG
.c
+5V 0V HA HB
w
+5V
HA on off on off
0V
+5V
HB on off on off
0V
1:1
1/4 phase difference 1/4 phase difference
283
7. TROUBLESHOOTING B–62705EN/03
7.5
AUTOMATIC
OPERATION
CANNOT BE DONE
Points (1) Check manual operation is possible.
(2) Check the status of cycle start LED on machine operator’s manual.
(3) Check status of CNC.
om
Causes and Remedies When manual operation is either impossible, perform countermeasure,
based on the previous item ”Jog operation cannot be done”.
Confirm that a correct mode is selected according to the mode select status
of CNC status display. Also, by confirming the automatic operation
status it is possible to identify cycle operation, feed hold and cycle stop
state.
r.c
1. When cycle operation is “****” is displayed at status display on CRT.
not started (Cycle start (1) Mode select signal is not correct.
LED does not light)
When the mode select signal is input correctly, following status
e
display is done.
MDI :Manual data input mode (MDI)
ntMEM :Memory operation mode
RMT :Remote operation mode
If status display does not show a correct status, check the mode signal
ce
with following diagnosis function of PMC side (PMCDGN).
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0043 DNCI MD4 MD2 MD1
nc
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0007 ST
w
284
B–62705EN/03 7.TROUBLESHOOTING
om
f. 005 INTERLOCK / START LOCK :0
g. 006 SPINDLE SPEED ARRIVAL CHECK :0
010 PUNCHING :0
011 READING :0
012 WAITING FOR (UN) CLAMP :0
r.c
h. 013 JOG FEEDRATE OVERRIDE 0% :0
i. 014 WAITING FOR RESET, ESP, RRW OFF :0
015 EXTERNAL PROGRAM NUMBER SEARCH : 0
Items with a to i relate with an automatic operation and their details
e
are as follows :
a. An auxiliary function is
being executed (waiting
for FIN signal)
nt
An auxiliary function (M/S/T/B) specified in a program is not ended.
Check according to the following procedure.
At first, confirm the kind of interface of an auxiliary function.
ce
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3001 HSIF
1) Normal interface
When the auxiliary function finish signal turns from 1 to 0, the
auxiliary function is supposed to be ended and the next block is read
.c
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0004 FIN
w
285
7. TROUBLESHOOTING B–62705EN/03
<M series>
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0005 BFIN TFIN SFIN MFIN
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
om
F0007 BF TF SF MF
r.c
#7(BF) : 2nd auxiliary function strobe signal
<T series>
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0005 BFIN TFIN SFIN MFIN
e
#0(MFIN) : M function completion signal
nt
#2(SFIN) : S function completion signal
#3(TFIN) : T function completion signal
#4(BFIN) : Second auxiliary function completion signal
ce
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F0007 BF TF SF MF
nc
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F0008 MF3 MF2
286
B–62705EN/03 7.TROUBLESHOOTING
b. Travel command is being CNC is reading an axis command (X,Y,Z,...) in a program and giving the
executed command to the axis.
c. A dwell command is CNC is reading a dwell command (G04) in a program and is executing
being executed the dwell command.
d. In–position check Positioning (G00) to a specified position of a specified axis is not
(confirming positioning) completed.
is being done Whether positioning is completed or not is checked as the servo position
error amount. Check it CNC’s diagnostic function as follows:
DGN no.300 Position Error > PARAM 1826 In–position width
om
Position error amount almost becomes 0, when positioning of an axis
completes and when the amount becomes within the in–posiiton width,
it is assumed that positioning completes and the next block is exected.
If position error amount does not become within the in–position width,
refer to servo alarm 400, 4n0 and 4n1.
r.c
e. Feedrate override is at Actual feedrate is overridden by the override signals to a programmed
0% feedrate. Check the override signals using the PMC’s diagnostic function
(PMCDGN).
e
<Normal override signal>
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0012
nt *FV7
10 0 1 1 0 1 1 100%
: :
00 0 0 0 0 0 1 254%
00 0 0 0 0 0 0 0%
.c
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0007 STLK
w
287
7. TROUBLESHOOTING B–62705EN/03
*ITn When the bit is 0, the corresponding axis’s interlock signal is input.
om
3) Interlock signal per axis and direction(+/– MITn) is input
D M series
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0132 +MIT4 +MIT3 +MIT2 +MIT1
r.c
D T series
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
X0004 –MIT2 +MIT2 –MIT1 +MIT1
e
* For the T series,"MITn is valid only for manual operation.
nt
4) Controlled axis detach function is running. A detached axis is
specified for travelling.
*This function is valid when CNC parameter No.1005#7=1. For
ce
whether this function is running or not, confirm the following signal
using PMC’s diagnostic function (PMCDGN). Check the axis
concerned.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
nc
following procedure :
1) The control axis detach signal (DTCHn) is input.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
w
0012 RMVx
288
B–62705EN/03 7.TROUBLESHOOTING
g. CNC is waiting for Actual spindle speed does not arrive at a speed specified in a program.
spindle speed arrival Confirm the signal state using the PMC’s diagnostic function
signal to be input (PMCDGN).
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0029 SAR
#4(SAR) : When this signal is 0, spindle speed does not arrive at the specified speed.
This function is valid when PARAM 3708#0=1.
h. Manual feedrate override Normally manual feedrate override function is used for jog feed.
om
is 0% (dry run) But when DRN(dry run) signal turns on during an auomatic
operation,override values set with these signals become valid to the
following speed set by a parameter.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0046 DRN
r.c
#7(DRN) : Dry run signal is input with this signal being 1.
e
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0010
G0011
nt *JV7
*JV15
*JV6
*JV14
*JV5
*JV13
*JV4
*JV12
+JV3
+JV11
*JV2
↓
*JV10
*JV1
↓
*JV9
*JV0
↓
*JV8
ce
When override value is 0%, all bits of the above address is
[1111 . . . . 1111] or [0000 . . . . 0000].
i. NC is in a reset state In this case, the CNC’s status display shows RESET. Refer to item 1.
(2) Only rapid traverse in positioning (G00) does not function Confirm
w
289
7. TROUBLESHOOTING B–62705EN/03
(HROV–0) (HROV=1)
om
1421 Rapid traverse override F0 rate
r.c
(a) Maximum feedrate set by parameter is incorrect.
1422 Maximum feedrate
e
(b) Feedrate is specified by feed per revolution (mm/rev)
1) Position coder does not rotate
nt Check the connection between spindle and position coder
The following failure is considered:
D Timing belt is broken
ce
D Key is removed
D Coupling is loose
D Connector of signal cable is loosened
2) Position coder is faulty
nc
<T series>
Whether A/B phase signals from the position coder are read
correctly, can be judged also by the spindle speed display on the
CRT screen (position screen). (However, it is not displayed
when PARAM 3105#2=0).
290
B–62705EN/03 7.TROUBLESHOOTING
7.6
CYCLE START LED
SIGNAL HAS
TURNED OFF
Points (1) After cycle operation is started, then stopped, check as follows:
(2) Confirm cycle start LED on machine operator’s panel.
(3) Confirm CNC’s diagnostic function.
om
Causes and Remedies The reason why cycle start LED signal (STL) has turned off are displayed
on CNC’s diagnostic numbers 020 to 025 as follows:
r.c
022 RESET AND REWIND ON 0 0 0 1 0 0 0
023 EMERGENCY STOP ON 1 0 0 0 0 0 0
024 RESET ON 1 1 1 1 0 0 0
025 STOP MOTION OR DWELL 1 1 1 1 1 1 0
e
a. Emergency stop signal
nt b.
c.
d.
e.
External reset signal
Reset button on MDI
Reset & rewind signal
Servo alarm
ce
f. Feed hold by switching mode
g. Single block stop
nc
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
X1008 *ESP (T series)
G0008 *ESP
w
input #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0008 ERS
c. Reset button on the MDI An automatic operation is put into a reset status when RESET key on the
is pressed MDI panel is pressed.
291
7. TROUBLESHOOTING B–62705EN/03
#6(RRW) : When this signal is 1, the reset & rewind signal is input.
This signal is usually used for a confirmation signal of M30 when an M30
is specified in a program as the end of a program.
Therefore, when M30 is executed, this signal is input.
e. Servo alarm has When any servo alarm has generated, cycle operation is put into the reset
om
generated state and operation stop.
f. Cycle operation is in a The cycle operation becomes feed hold state in the following cases:
feed hold state 1) Modes are switched from an automatic operation mode to a manual
operation mode.
2) Feed hold signal is input.
r.c
<Mode select signal>
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0043 MD4 MD2 MD1
e
↓ ↓ ↓
memory edit(EDIT) 0 1 1
nt Automatic
operation
Automatic operation
(AUTO)
Manual data input (MDI)
0
0
0
0
1
0
ce
Jog feed (JOG) 1 0 0
Manual Handle/step 1 0 1
operation
o eration
TEACH IN HANDLE 1 1 1
TEACH IN JOG 1 1 0
nc
292
B–62705EN/03 7.TROUBLESHOOTING
7.7
NO DISPLAY
APPEARS AT
POWER–UP
Judgement of the point Check whether the STATUS LED on the main board shows the following
state.
om
1 2 3 4
STATUS f (f : on, : off)
r.c
Therefore, display system may be faulty.
If the status shows other state, a hardware other than the display system
may be troublesome.
e
Causes and remedies
1. When the display system (1) Confirmation item
is in troulde nt1 Is power supplied to the display?
2 Is a video signal connected? Isn’t it disconnected? or braked?
(2) Causes and remedies
ce
1 Power to the display is faulty. (Exchange power supply unit).
2 Cable connection is faulty. (Correct the connection).
3 CRT control circuit on the I/O board is faulty.
nc
trouble
1 2 3 4
STATUS f (f : on, : off)
w
When STATUS LED on the main board is other than above, check LEDs
on the main CPU board, identify the trouble and make an appropriate
w
293
7. TROUBLESHOOTING B–62705EN/03
7.8
ALARM 85 TO 87 (START)
(READER/PUNCHER
INTERFACE ALARM)
YES
Alarm 85?
om
Alarm 86?
faulty
NO
Is I/O NO
parameter
correct?
r.c
YES Set correct parameters
OFF
e
Is power of I/O ?
nt ON
Is cable NO
Turn on I/O device
ce
connection right?
YES
Connect the cable
S I/O interface
module is faulty
Alarm 87
.c
294
B–62705EN/03 7.TROUBLESHOOTING
<Parameter>
Value of parame-
ter 0020 0 1 2 3
Function
Feed 0101#7 0111#7 0121#7 0131#7
Data input code 0101#3 0111#3 0121#3 0131#3
Stop bit 0101#0 0111#0 0121#0 0131#0
Type of I/O device 102 112 122 132
Baud rate 103 113 123 133
om
C
Communica-
u ca 0135#3 – – – 0 1
tion method RS–232C RS–422
I/O printed circuit board Option 1 board
Connector
JD5A JD5B JD5C JD6A
r.c
NOTE
1 Numbers in the table indicate parameters and bit numbers.
Example) 101#7:bit7 of parameter 101.
2 For data communications by RS–422, refer to parameters
134 and 135.
e
0101
0111
nt #7
NFD
#6 #5 #4 #3
ASI
#2 #1 #0
SB2
ce
0121
0131
#7(NFD) 0 : Feed is output before and after data in data output (FANUC PPR)
1 : Feed is not output (standard).
w
295
7. TROUBLESHOOTING B–62705EN/03
om
Value Baud rate
13 38400
14 76800
15 86400
r.c
Check the following parameters also, when parameter no.0020 is 3.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
e
0134 CLK NCD SYN PRY
#5(CLK) 0 : Internal clock is used for baud rate clock of RS–422 interface.
1 : External clock is used for baud rate clock of RS–422 interface.
.c
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0135 RMS R42 PRA ETX ASC
w
#0(ASC) 0 : All the communication codes except for NC data is ISO code.
1 : All the communication codes except for NC data is ASCII code.
w
296
B–62705EN/03 7.TROUBLESHOOTING
om
faulty, replace it.
(ii) When parameter no. 0020 is 3 (JD5C, JD6A of option 1 board)
Because option 1 board may be faulty, replace it.
(d) Cable between NC and I/O device is faulty.
Check the cable for disconnection or wrong connection.
r.c
<Connection>
e
Punch panel
nt R232C(JD5B)
Tape reader
ce
Option 1 board
R232C(JD5C)
Host computer
nc
R232C(JD6A)
Host computer
.c
w
w
w
297
7. TROUBLESHOOTING B–62705EN/03
RS232C (JD5A)
Punch panel
RS232C (JD5B)
RD (01) (03) RD
0V (02)
DR (03) (06) DR
0V (04)
CS (05) (05) CS
0V (06)
om
CD (07) (08) CD
0V (08)
(09)
+24V (10)
SD (11) (02) SD
0V (12)
r.c
ER (13) (20) ER
0V (14)
RS (15) (04) RS
0V (16) (07) SG
e
(17)
(18)
+24V (19) (25) +24V
nt (20)
G
Connector : Half–pitch 20–pins
Shield
G
(01) FG
Connector :DBM–25S
ce
RS232C (JD5C) Host computer
nc
RD (01) (02) SD
0V (02)
DR (03) (20) ER
.c
0V (04)
CS (05) (04) RS
0V (06)
CD (07) (08) CD
w
0V (08)
(09)
+24V (10)
w
SD (11) (03) RD
0V (12)
ER (13) (06) DR
w
0V (14)
RS (15) (05) CS
0V (16) (07) SG
(17)
(18)
+24V (19) (25) +24V
(20) (01) FG
Shield
G Connector D–SUB 25 pins
Connector : Half–pitch 20–pins
298
B–62705EN/03 7.TROUBLESHOOTING
NOTE
1 When CS is not used, connect it to RS.
2 For protocol A or extended protocol A: When DR is not used,
connect it to ER. Always connect CD to ER.
RD (01) (04) RD
*RD (02) (22) *RD
om
RT (03) (17) TT
*RT (04) (35) *TT
CS (05) (07) RS
*CS (06) (25) *RS
DM (07) (12) TR
Note) *DM (09) (30) *TR
0V (08) (19) SG
r.c
(+24V) (10)
SD (11) (06) RD
*SD (12) (24) *RD
TT (13) (08) RT
*TT (14) (26) *RT
e
RS (15) (09) CS
*RS (16) (27) *CS
nt TR (17)
*TR (18)
(+24V) (19)
(20)
(11)
(29)
(01) FG
DM
*DM
ce
Shield
G
Connector : Half–pitch 20 pins (PCR) Connector : D–SUB 25 pins
nc
NOTE
Always use a twisted pair cable.
.c
w
w
w
299
7. TROUBLESHOOTING B–62705EN/03
7.9
ALARM 90
(REFERENCE
POSITION RETURN
IS ABNORMAL)
Contents Reference position return was executed when the following condition is
not satisfied:
om
The CNC received one rotation signal at least one time when the axis is
moving to the reference position at a speed higher than a speed equivalent
to 128 pulses of position error amount(DGN300).
Countermeasures
(START)
r.c
Position error
Check whether position gain is greater than 128 pulses amount : 300
(DGN 300) before or during reference position return.
e
YES
128 or more (1) Next page
nt Raise the speed
NO
ce
Check feed rate command:
PRM 1420 F : Rapid traverse rate (mm/min)
PRM 1424 Manual rapid traverse rate (mm/min)
PRM 1825 G : Servo loop gain (0.01sec–1)
F5000/3
nc
Position error=
Gdetection unit[µm/PLUSE]
Detection unit : Move amount to a command pulse (usually 1µm)
In metric machine, if the no. of digits below decimal point is 4 on the position
display screen, detection unit is 0.1 µm.
.c
1 0 25%
1 1 Fo rate
w
300
B–62705EN/03 7.TROUBLESHOOTING
(1)
om
wards RP.
r.c
NO
More than 4.75V
YES
e
Hardware failure Pulse coder power voltage is low
D Reference A speed more than 128 pulses is required because if speed is lower that
.c
Parameter No. 1836 can be set to 128 or less, as the minimum positional
deviation with which reference position return is possible. (If the
w
301
7. TROUBLESHOOTING B–62705EN/03
7.10 Absolute position data in the serial pulse coder was lost.
(This alarm will be generated when serial pulse coder is exchanged or
ALARM 300 position feedback signal cable of the serial pulse coder is disconnected).
(REQUEST FOR
REFERENCE
POSITION RETURN)
D When reference position (1) Execute manual reference position return only for an axis for which
om
return function is this alarm was generated.When manual reference position return
present cannot be executed because of an another alarm, set parameter 1815#5
to 0 and release the alarm and perform manual operation.
(2) Press RESET key at the end of reference position return to release the
alarm.
r.c
D When reference position Execute dogless reference position setting to memorize the reference
return function is not position.
present
e
D When serial pulse coder Since the reference position is different from the former one, change the
is changed grid shift value (PRM 1850) to correct the position.
Related parameters
nt #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
ce
1815 APC x APZx
1 : established
#5(APCx) 0 : Position detector is incremental pulse coder.
1 : Position detector is absolute pulse coder.
.c
System configuration
w
Battery 6V
SERVOn
(JSnA) (JSnB)
Feed back signal (JFn) Feedback cable
w
302
B–62705EN/03 7.TROUBLESHOOTING
7.11 The absolute pulse coder cable, or a module (servo control module, servo
interface module, or servo module) on the main board may be faulty.
ALARM 301 TO 305
(ABSOLUTE PULSE
CODER IS FAULTY)
Countermeasures 1 Agitate the cable connected to the SERVO 1 to 4 or the cable connected
to the ENC 1 to 4 of servomodule. If an alarm is issued, replace the
cable.
om
2 Replace the module or main board.
When the A16B–2201–0721 is being used as the main board, replace
the servo interface module corresponding to the axis for which an
alarm was issued. When the A16B–2202–0900 and A16B–3200–0020
are being used as the main board, the first/second axis servo interface
circuit is mounted on the main board, and the third/fourth axis servo
r.c
interface circuit is mounted on the servo module. Therefore, replace
either the main board or servo module according to the axis for which
an alarm was issued.
See Subsec.2.2.1 for details of the module specifications and
e
mounting locations.
nt
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w
303
7. TROUBLESHOOTING B–62705EN/03
7.12 This alarm is generated when absolute pulse coder battery becomes low.
ALARM 306 TO 308
(ABSOLUTE PULSE
CODER BATTERY IS
LOW)
Remedies 1 Battery for built–in absolute pulse coderReplace the battery
connected to connector CX5X (or CX5Y) of the servo amplifier
module. (Battery specification: A06B–6073–K001)
om
2 Battery for separate absolute pulse coder
Exchange the battery connected to the connector JF25 on the main
board.
NOTE
r.c
1 Change the batteries while power of NC is supplied.
2 Do not change the battery (memory backup battery) for the
control unit.
e
nt
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w
304
B–62705EN/03 7.TROUBLESHOOTING
om
D When diagnostic number
0202 shows 1 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
DGN 0202 CMAL SPH
r.c
#0(SPH) Soft phase data abnormal alarm has generated.
1 Check the contens using the above diagnostic function if the alarm
generates repeatedly. If diagnostic data is the same, serial α pulse
coder may be faulty.⇒Refer to Note
e
2 When diagnostic result does not the same, or other abnormality is
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
ce
DGN 0204 LDAL PMAL
feedback cable.
(1) #4(LDAL) : LED in the serial pulse coder is abnormal.
Serialα pulse coder is faulty⇒Refer to Note
(2) #3(PMAL) : Pulses are not issued correctly by abnormality of
.c
feedback cable.
1 Fault of serialα pulse coder ⇒Refer to Note
w
2 Feedback cable.
(Failure of the cables connecting the pulse coder and servo
amplifier module and those connecting the servo amplifier module
w
NOTE
w
305
7. TROUBLESHOOTING B–62705EN/03
om
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
DGN 0202 DTE CRC STB
r.c
Causes 1) #7(DTE):Response from serial α pulse coder is absent.
1 Signal cable is disconnected
2 Serial α pulse coder is faulty. å See Note 1.
e
3 +5V to the serial α pulse coder is lowered.
2) #6(CRC),#5(STB):Serial communication is in faulty
nt
1 Signal cable (between the pulse coder and servo amplifier module
and between the servo amplifier module and main board) is faulty.
2 Serial α pulse coder is faulty å See Note 1.
ce
3 Failure of the servo interface module, servo control module, or
servo module on the main board. å See Note 2.
4 Main board is faulty å See Note 3.
nc
NOTE
1 After the serial pulse coder is changed, reference position
or machine’s standard point is different from the one before
replacement. Therefore reset and adjust it again.
.c
306
B–62705EN/03 7.TROUBLESHOOTING
om
Points Confirm the detail by the diagnostic function of CNC.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
DGN 0200 OVL
r.c
Check details of alarms by DGN 201.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
DGN 0201 ALD
e
↓
1 Overheat of servo motor
NO
Is it hot ?
YES
Overheat of motor
.c
Defective thermostat
(Next page) 1
w
NOTE
w
307
7. TROUBLESHOOTING B–62705EN/03
D Overheat of power
supply module
(START)
NO
om
[3] ?
r.c
Is amplifier hot
? module
YES NO
Normal ?
e
YES
S Check whether the ambient
Power supply
temperature has increased.
nt
S Check whether the cutting
conditions are too severe.
S Check whether excessive
module is faulty
ce
load is being imposed on the
machine. Check magnetic circuit
S Check that the motor insula-
tion is normal.
nc
.c
w
w
w
308
B–62705EN/03 7.TROUBLESHOOTING
7.16 Ready signal (*DRDY) of servo amplifier is not turned on or turned off
during operation.
ALARM 401
(*DRDY SIGNAL
TURNED OFF) (START)
om
NO(Not lit)
[-] ?
r.c
module
e
NO
NO
100VAC is
nt normal ?
NOTE
1 The configuration and mounting locations of the modules
w
309
7. TROUBLESHOOTING B–62705EN/03
7.17
ALARM 404 AND 405
(*DRDY SIGNAL
TURNED ON)
D Alarm 404 *DRDY signal is turned on before MCON signal is turned on. Or *DRDY
is not turned off after MCON signal is turned off.
D Causes 1 Servo amplifier module is faulty.
om
2 Between servo amplifier module and main board is faulty.
3 A module on the main board is faulty:
S Servo interface module failure
S Servo control module failure
S Servo module failure
r.c
4 Main board is faulty.
NOTE
1 The configuration and mounting locations of the mounted
e
modules vary with the specification of the main board. For
details, see Subsec. 2.2.1.
2 When the main board is replaced, all the data stored in
nt
memory is lost. Set the NC data again, referring to Chapter
3 “INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA”.
ce
Power on sequence (NCàServo amplifier)
Power ON
=*Input fuse disconnection
Position, velocity
=*System alarm (ALM900 to 973)
control ready (*MCON)
=*Servo alarm (ALM400 to 417)
w
JSnA JSnB
–10 –10
DV RV RLY MCC
*MCOM
–20 –20
RV DV
*DRDY
310
B–62705EN/03 7.TROUBLESHOOTING
NOTE
When the main board is replaced, all the data stored in
memory is lost. Set the NC data again, referring to Chapter
3 “INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA”.
om
e r.c
nt
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w
311
7. TROUBLESHOOTING B–62705EN/03
7.18 Position error amount at stop (DGN 300) exceeds a value set by parameter
No. 1829.
ALARM 410
(EXCESSIVE (START)
POSITION ERROR
AMOUNT DURING YES
Is it vertical axis?
STOP)
NO
Check parameters 1825 and 1829 if they are cor- Check servo off signal of
om
rect (see parameter list attached) each axis. The servo off
function is valid when DGN
G126 bits 0 to 7 is 1.
Servo off funciton is used to
escape overload of an axis
when the axis is mechani-
cally clamped.
NO
r.c
Correct ?
YES
Set correct
Note) parameters.
e
Perform initial setting
of servo parameters YES
“1” ?
nt Recovered ?
NO
Check PMC
NO
ce
YES
Turn off NC power
Be carefull vertical and remove power
Set digital servo pa- axis does not drop. line of motor then
rameters according turn on power
nc
to parameter list
YES
S Servo amp. module is faulty.
S Module failure on main board:
1 Servo interface module failure
Motor power line
w
NOTE
1 The configuration and mounting locations of the modules
vary with the specification of the main board. For details,
see Subsec. 2.2.1.
2 When the main board is replaced, all the data stored in
memory is lost. Set NC data again, referring to Chapter 3
“INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA”.
312
B–62705EN/03 7.TROUBLESHOOTING
7.19 Position error amount during movement (DGN 300) execeeds a value set
by parameter 1828.
ALARM 411
(EXECESSIVE (START)
POSITION ERROR
DURING MOVE) With a move command,
does this alarm occur af-
ter machine moves ?
YES (Move)
om
Moves and
1
alarmed?
NO (No move)
r.c
and turn on power
does not drop by its weight.
e
vo amplifier module.
nt Power output ?
YES
NO (Not output)
Confirm each–axis
ce
servo off signal
G126.0 to 3=1
Mechanical load is
excessive
Disconnection of
power line YES
nc
“1” ?
NO
Check PMC su-
quence, release ser- Signal line between main
CPU board and servo am-
.c
YES
Normal ?
NO
w
313
7. TROUBLESHOOTING B–62705EN/03
YES
Value fluctuate ?
om
NO
S Check whether the cut-
ting conditions are too
Compare the value Note 1)
severe.
obtained by the fol-
lowing formula and S Check whether exces-
DGN 300 sive load is being im-
r.c
posed on the machine.
S Check that the motor in-
sulation is normal.
NO
Correct ?
e
YES S Servo amplifier module failure
S Module failure on main board:
nt
Compare value of
PRM1828 and the
1 Servo interface module failure
2 Servo control module failure
3 Servo module failure
S Main board failure
ce
list Note2)
nc
NO
Correct ?
YES
.c
314
B–62705EN/03 7.TROUBLESHOOTING
7.20
ALARM 414
(DIGITAL SERVO 414 SERVO ALARM:X–AXIS
EXAMPLE OF DISPLAY
AXIS NAME DETECTED
SYSTEM IS DETECTION IS DISPLAYED
SYSTEM ERROR
ABNORMAL)
om
Points Check details by CNC’s diagnostic fucntion and LED display on the servo
amplifier module and power supply module.
1
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
DGN 0200 LV OVC HCA HVA DCA FBA OFA
r.c
DGN 0201 ALD EXP
e
See Subsec. 1.8.2 for details of each bit.
nt
2 LED display on the servo amplifier module and power supply module
(Front panel)
ce
STATUS
7 segments
.c
w
w
w
315
7. TROUBLESHOOTING B–62705EN/03
om
↓ ↓
FBA only is set to 1. The pulse coder is discon-
nected (software)(Note).
FBA and ALD are set to 1. The built–in serial pulse coder is
disconnected.
r.c
FBA, ALD, and EXP are set to 1. The separate position detector
is disconnected (SCALEn).
NOTE
e
This alarm is related with full–closed system.
Causes nt
1 Signal cable is disconnected or short–circuitted.
2 Serial pulse coder or position detector is faulty. Refer to Note 1.
3 A module on the main board is faulty:
ce
S Servo interface module failure
S Servo control module failure
S Servo module failure
See Note 2.
nc
NOTE
1 After the pulse coder is replaced, reference position or
.c
Linearscale
Servo amp.
module
PC
(JFn)
(SERVOn) (JSnB)
(SCALEn)
n is an axis number
316
B–62705EN/03 7.TROUBLESHOOTING
D Causes
1 Confirm the setting value of the following parameters:
om
PRM 2020 : Motor format number
PRM 2022 : Motor rotation direction
PRM 2023 : Number of pulses of velocity feedbacks
PRM 2024 : Number of pulses of position feedback
PRM 1023 : Servo axis number
r.c
PRM 2084 : Flexible feed gear ratio
PRM 2085 : Flexible feed gear ratio
Confirm the details with diagnosis function of CNC side.
2 Change the setting of this parameter to 0.
e
PRM 2047 : Observer parameter
nt
3 Perform initial setting of digital servo parameters.
Refer to setcion 5.1 “INITIAL SETTING SERVO PARAMETERS” .
This data indicates the cause of servo alarm No. 417, detected by the NC.
ce
If the alarm is detected by the servo, the PRM bit (bit 4 of DGN No. 0203)
is set to 1.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
nc
#0(MOT) : The motor type specified in parameter No. 2020 falls outside the
predetermined range.
.c
#2(PLC) : The number of velocity feedback pulses per motor revolution, specified in
parameter No. 2023, is zero or less. The value is invalid.
#3(PLS) : The number of position feedback pulses per motor revolution, specified in
w
317
7. TROUBLESHOOTING B–62705EN/03
Remedies
om
Check whether spindle speed is constant by view
of the speed meter on CRT.
YES
Constant ?
r.c
NO
e
on CRT.
nt YES
Heavy cutting?
Confirm the following
parameter :
PRM 4911
ce
PRM 4912
Reduce cutting condition PRM 4913
NO PRM 4914
YES
.c
Worn ?
Replace tool
NO
w
Remedies PRM 4911 : A ratio of spindle speed at which actual spindle speed is
w
PRM 4913 : Spindle speed fluctuation that is not regarded as the spindle
speed fluctuation alarm.
PRM 4914 : Time when a spindle speed changed to when spindle speed
fluctuation detection is started.
318
B–62705EN/03 7.TROUBLESHOOTING
Causes and Remedies Improper connection between the main board and the serial spindle. The
following reason is considered.
S System control module or memory & spindle module is faulty
om
S A cable between the main board and spindle amplifier module
disconneted or short–circuited.
S Spindle amplifier module is faulty
r.c
NOTE
1 Replacing whether system control module or memory &
spindle module is decided by the specification of main
board. Subsec. 2.2.1.
2 When the system control module is replaced, replace it as
e
soon as possible (within 30 minutes) .
When the system control module is kept removed, memory
nt
contents of CNC is lost.
3 When the memory & spindle module is replaced, the ladder
program stored in memory is lost. See PMC data and set
ladder program again.
ce
4 When the memory & spindle module is replaced, the NC
data stored in memory is lost.
See input/output item of data and set NC data again.
5 When the memory & spindle module is replaced, with using
nc
the macro executer, the macro data is also lost. Set macro
data again after replacing.
.c
w
w
w
319
7. TROUBLESHOOTING B–62705EN/03
7.25 When the spindle amplifier does not become normal state immediately
after power is turned on in the serial spindle system, this alarm is
ALARM 750 informed.
(SPINDLE SERIAL
LINK CANNOT BE
STARTED)
Points This alarm does not occur once the system becomes ready including the
spindle system .
This alarm occurs during power on sequence before the system becomes
om
ready.
After the system becomes ready, serial spindle alarm is issued by alarm
749.
Causes
r.c
(1) Optical cable is in poor contact or spindle amplifier power is off.
(2) When display of spindle amplifier shows SU–01 or an alarm other than
AL–24 is displayed, power to the NC is turned on.
In this case, this alarm usually occurs when the NC’s power is turned
e
off while the serial spindle is operating. Turn off the power of serial
spindle once, then turn it on and starts the system.
nt
(3) When the 2nd spindle is at the state of (1) or (2).
When the 2nd spindle is used, parameter is set as follows :
Bit 4 of parameter no.3701 is 1: No. of serial spindles connected is 2.
ce
Details of Alarms Confirm the details of troubles on diagnostic 409.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
DGN 0409 SPE S2E S1E SHE
nc
320
B–62705EN/03 7.TROUBLESHOOTING
om
check items are not concerned.
↓
Check the parameters and connections at the 1st spindle to see whether
the 1st spindle is mechanically and electrically connected.
↓
r.c
If the above settings and connections are right, the system control
module memory and spindle module, or the spindle amplifier itself
may be defective.
(3) #2(S2E)1: At the start of spindle serial control, when an abnormality
e
is found in the 2nd spindle side.
↓
nt
Check the 2nd spindle parameters and connections to see whether the
spindle is mechanically and electronically connected to the spindle.
↓
ce
If the above settings and connections are right, the system control
module memory and spindle module, or the spindle amplifier itself
may be defective.
(4) #3(SPE)1: In spindle serial control, the serial spindle parameters does
nc
parameters.
NOTE
w
321
7. TROUBLESHOOTING B–62705EN/03
7.26 With serial spindle system, an alarm on the spindle unit is informed to the
CNC.
ALARM 751,761 The alarm contents is displayed by AL–xx on the display of spindle amp.
(SPINDLE ALARM) The CNC holds an alarm number display (AL–xx).
D Causes and Remedies Refer to the “FANUC AC SPINDLE SERVO UNIT (Serial Interface)
Maintenance Manual (B–65045E)” for details. Repair the spindle system
as described in the manual.
om
e r.c
nt
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w
322
B–62705EN/03 7.TROUBLESHOOTING
Remedies
(START)
om
Check fan on the top of the control unit is oper-
ating when power is on.
r.c
NO
Operating
YES
e
Check temperature around the control unit is Fun motor is faulty
nt
high (more than 45_C)
Replace fan motor
ce
High YES
temperature ?
NO
nc
NOTE
When the main board is replaced, all data stored in memory
is lost. So, set the NC data again as explained in the section
w
323
7. TROUBLESHOOTING B–62705EN/03
om
SYSTM ALARM D201–04
r.c
Names of softwares those are in
MACRO ROM trouble are displayed.
SERVO ROM
e
2. Main board specification: F–ROM module on the main board or main board is defective.
A16B–2202–0900
nt
SYSTM ALARM
3. Main board specificaton: Defect in system ROM on the main board, or on the main board itself.
A16B–3200–0030
SYSTEM ALARM DE01–01
.c
F01
Indicates the
w
number of the
defective
ROM.
w
NOTE
w
324
B–62705EN/03 7.TROUBLESHOOTING
Causes and Remedies (1) RAM module is faulty or data in RAM module is faulty
When this alarm occurs immediately after power is turned on, once
turn off power, then perform memory all clear (see 1.12 list of
operation) .
om
(2) If parity error is not released by clearing all memory, RAM module
may be faulty. Change RAM module on main board.
* Set all the data again, referring to the data input/ output item.
1 Main board specification : A16B–2201–0721
Replace RAM module on the main board.
r.c
See “Data input/output” then set all data again.
2 Main board specification : A16B–2202–0900
Replace the main board when the specifications of memory and
spindle module are A20B–2901–0764, A20B–2901–0765.
e
Replace the main board or memory and spindle module when the
specifications of memory and spindle module are
nt A20B–2901–0762, A20B–2901–0763.
3 Main board specification : A16B–3200–0200
When the A20B–2901–0764 or A20B–2901–0765 memory and
ce
spindle module is installed, replace the main board.
When the A20B–2901–0760 or A20B– 2901–0761 memory and
spindle module is installed, replace the main board or memory &
spindle module.
nc
NOTE
1 See Subsec. 2.2.1 for the specifications of module and the
locations.
.c
the macro executer, the macro data is also lost. Set macro
data again after replacing.
325
7. TROUBLESHOOTING B–62705EN/03
7.30 920: Watch dog alarm or RAM parity in servo control circuit
has occurred in the 1st or 2nd axis
ALARM 920 AND 921 921: Above alarm has occurred in the 3rd or 4th axis
(WATCH DOG OR
RAM PARITY)
points
D Watch dog timer alarm The timer used to monitor the operation of CPU is called the watch dog
timer. The CPU resets timer time every time a constant time has passed.
When an error occurs in CPU or peripheral device, timer is not reset but
om
the alarm is informed.
D RAM parity error RAM parity error was detected in the servo control module.
r.c
1. Main board specification: (1) Servo control module is faulty
A16B–2201–0721 The servo control module includes servo RAM, watch dog timer
circuit, etc. Defectiveness of hardware, abnormality or malfunctioning
of detection circuit or the like is considered.
e
⇒ Change the servo control module.
nt
(2) Servo interface module is faulty
⇒ Change servo interface module.
NOTE
nc
NOTE
w
326
B–62705EN/03 7.TROUBLESHOOTING
NOTE
See Subsec. 2.2.1 for the each specifications and locations
of modules.
om
(3) Malfunction by noise
The watch dog timer circuit or CPU may malfunction due to noise
intruded in the control unit.
⇒ A noise to the power supply or an inductive noise to a signal line
r.c
may be considered. Check operation of the other machine that is
connected to the same power line, relays and compressers which
may cause noise, then perform measures to supress noises. (See
Sec. 2.13).
e
nt
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w
327
7. TROUBLESHOOTING B–62705EN/03
D Causes and remedies (1) Check whether servo control module or servo interface module is
mounted or not, whether it is mounted correctly or not, and whether
it is mounted securely.
om
(2) If cause 1 is not identified, the control module, servo interface module, servo
module or main board may be faulty.
Replace each module, referring to the alarm 920 and 921 in the previous
sections.
e r.c
nt
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w
328
B–62705EN/03 7.TROUBLESHOOTING
om
on, noise may be a cause. Refer to Sec. 2.13.
e r.c
nt
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w
329
7. TROUBLESHOOTING B–62705EN/03
om
module is faulty. Replacing whether F–ROM module or memory &
spindle module is decided by the specification of main board) .
S RAM module is faulty.
S Main board is faulty.
r.c
NOTE
1 when the main board or the RAM module is replaced, all the
data stored in memory is lost. Set NC data again, referring
to the Data input/output item.
2 when replacing F–ROM module, replace it with one that has
e
software equal to or more than current software version.
3 When the memory & spindle module is replaced, the ladder
nt
program stored in memory is lost. See input/output item of
PMC data and set ladder program again.
4 When the memory & spindle module is replaced, the NC
ce
data stored in memory is lost.
See input/output item of data and set NC data again.
5 When the memory & spindle module is replaced, with using
the macro executer, the macro data is also lost. Set macro
data again after replacing.
nc
module.
w
w
w
330
B–62705EN/03 7.TROUBLESHOOTING
7.34 RAM parity error or NMI has occurred in the PMC control module.
ALARM 970
(NMI ALARM IN PMC
CONTROL MODULE)
om
module failure)
For information relating to module replacement, see the description of
alarm 950.
e r.c
nt
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w
331
7. TROUBLESHOOTING B–62705EN/03
7.35 A communication error is detected between the CNC and FANUC I/O
unit at SLC in the PMC control module.
ALARM 971
(NMI ALARM IN SLC)
Causes and Remedies Following cause is considered.
S PMC control module is faulty.
Refer to “alarm 950” for changing of PMC control module.
S FANUC I/O unit is faulty.
S +24V power to the FANUC I/O unit is faulty.
om
Remove connector CP32 of the interface module (AF01A,AF01B)
and measure voltage across 1st and 2nd pins using tester.
(Normally+24VDC+–10%)
Interface module
r.c
AF01A/AF01B
1 +24V
CP32 2 GND
3 Unused
e
nt
Disconnection or broken of cable.
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w
332
B–62705EN/03 7.TROUBLESHOOTING
7.36 NMI has generated in a board other than the main printed circuit board.
ALARM 972
(NMI ALARM)
Causes and Remedies 1) Any of option boards shown below may be faulty.
S Option 1 board
S Loader control board
om
SYSTEM ALARM DDF1–02
SLOT 02
Indicates the slot No.
915 SRAM PARITY : (2N+1) <SUB where an NMI occurred,
r.c
and the relevant mes-
sage.
e
NOTE
When you change Loader control board, you must input
nt data (parameters, programs, etc.) on sub side.
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w
333
7. TROUBLESHOOTING B–62705EN/03
NOTE
When the main CPU board is replaced, all the data in
om
memory is lost. Set the NC data (parameter, offset and
program etc) again.
r.c
NOTE
When you change the Loader control boards board, you
must input data (parameters, programs,etc.) on the sub
side.
e
nt
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w
334
w
w
w
.c
nc
ce
APPENDIX
nt
er.c
om
B–62705EN/03 APPENDIX A. ALARM LIST
A
om
A.3 LIST OF ALARMS (SERIAL SPINDLE) . . . . . . . . . 361
e r.c
nt
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w
337
A. ALARM LIST APPENDIX B–62705EN/03
A.1
LIST OF ALARM
CODES
(1) Program errors /Alarms on program and operation (P/S alarm)
Number Message Contents
000 PLEASE TURN OFF POWER A parameter which requires the power off was input, turn off power.
001 TH PARITY ALARM TH alarm (A character with incorrect parity was input).
Correct the tape.
om
002 TV PARITY ALARM TV alarm (The number of characters in a block is odd). This alarm will
be generated only when the TV check is effective.
003 TOO MANY DIGITS Data exceeding the maximum allowable number of digits was input.
(Refer to the item of max. programmable dimensions.)
004 ADDRESS NOT FOUND A numeral or the sign “–” was input without an address at the beginning
of a block. Modify the program .
r.c
005 NO DATA AFTER ADDRESS The address was not followed by the appropriate data but was followed
by another address or EOB code. Modify the program.
006 ILLEGAL USE OF NEGATIVE SIGN Sign “–” input error (Sign “–” was input after an address with which it can-
not be used. Or two or more “–” signs were input.)
Modify the program.
e
007 ILLEGAL USE OF DECIMAL POINT Decimal point “ . ” input error (A decimal point was input after an address
with which it can not be used. Or two decimal points were input.)
Modify the program.
009
010
ILLEGAL ADDRESS INPUT
IMPROPER G–CODE
nt Unusable character was input in significant area.
Modify the program.
An unusable G code or G code corresponding to the function not pro-
ce
vided is specified. Modify the program.
011 NO FEEDRATE COMMANDED Feedrate was not commanded to a cutting feed or the feedrate was in-
adequate. Modify the program.
CAN NOT COMMAND G95 A synchronous feed is specified without the option for threading / syn-
(M series) chronous feed.
nc
014 ILLEGAL LEAD COMMAND In variable lead threading, the lead incremental and decremental out-
(T series) putted by address K exceed the maximum command value or a com-
mand such that the lead becomes a negative value is given.
Modify the program.
.c
TOO MANY AXES COMMANDED An attempt was made to move the machine along the axes, but the num-
(M series) ber of the axes exceeded the specified number of axes controlled simul-
taneously. Modify the program.
TOO MANY AXES COMMANDED An attempt has been made to move the tool along more than the maxi-
w
using the torque limit signal (G31 P99/98). The command must be ac-
companied with an axis movement command for a single axis, in the
same block.
020 OVER TOLERANCE OF RADIUS In circular interpolation (G02 or G03), difference of the distance between
w
the start point and the center of an arc and that between the end point
and the center of the arc exceeded the value specified in parameter No.
3410.
021 ILLEGAL PLANE AXIS An axis not included in the selected plane (by using G17, G18, G19) was
COMMANDED commanded in circular interpolation. Modify the program.
022 NO CIRCLE RADIUS The command for circular interpolation lacks arc radius R or coordinate
I, J, or K of the distance between the start point to the center of the arc.
023 ILLEGAL RADIUS COMMAND In circular interpolation by radius designation, negative value was com-
(T series) manded for address R. Modify the program.
025 CANNOT COMMAND F0 IN F0 (fast feed) was instructed by F1 –digit column feed in circular inter-
G02/G03 (M series) polation. Modify the program.
338
B–62705EN/03 APPENDIX A. ALARM LIST
om
(T series) Modify the program.
ILLEGAL OFFSET NUMBER The offset number specified by D/H code for tool length offset or cutter
(M series) compensation is too large. Modify the program.
030
ILLEGAL OFFSET NUMBER The offset number in T function specified for tool offset is tool large.
(T series) Modify the program.
031 ILLEGAL P COMMAND IN G10 In setting an offset amount by G10, the offset number following address
r.c
P was excessive or it was not specified.
Modify the program.
032 ILLEGAL OFFSET VALUE IN G10 In setting an offset amount by G10 or in writing an offset amount by sys-
tem variables, the offset amount was excessive.
NO SOLUTION AT CRC A point of intersection cannot be determined for cutter compensation.
e
(M series) Modify the program.
033
NO SOLUTION AT CRC A point of intersection cannot be determined for tool nose radius com-
034
(T series)
NO CIRC ALLOWED IN ST–UP
/EXT BLK (M series)
nt pensation. Modify the program.
The start up or cancel was going to be performed in the G02 or G03
mode in cutter compensation C. Modify the program.
NO CIRC ALLOWED IN ST–UP The start up or cancel was going to be performed in the G02 or G03
ce
/EXT BLK (T series) mode in tool nose radius compensation. Modify the program.
CAN NOT COMMANDED G31 Skip cutting (G31) was specified in tool nose radius compensation
035
(T series) mode. Modify the program.
036 CAN NOT COMMANDED G31 Skip cutting (G31) was specified in cutter compensation mode.
nc
339
A. ALARM LIST APPENDIX B–62705EN/03
om
BLK(T series) Modify the program.
051 MISSING MOVE AFTER CHF/CNR Improper movement or the move distance was specified in the block
(M series) next to the optional chamfering or corner R block.
Modify the program.
MISSING MOVE AFTER CHF/CNR Improper movement or the move distance was specified in the block
(T series) next to the chamfering or corner R block.
r.c
Modify the program.
CODE IS NOT G01 AFTER The block next to the chamfering or corner R block is not G01,G02 or
CHF/CNR (M series) G03.
052 Modify the program.
CODE IS NOT G01 AFTER The block next to the chamfering or corner R block is not G01.
e
CHF/CNR (T series) Modify the program.
TOO MANY ADDRESS For systems without the arbitary angle chamfering or corner R cutting,
053
COMMANDS (M series)
END POINT NOT FOUND In a arbitrary angle chamfering or corner R cutting block, a specified axis
(M series) is not in the selected plane. Correct the program.
058
END POINT NOT FOUND Block end point is not found in direct dimension drawing programming.
w
(T series)
059 PROGRAM NUMBER NOT FOUND In an external program number search, a specified program number
was not found. Otherwise, a program specified for searching is being
edited in background processing. Check the program number and ex-
w
340
B–62705EN/03 APPENDIX A. ALARM LIST
om
of thread.
8. An unusable angle of tool tip is specified in G76.
Modify the program.
063 SEQUENCE NUMBER NOT FOUND The sequence number specified by address P in G70, G71, G72, or G73
(T series) command cannot be searched. Modify the program.
064 SHAPE PROGRAM NOT A target shape which cannot be made by monotonic machining was
r.c
MONOTONOUSLY (T series) specified in a repetitive canned cycle (G71 or G72).
065 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN G71–G73 1. G00 or G01 is not commanded at the block with the sequence num-
(T series) ber which is specified by address P in G71, G72, or G73 command.
2. Address Z(W) or X(U) was commanded in the block with a sequence
number which is specified by address P in G71 or G72, respectively.
e
Modify the program.
066 IMPROPER G–CODE IN G71–G73 An unallowable G code was commanded beween two blocks specified
067
069
(T series)
CAN NOT ERROR IN MDI MODE
(T series)
FORMAT ERROR IN G70–G73
nt by address P in G71, G72, or G73. Modify the program.
G70, G71, G72, or G73 command with address P and Q.
Modify the program.
The final move command in the blocks specified by P and Q of G70,
ce
(T series) G71, G72, and G73 ended with chamfering or corner R.
Modify the program.
070 NO PROGRAM SPACE IN The memory area is insufficient.
MEMORY Delete any unnecessary programs, then retry.
nc
071 DATA NOT FOUND The address to be searched was not found. Or the program with speci-
fied program number was not found in program number search.
Check the data.
072 TOO MANY PROGRAMS The number of programs to be stored exceeded 63 (basic), 125 (option),
200 (option), 400 (option) or 1000 (option). Delete unnecessary pro-
.c
074 ILLEGAL PROGRAM NUMBER The program number is other than 1 to 9999.
Modify the program number.
w
075 PROTECT An attempt was made to register a program whose number was pro-
tected.
076 ADDRESS P NOT DEFINED Address P (program number) was not commanded in the block which
includes an M98, G65, or G66 command. Modify the program.
w
077 SUB PROGRAM NESTING ERROR The subprogram was called in five folds. Modify the program.
078 NUMBER NOT FOUND A program number or a sequence number which was specified by ad-
dress P in the block which includes an M98, M99, M65 or G66 was not
found. The sequence number specified by a GOTO statement was not
found. Otherwise, a called program is being edited in background pro-
cessing. Correct the program, or discontinue the background editing.
079 PROGRAM VERIFY ERROR In memory or program collation,a program in memory does not agree
with that read from an external I/O device. Check both the programs in
memory and those from the external device.
341
A. ALARM LIST APPENDIX B–62705EN/03
om
081 (M series) gram.
OFFSET NUMBER NOT FOUND IN Automatic tool compensation (G36, G37) was specified without a T
G37 (T series) code. (Automatic tool compensation function) Modify the program.
H–CODE NOT ALLOWED IN G37 H code and automatic tool compensation (G37) were specified in the
(M series) same block. (Automatic tool length measurement function) Modify the
program.
082
r.c
T–CODE NOT ALLOWED IN G37 T code and automatic tool compensation (G36, G37) were specified in
(T series) the same block. (Automatic tool compensation function)
Modify the program.
ILLEGAL AXIS COMMAND IN G37 In automatic tool length measurement, an invalid axis was specified or
(M series) the command is incremental. Modify the program.
083
e
ILLEGAL AXIS COMMAND IN G37 In automatic tool compensation (G36, G37), an invalid axis was speci-
(T series) fied or the command is incremental. Modify the program.
085 COMMUNICATION ERROR
nt When entering data in the memory by using Reader / Puncher interface,
an overrun, parity or framing error was generated. The number of bits
of input data or setting of baud rate or specification No. of I/O unit is in-
correct.
ce
086 DR SIGNAL OFF When entering data in the memory by using Reader / Puncher interface,
the ready signal (DR) of reader / puncher was turned off.
Power supply of I/O unit is off or cable is not connected or a P.C.B. is de-
fective.
087 BUFFER OVERFLOW When entering data in the memory by using Reader / Puncher interface,
nc
092 AXES NOT ON THE REFERENCE The commanded axis by G27 (Reference position return check) did not
POINT return to the reference position.
094 P TYPE NOT ALLOWED P type cannot be specified when the program is restarted. (After the au-
w
(COORD CHG) tomatic operation was interrupted, the coordinate system setting opera-
tion was performed.)
Perform the correct operation according to th operator’s manual.
w
095 P TYPE NOT ALLOWED P type cannot be specified when the program is restarted. (After the
(EXT OFS CHG) automatic operation was interrupted, the external workpiece offset
amount changed.)
Perform the correct operation according to th operator’s manual.
096 P TYPE NOT ALLOWED P type cannot be specified when the program is restarted. (After the au-
(WRK OFS CHG) tomatic operation was interrupted, the workpiece offset amount
changed.)
Perform the correct operation according to the operator’s manual.
097 P TYPE NOT ALLOWED P type cannot be directed when the program is restarted. (After power
(AUTO EXEC) ON, after emergency stop or P / S 94 to 97 reset, no automatic operation
is performed.) Perform automatic operation.
342
B–62705EN/03 APPENDIX A. ALARM LIST
om
tion. If this alarm has occurred, press <RESET> while pressing
<PROG>, and only the program being edited will be deleted.
Register the deleted program.
110 DATA OVERFLOW The absolute value of fixed decimal point display data exceeds the al-
lowable range. Modify the program.
111 CALCULATED DATA OVERFLOW The result of calculation turns out to be invalid, an alarm No.111 is is-
r.c
sued.
–1047 to –10–29, 0, 10–29 to 1047
Modify the program.
112 DIVIDED BY ZERO Division by zero was specified. (including tan 90°)
Modify the program.
e
113 IMPROPER COMMAND A function which cannot be used in custom macro is commanded.
Modify the program.
114 FORMAT ERROR IN MACRO There is an error in other formats than <Formula>.
119 ILLEGAL ARGUMENT The SQRT argument is negative. Or BCD argument is negative, and
other values than 0 to 9 are present on each line of BIN argument.
Modify the program.
122 FOUR FOLD MACRO The macro modal call is specified four fold.
.c
124 MISSING END STATEMENT DO–END does not correspond to 1 : 1. Modify the program.
125 FORMAT ERROR IN MACRO <Formula> format is erroneous. Modify the program.
126 ILLEGAL LOOP NUMBER In DOn, 1x n x3 is not established. Modify the program.
w
127 NC, MACRO STATEMENT IN SAME NC and custom macro commands coexist.
BLOCK Modify the program.
128 ILLEGAL MACRO SEQUENCE The sequence number specified in the branch command was not 0 to
w
343
A. ALARM LIST APPENDIX B–62705EN/03
om
C/H–CODE & MOVE CMD IN SAME A move command of other axes was specified to the same block as
BLK. (T series) spindle indexing addresses C, H. Modify the program.
137 M–CODE & MOVE CMD IN SAME A move command of other axes was specified to the same block as
BLK. M–code related to spindle indexing. Modify the program.
139 CAN NOT CHANGE PMC An axis is selected in commanding by PMC axis control.
CONTROL AXIS Modify the program.
r.c
141 CAN NOT COMMAND G51 IN CRC G51 (Scaling ON) is commanded in the tool offset mode.
(M series) Modify the program.
142 ILLEGAL SCALE RATE Scaling magnification is commanded in other than 1 to 999999.
(M series) Correct the scaling magnification setting (G51 Pp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
or parameter 5411 or 5421).
e
143 SCALED MOTION DATA The scaling results, move distance, coordinate value and circular radius
OVERFLOW exceed the maximum command value. Correct the program or scaling
144
(M series)
ILLEGAL PLANE SELECTED
(M series)
nt mangification.
The coordinate rotation plane and arc or cutter compensation C plane
must be the same. Modify the program.
ce
145 ILLEGAL CONDITIONS IN POLAR The conditions are incorrect when the polar coordinate interpolation
COORDINATE INTERPOLATION starts or it is canceled.
1) In modes other than G40, G12.1/G13.1 was specified.
2) An error is found in the plane selection. Parameters No. 5460 and
No. 5461 are incorrectly specified.
nc
149 FORMAT ERROR IN G10L3 A code other than Q1,Q2,P1 or P2 was specified as the life count type
(M series) in the extended tool life management.
150 ILLEGAL TOOL GROUP NUMBER Tool Group No. exceeds the maximum allowable value.
w
152 NO SPACE FOR TOOL ENTRY The number of tools within one group exceeds the maximum value re-
gisterable. Modify the number of tools.
153 T–CODE NOT FOUND In tool life data registration, a T code was not specified where one should
w
344
B–62705EN/03 APPENDIX A. ALARM LIST
om
2) G codes for setting a coordinate system: G50, G52
3) G code for selecting coordinate system: G53 G54 to G59
Modify the program.
177 CHECK SUM ERROR Check sum error
(G05 MODE) Modify the program.
178 G05 COMMANDED IN G41/G42 G05 was commanded in the G41/G42 mode.
r.c
MODE Correct the program.
179 PARAM. (NO. 7510) SETTING The number of controlled axes set by the parameter 7510 exceeds the
ERROR maximum number. Modify the parameter setting value.
180 COMMUNICATION ERROR Remote buffer connection alarm has generated. Confirm the number of
(REMOTE BUF) cables, parameters and I/O device.
e
190 ILLEGAL AXIS SELECT In the constant surface speed control, the axis specification is wrong.
(M series) (See parameter No. 3770.) The specified axis command (P) contains an
illegal value.
(This occurs when the response to switch to the spindle control unit side
with regard to the switching command from the NC is incorrect.
This alarm is not for the purposes of warning against mistakes in opera-
tion, but because continuing operation in this condition can be danger-
ous it is a P/S alarm.)
.c
197 C–AXIS COMMANDED IN SPINDLE The program specified a movement along the Cs–axis when the signal
MODE CON(DGN=G027#7) was off. Correct the program, or consult the PMC
ladder diagram to find the reason the signal is not turned on.
199 MACRO WORD UNDEFINED Undefined macro word was used. Modify the custom macro.
w
200 ILLEGAL S CODE COMMAND In the rigid tap, an S value is out of the range or is not specified.
Modify the program.
201 FEEDRATE NOT FOUND IN RIGID In the rigid tap, no F value is specified.
w
203 PROGRAM MISS AT RIGID In the rigid tap, position for a rigid M code (M29) or an S command is in-
TAPPING correct. Modify the program.
204 ILLEGAL AXIS OPERATION In the rigid tap, an axis movement is specified between the rigid M code
(M29) block and G84 or G74 for M series (G84 or G88 for T series) block.
Modify the program.
205 RIGID MODE DI SIGNAL OFF Rigid mode DI signal is not ON when G84 or G74 for M series (G84 or
G88 for T series) is executed though the rigid M code (M29) is speci-
fied.Consult the PMC ladder diagram to find the reason the DI signal
(DGNG061.1) is not turned on.
206 CAN NOT CHANGE PLANE Plane changeover was instructed in the rigid mode.
(RIGID TAP) (M series) Correct the program.
345
A. ALARM LIST APPENDIX B–62705EN/03
om
ILLEGAL PLANE SELECT The arbitrary angle chamfering or a corner R is commanded or the plane
(M series) including an additional axis. Correct the program.
212
ILLEGAL PLANE SELECT The direct drawing dimensions programming is commanded for the
(T series) plane other than the Z–X plane. Correct the program.
213 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN Movement is commanded for the axis to be synchronously controlled.
SYNCHRO–MODE Any of the following alarms occurred in the operation with the simple
r.c
synchronization control.
1) The program issued the move command to the slave axis.
2) The program issued the manual continuous feed/manual handle
feed/incremental feed command to the slave axis.
3) The program issued the automatic reference position return com-
e
mand without specifying the manual reference position return after
the power was turned on.
4) The difference between the position error amount of the master and
INDEPENDENTLY (T series)
220 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN In the synchronous operation, movement is commanded by the NC pro-
SYNCHR–MODE (T series) gram or PMC axis control interface for the synchronous axis.
221 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN Polygon machining synchronous operation and axis control or balance
SYNCHR–MODE (T series) cutting are executed at a time. Modify the program.
.c
224 RETURN TO REFERENCE POINT Reference position return has not been performed before the automatic
(M series) operation starts. Perform reference position return only when bit 0 of pa-
rameter 1005 is 0.
w
TURN TO REFERENCE POINT Reference position return is necessary before cycle start.
(T series)
231 ILLEGAL FORMAT IN G10 OR L50 Any of the following errors occurred in the specified format at the pro-
w
grammable–parameter input.
1 Address N or R was not entered.
2 A number not specified for a parameter was entered.
w
346
B–62705EN/03 APPENDIX A. ALARM LIST
om
speed cycle machining (G05) has been specified in advance control
mode (G08P1). Execute G08P0; to cancel advance control mode, be-
fore executing these G05 commands.
5010 END OF RECORD The end of record (%) was specified.
I/O is incorrect. modify the program.
5014 TRACE DATA NOT FOUND Transfer cannot be performed because no trace data exists.
r.c
(M series)
5020 PARAMETER OF RESTART An erroneous parameter was specified for restarting a program.
ERROR A parameter for program restart is invalid.
5030 ILLEGAL COMMAND (G100) The end command (G110) was specified before the registratioin start
(T series) command (G101, G102, or G103) was specified for the B–axis.
e
5031 ILLEGAL COMMAND (G100, G102, While a registration start command (G101, G102, or G103) was being
G103) (T series) executed, another registration start command was specified for the
5032
5033
MOVE (T series)
NO PROG SPACE IN MEMORY
nt B–axis.
NEW PRG REGISTERED IN B–AXS While the machine was moving about the B–axis, at attempt was made
to register another move command.
Commands for movement about the B–axis were not registered be-
ce
B–AXS (T series) cause of insufficient program memory.
5034 PLURAL COMMAND IN G110 Multiple movements were specified with the G110 code for the B–axis.
(T series)
5035 NO FEEDRATE COMMANDED A feedrate was not specified for cutting feed about the B–axis.
nc
B–AXS (T series)
5036 ADDRESS R NOT DEFINED IN Point R was not specified for the canned cycle for the B–axis.
G81–G86 (T series)
5037 ADDRESS Q NOT DEFINED IN G83 Depth of cut Q was not specified for the G83 code (peck drilling cycle).
(T series) Alternatively, 0 was specified in Q for the B–axis.
.c
5038 TOO MANY START M–CODE More than six M codes for starting movement about the B–axis were
COMMAND (T series) specified.
5039 START UNREGISTERED B–AXS An attempt was made to execute a program for the B–axis which had
w
5044 G68 FORMAT ERROR A G68 command block contains a format error. This alarm is issued in
(M series) the following cases:
1. I, J, or K is missing from a G68 command block (missing coordinate
rotation option).
2. I, J, and K are 0 in a G68 command block.
3. R is missing from a G68 command block.
5074 ADDRESS DUPLICATION ERROR The same address has been specified two or more times in a single
block. Alternatively, two or more G codes in the same group have been
specified in a single block.
347
A. ALARM LIST APPENDIX B–62705EN/03
NOTE
Alarm in background edit is displayed in the key input line of the background edit screen instead
om
of the ordinary alarm screen and is resettable by any of the MDI key operation.
r.c
301 APC alarm: nth–axis communication nth–axis (n=1 – 4) APC communication error. Failure in data transmis-
sion
Possible causes include a faulty APC, cable, or servo interface module.
302 APC alarm: nth–axis over time nth–axis (n=1 – 4) APC overtime error.
Failure in data transmission.
e
Possible causes include a faulty APC, cable, or servo interface module.
303 APC alarm: nth–axis framing nth–axis (n=1 – 4) APC framing error. Failure in data transmission.
IMPOSSIBL ing the motor through one or more turns. Rotate the motor through one
or more turns, turn off the power then on again, then perform reference
position return.
w
w
348
B–62705EN/03 APPENDIX A. ALARM LIST
om
D The details of serial The details of serial pulse coder alarm No. 350 (pulse coder alarm) are
pulse coder alarm displayed in the diagnosis display (No. 202) as shown below.
No.350
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
202 CSA BLA PHA RCA BZA CKA SPH
r.c
CSA : The serial pulse coder is defective. Replace it.
BLA : The battery voltage is low. Replace the batteries. This alarm has nothing
to do with alarm No. 350 (serial pulse coder alarm).
e
PHA : The serial pulse coder or feedback cable is defective. replace the serial
pulse coder or cable.
nt
RCA : The serial pulse coder is defective. Replace it.
BZA : The pulse coder was supplied with power for the first time.
ce
Make sure that the batteries are connected.
Turn the power off, then turn it on again and perform a reference position
return. This alarm has nothing to do with alarm No. 350 (serial pulse coder
alarm).
nc
D The details of serial The details of serial pulse coder alarm No. 351 (communication alarm)
pulse coder alarm are displayed in the diagnosis display (No. 203) as shown below.
No.351
w
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
203 DTE CRC SRB PRM
w
349
A. ALARM LIST APPENDIX B–62705EN/03
om
RETURN FAULT) reference position return, there is the possibility that reference position
return could not be executed correctly. Try again from the manual refer-
ence position return.
407 SERVO ALARM: EXCESS ERROR The difference in synchronous axis position deviation exceeded the set
value.
409 TORQUEALM’ : EXCESS ERROR An abnormal load on the servo motor was detected. Alternatively, an
r.c
abnormal load on the spindle motor was detected in Cs mode.
410 SERVO ALARM: n–TH AXIS – The position deviation value when the n–th axis (axis 1–4) stops is
EXCESS ERROR larger than the set value.
Note) Limit value must be set to parameter No.1829 for each axis.
e
411 SERVO ALARM: n–TH AXIS – The position deviation value when the n–th axis (axis 1–4) moves is
EXCESS ERROR larger than the set value.
Note) Limit value must be set to parameter No.1828 for each axis.
413 SERVO ALARM: n–th AXIS – LSI
OVERFLOW
nt The contents of the error register for the n–th axis (axis 1–4) are beyond
the range of –231 to 231. This error usually occurs as the result of an
improperly set parameters.
414 SERVO ALARM: n–TH AXIS – N–th axis (axis 1–4) digital servo system fault. Refer to diagnosis dis-
ce
DETECTION RELATED ERROR play No. 200, 201, and No.204 for details.
415 SERVO ALARM: n–TH AXIS – A speed higher than 511875 units/s was attempted to be set in the n–th
EXCESS SHIFT axis (axis 1–4). This error occurs as the result of improperly set CMR.
416 SERVO ALARM: n–TH AXIS – Position detection system fault in the n–th axis (axis 1–4) pulse coder
nc
DISCONNECTION (disconnection alarm). Refer to diagnosis display No. 200, 201 for
details.
417 SERVO ALARM: n–TH AXIS – This alarm occurs when the n–th axis (axis 1–4) is in one of the
PARAMETER INCORRECT conditions listed below. (Digital servo system alarm)
1) The value set in Parameter No. 2020 (motor form) is out of the speci-
.c
fied limit.
2) A proper value (111 or –111) is not set in parameter No.2022 (motor
revolution direction).
w
3) Illegal data (a value below 0, etc.) was set in parameter No. 2023
(number of speed feedback pulses per motor revolution).
4) Illegal data (a value below 0, etc.) was set in parameter No. 2024
w
350
B–62705EN/03 APPENDIX A. ALARM LIST
om
D Details of servo The details of servo alarm No. 414 are displayed in the diagnosis display
alarm No.414 (No. 200 and No.204) as shown below.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
200 OVL LV OVC HCA HVA DCA FBA OFA
r.c
(This bit causes servo alarm No. 400. The details are indicated in
diagnostic data No.201).
LV : A low voltage alarm is being generated in servo amp.
Check LED.
e
OVC : A overcurrent alarm is being generated inside of digital servo.
nt
HCA : An abnormal current alarm is being generated in servo amp.
Check LED.
HVA : An overvoltage alarm is being generated in servo amp.
ce
Check LED.
DCA : A regenerative discharge circuit alarm is being generated in servo amp.
Check LED.
FBA : A disconnection alarm is being generated.
nc
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
201 ALD EXP
w
1 : Amplifier overheating
When FBAL equal 1 in diagnostic data No.200
w
351
A. ALARM LIST APPENDIX B–62705EN/03
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
204 OFS MCC LDA PMS
om
(6) Over travel alarms
Number Message Contents
500 OVER TRAVEL : +n Exceeded the n–th axis + side stored stroke limit I.
(Parameter No.1320 or 1326 NOTE)
501 OVER TRAVEL : –n Exceeded the n–th axis – side stored stroke limit I.
r.c
(Parameter No.1321 or 1327 NOTE)
502 OVER TRAVEL : +n Exceeded the n–th axis + side stored stroke limit II.
(Parameter No.1322 )
503 OVER TRAVEL : –n Exceeded the n–th axis – side stored stroke limit II.
e
(Parameter No.1323)
504 OVER TRAVEL : +n Exceeded the n–th axis + side stored stroke limit III.
(Parameter No.1324 )
505
506
OVER TRAVEL : –n
OVER TRAVEL : +n
nt Exceeded the n–th axis – side stored stroke limit III.
(Parameter No.1325 )
Exceeded the n–th axis + side hardware OT.
ce
507 OVER TRAVEL : –n Exceeded the n–th axis – side hardware OT.
NOTE
Parameters 1326 and 1327 are effective when EXLM(stroke limit switch signal) is on.
nc
701 OVERHEAT: FAN MOTOR The fan motor on the top of the cabinet for the contorl unit is overheated.
Check the operation of the fan motor and replace the motor if necessary.
704 OVERHEAT: SPINDLE Spindle overheat in the spindle fluctuation detection
w
352
B–62705EN/03 APPENDIX A. ALARM LIST
om
supply also turn off the power supply in spindle side.
750 SPINDLE SERIAL LINK START This alarm is generated when the spindle control unit is not ready for
FAULT starting correctly when the power is turned on in the system with the
serial spindle.
The four reasons can be considered as follows:
1) An improperly connected optic cable, or the spindle control unit’s
power is OFF.
r.c
2) When the NC power was turned on under alarm conditions other
than SU–01 or AL–24 which are shown on the LED display of the
spindle control unit.
In this case, turn the spindle amplifier power off once and perform
startup again.
e
3) Other reasons (improper combination of hardware)
This alarm does not occur after the system including the spindle con-
trol unit is activated.
752 FIRST SPINDLE MODE CHANGE This alarm is generated if the system does not properly terminate a
FAULT mode change. The modes include the Cs contouring, spindle position-
ing, rigid tapping, and spindle control modes. The alarm is activated if
the spindle control unit does not respond correctly to the mode change
command issued by the NC.
.c
754 SPINDLE–1 ABNORMAL TORQUE Abnormal first spindle motor load has been detected.
ALM
761 SECOND SPINDLE ALARM Refer to alarm No.751. (For 2nd axis)
w
DETECTION (AL–XX)
762 SECOND SPINDLE MODE Refer to alarm No.752.(For 2nd axis)
CHANGE FAULT
w
764 SPINDLE–2 ABNORMAL TORQUE Same as alarm No.754 (for the second spindle)
ALM
w
353
A. ALARM LIST APPENDIX B–62705EN/03
D The details of spindle The details of spindle alarm No. 750 are displayed in the diagnosis display
alarm No.750 (No. 409) as shown below.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
409 SPE S2E S1E SHE
om
1 : The first spindle was detected to have a fault during the spindle axis
serial control startup.
#2 (S2E) 0 : The second spindle is normal during the spindle serial control startup.
1 : The second spindle was detected to have a fault during the spindle
serial control startup.
r.c
#3 (SPE) 0 : In the spindle serial control, the serial spindle parameters fulfill the
spindle unit startup conditions.
1 : In the spindle serial control, the serial spindle parameters do not fulfill
e
the spindle unit startup conditions.
nt
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w
354
B–62705EN/03 APPENDIX A. ALARM LIST
(10) System alarms (These alarms cannot be reset with reset key.)
Number Message Contents
900 ROM PARITY F–ROM parity error in a ROM file (control software), such as CNC,
macro, or digital servo. The F–ROM module may be defective.
910 DRAM PARITY : (Low) For an SRAM parity error, initialize the memory. If the error subse-
911 DRAM PARITY: (High) quently
l recurs, or iin the
h case off a DRAM parity
i error, replace
l the
h
RAM module
module.
912 SRAM PARITY: (Low) q y set the parameters and all other data again.
Subsequently, g
913 SRAM PARITY : (High)
920 SERVO ALARM (1/2 AXIS) Servo alarm (1st or 2nd axis). A watchdog alarm or a RAM parity
om
error in the servo module occurred.
Replace the servo control module on the main CPU board.
921 SERVO ALARM (3/4 AXIS) Servo alarm (3rd or 4th axis). A watchdog alarm or a RAM parity
error in the servo module occurred.
Replace the servo control module on the main CPU board.
924 SERVO MODULE SETTING The digital servo module is not installed.
r.c
ERROR Check that the servo control module or servo interface module on
the main board is mounted securely.
930 CPU INTERRUPUT CPU error (abnormal interrupt)
The main board is faulty.
940 PCB ERROR PCB ID error. The main board or the memory module may be
e
defective.
950 PMC SYSTEM ALARM Fault occurred in the PMC. The PMC control module on the main
board or the RAM module may be defective.
971 NMI OCCURRED IN SLC
nt An alarm condition occurred in the interface with an I/O unit.
Check the connection between the PMC control module on the main
board and the I/O Unit. Also, check that the power of the I/O Unit is
ce
on and that the interface module is operating normally.
972 NMI OCCURRED IN OTHER NMI occurred in a board other than the main board.
MODULE The main board or the back panel may be defective.
973 NON MASK INTERRUPT NMI occurred for an unknown reason.
The printed board of the power unit or the main board may be defec-
nc
355
A. ALARM LIST APPENDIX B–62705EN/03
A.2
LIST OF ALARMS
(PMC)
(1) Alarm messages (PMC)
Message Contents and solution
ALARM NOTHING Normal status
ER01 PROGRAM DATA The sequence program in the debugging RAM is defective.
ERROR(RAM) (solution) Please clear the debugging RAM and input LADDER again.
The debugging RAM is not installed though the RAM is selected.
om
(solution) Please install the debugging RAM or install ROM for sequence program
and select ROM with K17#3=0.
ER02 PROGRAM SIZE OVER The size of sequence program exceeds the maximum size of LADDER(PMC–RC
only).
(solution) Please change MAX LADDER AREA SIZE at the SYSPRM screen and
restart the system.
r.c
ER03 PROGRAM SIZE The size of sequence program exceeds the option specification size.
ERROR(OPTION) (solution) Please increase the option specification size.
Or, reduce the size of sequence program.
ER04 PMC TYPE UNMATCH The PMC model setting of the sequence program is not corresponding to an actual
model.
e
(solution) Please change the PMC model setting by the offline programmer.
ER05 PMC MODULE TYPE The module type of the PMC engine is not correct.
ERROR
ER07 NO OPTION
(LADDER STEP)
nt
(solution) Please exchange the module of PMC engine for a correct one.
There is no step number option of LADDER.
ce
ER10 OPTION AREA NOTHING The management software for the PMC–RB has not been transferred.
(series name) (solution) The software installation is not consistent with the order. Contact FANUC.
ER11 OPTION AREA NOTHING The management software for the PMC C board has not been transferred.
(series name) (solution) The software installation is not consistent with the order. Contact FANUC.
ER12 OPTION AREA ERROR The series of the management software for the PMC–RB differs between BASIC and
nc
ER14 OPTION AREA VERSIION The edition of the management software for the PMC–RB differs between BASIC
ERROR (series name) and OPTION.
(solution) Contact FANUC.
w
ER15 OPTION AREA VERSIION The edition of the management software for the PMC C board differs between BASIC
ERROR (series name) and OPTION.
(solution) Contact FANUC.
w
356
B–62705EN/03 APPENDIX A. ALARM LIST
om
POWER (solution) Please restart the system to make the change effective.
ER25 SOFTWARE VERSION The PMC–RB management software editions are inconsistent.
ERROR (PMCAOPT) (solution) Contact FANUC.
ER26 SOFTWARE VERSION The PMC–RB management software cannot be initialized.
ERROR (PMCAOPT) (solution) Contact FANUC.
ER32 NO I/O DEVICE Any DI/DO unit of I/O Unit or the connection unit etc. is not connected. When built–in
r.c
I/O card is connected, this message is not displayed.
(solution) When built–in I/O card is used:
Please confirm whether the built–in I/O card is certainly connected with.
When I/O Link is used:
Please confirm whether the DI/DO units turning on. Or please confirm
the connection of the cable.
e
ER33 SLC ERROR The LSI for I/O Link is defective.
(solution) Please exchange the module of PMC engine.
ER34 SLC ERROR(xx) nt
The communication with the DI/DO units of the xx group failed.
(solution) Please confirm the connection of the cable connected to the DI/DO
units of the xx group.
Please confirm whether the DI/DO units turned on earlier than CNC and
ce
PMC. Or, please exchange the module of PMC engine on the DI/DO
units of the xx group
ER35 TOO MUCH OUTPUT The number of the output data in the xx group exceeded the max. The data, which
DATA IN GROUP(xx) exceed 32 bytes, become ineffective.
(solution) Please refer to the following for the number of the data for each group.
nc
(solution) Please refer to the following for the number of the data for each group.
“FANUC I/O Unit to MODEL A Connection and Maintenance Manual”
(B–61813E)
“FANUC I/O Unit to MODEL B Connection Manual”(B–62163E)
w
ER38 MAX SETTING OUTPUT The assignment data for a group exceeds 128 bytes.
DATA OVER(xx) (The assignment data of output side of xx group or later become ineffective.)
(solution) Please reduce the assignment data to 128 bytes or less for the number
w
(Solution) Please reduce the assignment data to 128 bytes or less for the number
of the input data of each goup.
357
A. ALARM LIST APPENDIX B–62705EN/03
om
CONVERSION (solution) Correct the ladder type.
WN06 TASK STOPPED BY Some user tasks are stopped by break point of the debugging function.
DEBUG FUNC
WN07 LADDER SP ERROR When functional instruction CALL(SUB65) or CALLU(SUB66) was executed, the stack
(STACK) of the LADDER overflowed.
(solution) Please reduce the nesting of the subprogram to 8 or less.
r.c
(2) Alarm messages (For EDIT 1)
Message Contents and solution
ADDRESS BIT NOTHING The address of the relay/coil is not set.
e
FUNCTION NOT FOUND There is no functional instruction of the input number.
COM FUNCTION MISSING The funcitonal instruction COM (SUB29) is not correctly dealt with.
ILLEGAL FUNCTION NO. The wrong number of the functional instruction is searched.
FUNCTION LINE ILLEGAL The functional instruction is not correctly connected.
HORIZONTAL LINE ILLEGAL The horizontal line of the net is not connected.
.c
ILLEGAL NETS CLEARED Because the power had been turn off while editing LADDER, some net under editing
was cleared.
ILLEGAL OPERATION Operation is not correct.
The value is not specified and only INPUT key was pushed.
w
358
B–62705EN/03 APPENDIX A. ALARM LIST
om
RELAY COIL FORBIT There is an unnecessary relay or coil.
RELAY OR COIL NOTHING The relay or the coil does not suffice.
PLEASE CLEAR ALL It is impossible to recover the sequence program.
(solution) Please clear the all data.
SYMBOL DATA DUPLICATE The same symbol name is defined in other place.
r.c
COMMENT DATA OVERFLOW The comment data area was filled.
(solution) Please reduce the number of the commnet.
SYMBOL DATA OVERFLOW The symbol data area was filled.
(solution) Please reduce the number of the symbol.
e
VERTICAL LINE ILLEGAL There is an incorrect vertical line of the net.
MESSAGE DATA OVERFLOW The message data area was filled.
(solution) Please reduce the number of the message.
1ST LEVEL EXECUTE TIME
OVER
nt
The 1st level of LADDER is too large to complete execution in time.
(solution) Please reduce the 1st level of LADDER.
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w
359
A. ALARM LIST APPENDIX B–62705EN/03
om
nn= 20 The state of the interface is not correct.
(solution) Please confirm the connection of the cable. Please confirm
setting the baud rate etc.
22 Opponent side is not ready to receive.
(solution) Please confirm the power supply on the opponent side.
Or, please initialize the interface.
I/O READ ERROR nn An input error occurred in the reader/puncher interface.
r.c
nn= 20 The state of the interface is not correct.
(solution) Please confirm the connection of the cable. Please confirm
setting the baud rate etc.
21 The data is not sent from the opponent side.
(solution) Please confirm the power supply on the opponent side.
e
Please initialize the opponent side.
I/O LIST ERROR nn An error occurred in directory read processing from FD Cassette.
nn= 20 The state of the interface is not correct.
360
B–62705EN/03 APPENDIX A. ALARM LIST
A.3
SPINDLE ALARMS NOTE
(SERIAL SPINDLE) Er–xx is not displayed on the screen.
om
attention to the setting of use/not use spindle parameter
MRDY.
Er–02 If spindle motor is not integrated with spindle in system Set the spindle motor speed detector parameter to
with high–resolution magnetic pulse coder, speed detec- 128 p/rev.
tor of spindle motor is set to 128 p/rev.
Attempt to excite motor fails if value other than 128 p/rev
is set.
r.c
Er–03 Parameter for high–resolution magnetic pulse coder is Check parameter setting for high–resolution mag-
not set, but Cs contouring control command is entered. netic pulse coder.
In this case, motor is not excited.
Er–04 Although parameter setting for using position coder was Confirm the parameter setting of the position coder.
e
not performed, commands for servo mode and synchro-
nous control are input.
In this case, the motor will not be excited.
Er–05
Er–06
nt
Although option parameter for orientation is not set, the Confirm the parameter setting of orientation.
orientation command (ORCM) is input.
Although option parameter for output switchover is not Confirm the parameter setting for output switching
set, LOW winding is selected. and power line status signal.
ce
Er–07 Although Cs contouring control command was entered, Confirm the sequence.
SFR/SRV is not entered.
Er–08 Although servo mode control command was input, SFR/ Confirm the sequence.
SRV is not input.
nc
Er–09 Although synchronous control command was input, Confirm the sequence.
SFR/SRV is not input.
Er–10 Cs control command was entered, but another mode Never set another mode when Cs contouring con-
(servo mode, synchronous control, orientation) is speci- trol command is being processed. Before chang-
fied. ing to another mode, clear Cs contouring contorl
.c
command.
Er–11 Servo mode command was entered, but another mode Do not command other modes during servo mode
(Cs contouring control, synchronous control, orienta- command. When moving to other modes, perform
w
361
A. ALARM LIST APPENDIX B–62705EN/03
om
Er–22 The position control command (servo mode, orienta- Enter the position control command in the normal
tion,etc.) was entered in the slave operation mode operation mode.
(SLV=1).
Er–23 A slave mode command was entered when the slave Enable the slave mode.
mode is disabled.
Er–24 To perform continuous indexing in the mode for orienting Check the control input signal (INCMD). To
r.c
the position coder system, incremental opera- execute the absolute position command continu-
tion(INCMD=1) was first performed, then the absolute ously, be sure to perform orientation with the abso-
position command (INCMD=0) was entered. lute position command first.
Contact sig- Between ESP1 and ESP2 of spindle control printed cir- Contact is open : emergency stop
nal of *ESP cuit board Contact is closed : general operation
e
Alarms (Serial spindle)
Alarm
No.
Message
nt
Meaning Description Remedy
ce
“A” Program ROM Detects that control program is not Install normal program
display abnormality started (due to program ROM not ROM
(not installed) installed, etc.)
AL–01 SPN_n_ : MOTOR Motor Detects motor speed exceeding Check load status.
nc
AL–03 SPN_n_ : FUSE ON DC DC link sec- Detects that fuse F4 in DC link sec- Check power transistors,
LINK BLOWN tion fuse tion is blown (models 30S and 40S). and so forth.
blown Replace fuse.
w
AL–04 SPN_n_ : INPUT FUSE/ Input fuse Detects blown fuse (F1 to F3), open Replace fuse.
POWER blown. phase or momentary failure of power Check open phase and
FAULT Input power (models 30S and 40S). power supply regenerative
open phase. circuit operation.
w
AL–05 SPN_n_ : POWER Control power Detects that control power supply Check for control power
SUPPLY FUSE supply fuse fuse AF2 or AF3 is blown (models supply short circuit .
BLOWN blown 30S and 40S). Replace fuse.
w
AL–07 SPN_n_ : OVERSPEED Excessive Detects that motor rotation has ex- Reset alarm.
speed ceeded 115% of its rated speed.
AL–08 SPN_n_ : HIGH VOLT High input volt- Detects that switch is flipped to 200 Flip switch to 230 VAC.
INPUT age VAC when input voltage is 230 VAC
POWER or higher (models 30S and 40S).
AL–09 SPN_n_ : OVERHEAT Excessive Detects abnormal temperature rise Cool radiator then reset
MAIN CIRCUIT load on main of power transistor radiator. alarm.
circuit section
AL–10 SPN_n_ : LOW VOLT Low input volt- Detects drop in input power supply Remove cause, then reset
INPUT age voltage. alarm.
POWER
362
B–62705EN/03 APPENDIX A. ALARM LIST
Alarm
Message Meaning Description Remedy
No.
AL–11 SPN_n_ : OVERVOLT Overvoltage in Detects abnormally high direct cur- Remove cause, then reset
POW CIRCUIT DC link sec- rent power supply voltage in power alarm.
tion circuit section.
AL–12 SPN_n_ : OVERCURRE Overcurrent in Detects flow of abnormally large cur- Remove cause, then reset
NT POW DC link sec- rent in direct current section of power alarm.
CIRCUIT tion cirtcuit
AL–13 SPN_n_ : DATA CPU internal Detects abnormality in CPU internal Remove cause, then reset
MEMORY data memory data memory. This check is made alarm.
FAULT CPU abnormality only when power is turned on.
om
AL–15 SPN_n_ : SP SWITCH Spindle Detects incorrect switch sequence in Check sequence.
CONTROL switch/output spindle switch/output switch opera-
ALARM switch alarm tion.
AL–16 SPN_n_ : RAM FAULT RAM ab- Detects abnormality in RAM for ex- Remove cause, then reset
normality ternal data. This check is made only alarm.
when power is turned on.
AL–18 SPN_n_ : SUMCHECK Program ROM Detects program ROM data er- Remove cause, then reset
r.c
ERROR PGM sum check er- ror.This check is made only when alarm.
DATA ror power is turned on.
AL–19 SPN_n_ : EX OFFSET Excessive U Detects excessive U phase current Remove cause, then reset
CURRENT U phase current detection ciucuit offset. alarm.
detection cir- This check is made only when power
e
cuit offset is turned on.
AL–20 SPN_n_ : EX OFFSET Excessive V Detects excessive V phase current Remove cause, then reset
AL–24
CURRENT V
SPN_n_ : SERIAL
nt
phase current
detection cir-
cuit offset
Serial transfer
detection circuit offset.
This check is made only when power
is turned on.
alarm.
AL–26 SPN_n_ : DISCONNECT Disconnection Detects abnormality in position cod- Remove cause, then reset
C–VELO of speed er signal(such as unconnected cable alarm.
DETECT detection sig- and parameter setting error).
nal for Cs con-
touring control
.c
AL–27 SPN_n_ : DISCONNECT Position coder Detects abnormality in position cod- Remove cause, then reset
POS–CODER signal discon- er signal (such as unconnected alarm.
nection cable and adjustment error).
AL–28 SPN_n_ : DISCONNECT Disconnection Detects abnormality in position Remove cause, then reset
w
touring control
AL–29 SPN_n_ : SHORTTIME Short–time Detects that overload has been con- Remove cause, then reset
OVERLOAD overload tinuously applied for some period of alarm.
time (such as restraining motor shaft
w
in positioning).
AL–30 SPN_n_ : OVERCURRE Input circuit Detects overcurrent flowing in input Remove cause, then reset
NT POW overcurrent circuit. alarm.
CIRCUIT
AL–31 SPN_n_ : MOTOR LOCK Speed detec- Detects that motor cannot rotate at Remove cause, then reset
OR V–SIG LOS tion signal dis- specified speed or it is detected that alarm.
connection the motor is clamped. (but rotates at
motor restraint very slow speed or has stopped).
alarm or motor (This includes checking of speed
is clamped. detection signal cable.)
363
A. ALARM LIST APPENDIX B–62705EN/03
Alarm
Message Meaning Description Remedy
No.
AL–32 SPN_n_ : RAM FAULT Abnormality in Detects abnormality in RAM inside Remove cause, then reset
SERIAL LSI RAM inside the LSI used for serial data transfer. alarm.
the LSI used This check is made only when power
for serial data is turned on.
transfer. This
check is made
only when
power is
turned on.
AL–33 SPN_n_ : SHORTAGE Insufficient DC Detects insufficient charging of direct Remove cause, then reset
om
POWER link section current power supply voltage in pow- alarm.
CHARGE charging er circuit section when magnetic
contactor in amplifier is turned on
(such as open phase and defectifve
charging resistor).
AL–34 SPN_n_ : PARAMETER Parameter Detects parameter data set beyond Set correct data.
SETTING data setting allowable range of values.
r.c
ERROR beyond allow-
able range of
values
AL–35 SPN_n_ : EX SETTING Excessive Detects gear ratio data set beyond Set correct data.
GEAR RATIO gear ratio data allowable range of values.
setting
e
AL–36 SPN_n_ : OVERFLOW Error counter Detects error counter overflow. Correct cause, then reset
ERROR overflow alarm.
AL–37
COUNTER
SPN_n_ : SPEED
DETECT PAR.
ERROR
nt
Speed detec-
tor parameter
setting error
Detects incorrect setting of parame- Set correct data.
ter for number of speed detection
pulses.
ce
AL–39 SPN_n_ : 1–ROT Cs Alarm for indi- Detects 1–rotaion signal detection Make 1–rotaion signal ad-
SIGNAL cating failure failure in Cs contouring contorl. justment.
ERROR in detecting Check cable shield status.
1–rotation sig-
nal for Cs con-
nc
touring control
AL–40 SPN_n_ : NO 1–ROT Cs Alarm for indi- Detects that 1–rotation signal has Make 1–rotaion signal ad-
SIGNAL cating 1–rota- not occurred in Cs contouring con- justment.
DETECT tion signal for trol.
Cs contouring
.c
AL–42 SPN_n_ : NO 1–ROT. Alarm for indi- Detects that position coder 1–rota- Make 1–rotation signal ad-
POS–CODER cating position tion signal has not issued. justment for signal conver-
DETECT coder 1–rota- sion circuit.
w
364
B–62705EN/03 APPENDIX A. ALARM LIST
Alarm
Message Meaning Description Remedy
No.
AL–46 SPN_n_ : SCREW Alarm for indi- Detects failure in detecting position Make 1–rotation signal ad-
1–ROT cating failure coder 1–rotation signasl in thread justment for signal conver-
POS–COD. in detecting cutting operation. sion circuit.
ALARM position coder Check cable shield status.
1–rotation sig-
nal in thread
cutting opera-
tion.
AL–47 SPN_n_ : POS–CODER Position coder Detects incorrect position coder sig- Make signal adjustment for
SIGNAL signal ab- nal count operation. signal conversion circuit.
om
ABNORMAL normality Check cable shield status.
AL–49 SPN_n_ : HIGH CONV. The converted Detects that speed of other spindle Calculate differential
DIF. SPEED differential converted to speed of local spindle speed by multiplying speed
speed is too has exceeded allowable limit in dif- of other spindle by gear ra-
high. ferential mode. tio. Check if calculated val-
ue is not greater than maxi-
mum speed of motor.
r.c
AL–50 SPN_n_ : SPNDL Excessive Detects that speed command cal- Calculate motor speed by
CONTROL speed com- culation value exceeded allowable multiplying specified
OVERSPEED mand calcula- range in spindle synchronization spindle speed by gear ra-
tion value in control. tio. Check if calculated
spindle syn- value is not greater than
chronization maximum speed of motor.
e
control
AL–51 SPN_n_ : LOW VOLT DC Undervoltage Detects that DC power supply volt- Remove cause, then reset
LINK
tion
nt
at DC link sec- age of power circuit has dropped alarm.
(due to momentary power failure or
loose contact of magnetic contac-
tor).
ce
AL–52 SPN_n_ : ITP SIGNAL ITP signal ab- Detects abnormality in synchroniza- Replace servo amp. PCB.
ABNORMAL I normality I tion signal (ITP signal ) used in soft-
ware.
AL–53 SPN_n_ : ITP SIGNAL ITP signal ab- Detects abnormality in synchroniza- Replace servo amp. PCB.
ABNORMAL II normality II tion signal (ITP signal) used in hard-
nc
ware.
AL–56 SPN_n_ : INNER The cooling The cooling fan in the control circuit Check the turning state of
COOLING FAN fan in the unit section stopped. the cooling fan. Replace
STOP stopped. the cooling fan.
AL–57 SPN_n_ : EX DECEL- Deceleration Abnormal current flowed through the Check the selection of the
.c
AL–58 SPN_n_ : OVERLOAD IN Overload on The temperature of the radiator of the Eliminate the cause, then
PSM the PSM main main circuit has increased abnor- reset the alarm.
circuit mally. (Cooling fan failure, dirt in the
w
365
B. LIST OF MAINTENANCE PARTS APPENDIX B–62705EN/03
B
om
Fan motor A90L–0001–0423#105 For intelligent terminal type 2
A98L–0031–0006 For CNC memory
A98L–0001–0902 For α series absolute pulse coder
Battery for Back–up
Back up
A98L–0031–0017 For intelligent terminal type 2
A02B–0200–K102 For new MMC–IV or intelligent terminal type 2
r.c
A60L–0001–0046#7.5R For control unit power supply 7.5A
Power supply fuse A13B–0172–K020 Intelligent terminal type or intelligent terminal type 2
A02B–0207–K100 For new MMC–IV
Back light for 7.2” monochrome LCD A61L–0001–0142#BL
e
Back light for intelligent terminal type 2 LCD A61L–0001–0163#BL
A98L–0001–0985#A For T series small MDI (English key)
(Specification : A02B–0210–C041#TA, –C120#TA)
nt
A98L–0001–0985#S
A98L–0001–0986#A
For T series small MDI (Symbolic key)
(Specification : A02B–0210–C041#TAS, –C120#TAS)
For T series full–size MDI (English key)
(Specification : A02B–0210–C122#TA
ce
A98L–0001–0986#S For T series full–size MDI (Symbolic key)
(Specification : A02B–0210–C122#TAS
A98L–0005–0052#A For T series full–size MDI (English key)
(Specification : A02B–0218–C120#TR, –C121#TR)
nc
366
B–62705EN/03 APPENDIX B. LIST OF MAINTENANCE PARTS
om
A86L–0001–0174#HT2S For T series horizontal type 14” color CRT/MDI (Symbolic key)
(Specification : A02B–0200–C071#TBS)
A86L–0001–0175#VT2R For T series vertical type 14” color CRT/MDI (English key)
(Specification : A02B–0200–C072#TBR)
A86L–0001–0175#VT2S For T series vertical type 14” color CRT/MDI (Symbolic key)
(Specification : A02B–0200–C072#TBS)
r.c
Keyboard (membrane)
A86L–0001–0173#HM2R For M series horizontal type 9.5” color TFT/MDI (English key)
(Specification : A02B–0200–C065#MBR)
A86L–0001–0173#HM2S For M series horizontal type 9.5” color TFT/MDI (Symbolic key)
(Specification : A02B–0200–C065#MBS)
A86L–0001–0175#VM2R For M series vertical type 9.5” color TFT/MDI (English key)
e
(Specification : A02B–0200–C066#MBR)
A86L–0001–0175#VM2S For M series vertical type 9.5” color TFT/MDI (Symbolic key)
nt
A86L–0001–0174#HM2R
A86L–0001–0174#HM2S
(Specification : A02B–0200–C066#MBS)
For M series horizontal type 14” color CRT/MDI (English key)
(Specification : A02B–0200–C071#MBR)
For M series horizontal type 14” color CRT/MDI (Symbolic key)
ce
(Specification : A02B–0200–C071#MBS)
A86L–0001–0175#VM2R For M series vertical type 14” color CRT/MDI (English key)
(Specification : A02B–0200–C072#MBR)
A86L–0001–0175#VM2S For M series vertical type 14” color CRT/MDI (Symbolic key)
(Specification : A02B–0200–C072#MBS)
nc
.c
w
w
w
367
C. BOOT SYSTEM APPENDIX B–62705EN/03
C BOOT SYSTEM
om
e r.c
nt
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w
368
B–62705EN/03 APPENDIX C. BOOT SYSTEM
C.1 The boot system load the CNC system software (flash ROM→DRAM),
then starts it so that software can be executed.
OVERVIEW The boot system provides the following maintenance functions for the
CNC:
(1) Registering a file in flash ROM
S Reads a file from a memory card, in FAT format, into flash ROM.
(2) Checking a file (series and edition) in flash ROM
(3) Deleting a file from flash ROM
(4) Batch saving and restoration of files of parameters and programs
om
backed up by battery (SRAM area), to and from a memory card
(5) Saving a file in flash ROM to a memory card
(6) Formatting of a memory card
(7) Deleting a file from a memory card
This appendix describes the activation of the boot system, as well as
r.c
the screen displays and operation for the functions listed above.
NOTE
This control unit supports the use of a memory card as an
e
input/output device. When a flash card is used, however,
data can be written to a FANUC–recommended card only.
nt
Data can be read in the same way as with an ordinary SRAM
card, provided the data has been saved in FAT format. Note
that, when a flash card is used, the card capacity is reduced
by 128KB.
ce
See the order list for details of the supported memory card
types.
nc
.c
w
w
w
369
C. BOOT SYSTEM APPENDIX B–62705EN/03
C.2
STARTING AND
EXITING FROM THE
SYSTEM MONITOR
om
appears. Keep the soft keys held down until this main menu appears.
r.c
2.SYSTEM DATA CHECK
3.SYSTEM DATA DELETE
4.SYSTEM DATA SAVE
5.SRAM DATA BACKUP
CRT 6.MEMORY CARD FILE DELETE
e
7.MEMORY CARD FORMAT
9.END
⇑ Ă⇑
nt *** MESSAGE ***
SELECT MENU AND HIT SELECT KEY.
ce
[SELECT] [ YES ] [ NO ] [ UP ] [ DOWN ]
Turn on the power while hold-
ing down these two soft keys. <Main menu>
nc
function.
Item Function See
Section
w
1 SYSTEM DATA LOADING Loading a file from a memory card into C.3.1
flash memory
2 SYSTEM DATA CHECK Listing the names of the files stored in C.3.2
w
flash memory
3 SYSTEM DATA DELETE Deleting a file from flash memory C.3.3
4 SYSTEM DATA SAVE Outputting a file, stored in flash C.3.4
w
(3) Refer to the section listed in the table for details of each function.
370
B–62705EN/03 APPENDIX C. BOOT SYSTEM
C.2.2 Exit from the system monitor and activate the CNC, as follows:
Exiting from the (1) Position the cursor to 9. END on the main menu by using the [UP]
System Monitor or [DOWN] soft key, then press the [SELECT] soft key.
(Activating the CNC)
SYSTEM MONITOR MAIN MENU 01
om
4.SYSTEM DATA SAVE
5.SRAM DATA BACKUP
6.MEMORY CARD FILE DELETE
7.MEMORY CARD FORMAT
9.END
r.c
*** MESSAGE ***
SELECT MENU AND HIT SELECT KEY.
e
(2) The system monitor displays message “ARE YOU SURE ? HIT YES
OR NO.” If your selection is as you intended, press the [YES] soft key.
ntPressing the [NO] soft key returns the processing to step (1).
*** MESSAGE ***
ce
ARE YOU SURE ? HIT YES OR NO.
When the [YES] soft key is pressed, the system software for the
nc
371
C. BOOT SYSTEM APPENDIX B–62705EN/03
C.3
SYSTEM MONITOR
FUNCTIONS
C.3.1 <Function>
Loading a File from a A file such as a PMC sequence (ladder) program or P–CODE macro
Memory Card into program can be loaded from a memory card into flash memory.
Flash Memory
om
<Procedure>
(SYSTEM DATA (1) Display the SYSTEM DATA LOADING screen.
LOADING Screen) Position the cursor to 1. SYSTEM DATA LOADING on the main
menu by using the [UP] or [DOWN] soft key, then press the
[SELECT] soft key.
r.c
The SYSTEM DATA LOADING screen appears, listing the names
of all the files stored in the memory card.
e
SYSTEM DATA LOADING 1/1 Page number/ total number of
pages
FILE DIRECTORY
MACRO31. MEM
MACRO12. MEM
MACRO13. MEM
nt Lists the names of the files in the
ce
MACRO14. MEM memory card.
LADDER. MEM
END
nc
Position the cursor to the name of the file to be loaded by using the
[UP] or [DOWN] soft key, then press the [SELECT] soft key.
w
NOTE
1 Up to eight file names can be displayed on a single screen.
If the memory card contains nine or more files, the files are
listed using two or more screens. Pressing the right–most
soft key displays the next screen. Pressing the left–most
soft key displays the previous screen. In such a case, menu
item END is displayed for the last screen.
2 To return to the main menu, position the cursor to END then
press the [SELECT] soft key.
372
B–62705EN/03 APPENDIX C. BOOT SYSTEM
To load the file, press the [YES] soft key. Pressing the [NO] soft key
cancels loading and returns the processing to step (2).
Pressing the [YES] soft key starts loading of the file from the
memory card into flash memory.
om
*** MESSAGE ***
LOADING FROM MEMORY CARD.
READ DATA FROM MEMORY CARD.
[ SELECT ][ YES ][ NO ][ UP ][ DOWN ]
r.c
*** MESSAGE ***
LOADING FROM MEMORY CARD.
F–ROM PROGRAM
[ SELECT ][ YES ][ NO ][ UP ][ DOWN ]
e
(4) When loading has been completed normally, the following message
ntappears. Pressing the [SELECT] soft key returns the screen shown
in step (2).
ce
*** MESSAGE ***
LOADING COMPLETE. HIT SELECT KEY.
NOTE
3 If an error occurs during loading, an error message is
displayed. See Section C.4, “Error messages and
corresponding corrective actions” for details.
.c
Once all the necessary files have been loaded, position the cursor to
END by using the [UP] or [DOWN] soft key, then press the
[SELECT] soft key to return to the main menu.
w
373
C. BOOT SYSTEM APPENDIX B–62705EN/03
C.3.2 <Function>
Listing the Names of The names of the files stored in flash memory can be listed on the screen.
the Files Stored in <Procedure>
Flash Memory (1) Display the SYSTEM DATA CHECK screen.
(SYSTEM DATA CHECK Position the cursor to 2. SYSTEM DATA CHECK on the main menu
Screen) by using the [UP] or [DOWN] soft key, then press the [SELECT]
soft key.
The SYSTEM DATA CHECK screen appears, listing the names of
om
all the files in flash memory.
FILE DIRECTORY ( FLASH ROM : 256KB) Lists the names of all the files
1 PMC–RA ( 1) stored in flash memory.
r.c
2 PCD 128K ( 1) The size of of each file is indicated
END in parentheses after the file name
(in units of 128K bytes).
e
*** MESSAGE ***
nt
SELECT END AND HIT SELECT KEY.
ce
[ SELECT ][ YES ][ NO ][ UP ][ DOWN ]
(2) Position the cursor to END by using the [UP] or [DOWN] soft key,
then press the [SELECT] soft key to return to the main menu.
nc
NOTE
The 21–MB and 21–TB (control unit B) holds the software
for controlling the CNC and servo system as well as user
.c
374
B–62705EN/03 APPENDIX C. BOOT SYSTEM
C.3.3 <Function>
Deleting a File from A file can be deleted from flash memory.
Flash Memory <Procedure>
(SYSTEM DATA (1) Display the SYSTEM DATA DELETE screen.
DELETE Screen) Position the cursor to 3. SYSTEM DATA DELETE on the main
menu by using the [UP] or [DOWN] soft key, then press the
[SELECT] soft key.
The SYSTEM DATA DELETE screen appears, listing the names of
all the files stored in flash memory.
om
SYSTEM DATA DELETE
FILE DIRECTORY
1 PMC–RA ( 1) Lists the names of all the files in
r.c
2 PCD 128K ( 1) flash memory.
END
e
*** MESSAGE ***
[ SELECT ][ YES
nt
SELECT FILE AND HIT SELECT KEY.
][ NO ][ UP ][ DOWN ]
ce
(2) Select the file to be deleted.
Position the cursor to the name of the file to be deleted by using the
nc
[UP] or [DOWN] soft key, then press the [SELECT] soft key.
(3) The following message appears:
*** MESSAGE ***
DELETE OK ? HIT YES OR NO.
.c
To delete the file, press the [YES] soft key. To abandon the deletion,
press the [NO] soft key.
(4) Pressing the [YES] soft key starts deletion of the file. The message
w
375
C. BOOT SYSTEM APPENDIX B–62705EN/03
C.3.4 <Function>
Outputting a File, A file stored in flash memory can be output to a memory card.
Stored in Flash <Procedure>
Memory, to a Memory (1) Display the SYSTEM DATA SAVE screen.
Card Position the cursor to 4. SYSTEM DATA SAVE on the main menu
(SYSTEM DATA SAVE by using the [UP] or [DOWN] soft key, then press the [SELECT]
soft key.
Screen)
The SYSTEM DATA SAVE screen appears, listing the names of the
om
files stored in flash memory.
FILE DIRECTORY
1 PMC RA ( 1) Lists the names of all the files
r.c
2 PCD 128K ( 1) stored in flash memory.
END
e
*** MESSAGE ***
[ SELECT ][ YES
nt
SELECT FILE AND HIT SELECT KEY.
][ NO ][ UP ][ DOWN ]
ce
(2) Select the file to be output.
Position the cursor to the name of the file to be output by using the
nc
[UP] or [DOWN] soft key, then press the [SELECT] soft key.
(3) The following message appears. To output the file, press the [YES]
soft key. To cancel output, press the [NO] soft key.
.c
Pressing the [YES] soft key starts output of the file. The following
message is displayed during output. The name of the file (*3) being
w
NOTE
To output a P–CODE macro program for which a password
has been specified, you must enter that password. In such
a case, “INPUT PASSWORD” is displayed. Enter the
password using soft keys [1] to [5].
376
B–62705EN/03 APPENDIX C. BOOT SYSTEM
[ 1 ][ 2 ][ 3 ][ 4 ][ 5 ]
(4) When output has been completed normally, the following message
appears:
*** MESSAGE ***
FILE SAVE COMPELETE. HIT SELECT KEY.
SAVE FILE NAME : PMC RA. 000
om
[ SELECT ][ YES ][ NO ][ UP ][ DOWN ]
(5) Press the [SELECT] key to return to the screen shown in step (2).
(6) To output another file, repeat steps (2) to (5).
Once you have output all the necessary files, position the cursor to
r.c
END by using the [UP] or [DOWN] soft key, then press the
[SELECT] soft key to return to the main menu.
*3 Names of files stored on a memory card
Files output to a memory card are automatically named according
e
to their file type, as follows:
377
C. BOOT SYSTEM APPENDIX B–62705EN/03
C.3.5 <Function>
Backing up SRAM Data All data in SRAM (such as parameters and programs, which are retained
even when power is not applied to the CNC), can be backed up to a
to a Memory Card and memory card as a single backup file. Data can be restored from the backup
Subsequently file to SRAM.
Restoring Data from a
<Procedure>
Memory Card
(SRAM DATA BACKUP (1) Display the SRAM DATA BACKUP screen.
Position the cursor to 5. SRAM DATA BACKUP on the main menu
Screen)
om
by using the [UP] or [DOWN] soft key, then press the [SELECT]
soft key.
The following screen appears:
r.c
1. SRAM BACKUP ( CNC –> MEMORY CARD )
2. RESTORE SRAM ( MEMORY CARD –> CNC )
END
e
FILE NAME :
378
B–62705EN/03 APPENDIX C. BOOT SYSTEM
om
2) Select the file from which data is to be restored by using the [UP]
or [DOWN] soft key, then press the [SELECT] or [YES] soft key.
*** MESSAGE ***
SELECT RESTORE FILE OR UP, DOWN KEY.
r.c
3) The following message appears. Pressing the [YES] soft key
starts restoration.
*** MESSAGE ***
RESTORE SRAM DATA OK ? HIT YES OR NO.
e
[ SELECT ][ YES ][ NO ][ UP ][ DOWN ]
nt The following message is displayed during data restoration.
*** MESSAGE ***
ce
RESTORE SRAM DATA FROM MEMORY CARD.
message appears:
*** MESSAGE ***
RESTORE COMPLETE. HIT SELECT KEY.
.c
379
C. BOOT SYSTEM APPENDIX B–62705EN/03
C.3.6 <Function>
Deleting a File from a A file can be deleted from a memory card.
Memory Card <Procedure>
(MEMORY CARD FILE (1) Display the MEMORY CARD FILE DELETE screen.
DELETE Screen) Position the cursor to 6. MEMORY CARD FILE DELETE on the
main menu by using the [UP] or [DOWN] soft key, then press the
[SELECT] soft key.
The MEMORY CARD FILE DELETE screen appears, listing the
om
names of the files stored on the memory card.
FILE DIRECTORY
MACRO01. MEM Lists the names of the files stored
r.c
MACRO01. MEM on the memory card.
LADDER. MEM
END
e
*** MESSAGE ***
[ SELECT ][ YES
nt
SELECT FILE AND HIT SELECT KEY.
][ NO ][ UP ][ DOWN ]
ce
NOTE
If the memory card contains nine or more files, the files are
nc
To delete the file, press the [YES] soft key. To cancel deletion, press
the [NO] soft key.
(4) Pressing the [YES] soft key starts deletion of the file. When deletion
has been completed normally, the following message appears:
*** MESSAGE ***
DELETE COMPLETE. HIT SELECT KEY.
380
B–62705EN/03 APPENDIX C. BOOT SYSTEM
(5) Press the [SELECT] soft key to return to the screen shown in step
(2).
(6) To delete another file, repeat steps (2) to (5) . Once all deletion has
been completed, position the cursor to END by using the [UP] or
[DOWN] soft key, then press the [SELECT] soft key to return to
the main menu.
C.3.7 <Function>
om
Formatting a Memory A memory card can be initialized to conform to MS–DOS format.
Card Memory cards require formatting before they can be used. SRAM
memory cards also require reformatting when they have lost their data due
to failure of their battery.
<Procedure>
r.c
(1) Position the cursor to 7. MEMORY CARD FORMAT on the main
menu by using the [UP] or [DOWN] soft key, then press the
[SELECT] soft key.
(2) The following message appears. To format the memory card, press
e
the [YES] soft key. To cancel formatting, press the [NO] soft key.
*** MESSAGE ***
nt MEMORY CARD FORMAT OK ? HIT YES OR NO.
message appears:
*** MESSAGE ***
w
(3) Press the [SELECT] soft key to return to the main menu.
w
381
C. BOOT SYSTEM APPENDIX B–62705EN/03
C.4 This section describes the error messages which may be displayed when
the system monitor function is used.
ERROR MESSAGES
AND
CORRESPONDING
CORRECTIVE
ACTIONS
Error message Description
om
D DELETE ERROR Deletion a file from flash memory has failed.
If subsequent retry of deletion also fails, the flash memory may be dam-
aged. In such a case, replace the F–ROM module.
DEVICE ERROR (CNC x) Write to flash memory has failed. Turn off the power and retry. If write still
fails, the flash memory may be damaged. In such a case, replace the
F–ROM module.
r.c
F FILE SAVE ERROR. Writing of a file to the memory card has failed. Check that the memory card
is normal (Note 1).
FLASH MEMORY NO SPACE The available flash memory is insufficient to enable writing of the selected
file. Replace the F–ROM module with another having greater available
capacity.
e
FORMAT ERROR. Formatting of the memory card has failed. The memory card type is invalid.
(Only SRAM memory cards can be formatted. Flash memory cards cannot
be formatted. )
L
I ILLEGAL FORMAT FILE
INCORRECT PASSWORD
LOADING ERROR.
nt The selected file is of an unsupported format.
The entered password is incorrect. Enter the correct password.
An error occurred during loading of a file to flash memory. Do not touch the
ce
memory card while loading a file.
M MAX EXTENSION OVER. The maximum file name extension (031) has been reached. Delete any
unnecessary files from the memory card.
MEMORY CARD BATTERY ALARM. The memory cardG s battery has failed. Replace the battery.
nc
MEMORY CARD FULL. The memory card is full. Delete any unnecessary files from the memory
card.
MEMORY CARD MOUNT ERROR. Access to the memory card has failed. Check that the memory card is nor-
mal (Note 1).
MEMORY CARD NOT EXIST. No memory card is inserted into the slot.
.c
Alternatively, the mounted memory card has not been pushed fully home.
MEMORY CARD PROTECTED. Write to the memory card has been specified but the write protect switch
is set. Disable the write protect switch.
w
MEMORY CARD RESET ERROR. Access to the memory card has failed. Check that the memory card is nor-
mal (Note 1).
MEMORY CARD WRITE ERROR. Writing of a file to the memory card has failed. Check that the memory card
w
SRAM DATA RESTORE ERROR. Restoring of backup data to SRAM has failed. Determine whether the
backup data has been corrupted by, for example, checking the file size.
SRAM256K. * NOT FOUND. No backup file for the 256KB SRAM is found. A backup file is necessary
to restore the contents of SRAM.
SRAM512K. * NOT FOUND. No backup file for the 512KB SRAM is found. A backup file is necessary
to restore the contents of SRAM.
382
B–62705EN/03 APPENDIX C. BOOT SYSTEM
NOTE
1 Check that the memory card is correctly inserted into its slot.
Check that the memory card is compatible with the system
monitor function and that it has been normally formatted.
Check whether the battery in the memory card has failed or
whether any electrical damage has been caused to the card.
2 When an SRAM parity error is detected in SRAM backup
during booting
All CNCs are delivered with no parity errors after the SRAM
areas are factory–cleared. A parity error may occur in the
om
SRAM area, however, if the CNC is subjected to physical
shock in transit or if the backup battery is exhausted if the CNC
is left unused for one year or longer. The data retained in the
SRAM area in which a parity error is detected may be
adversely affected. The CNC, however, may not use the
r.c
whole SRAM area. The CNC does not detect a parity error
before it accesses the corresponding area. The CNC may
operate normally if a parity error occurs in an area which the
CNC does not access. The boot SRAM backup function,
however, reads the entire SRAM area. The function may
e
detect a parity error during backup while the CNC is operating
normally. Strictly speaking, if this occurs, the SRAM data of the
nt
CNC is adversely affected, and the boot SRAM backup
function cannot backup the data. Meanwhile, the CNC may
still be operating normally. The recommended procedure
involves backing up the necessary data, using a Floppy
ce
Cassette or Handy File, clearing all the data, and restoring the
backup data to the CNC. Once all the data has been cleared,
the parity error is eliminated. Then, the boot SRAM backup
function can be used.
nc
.c
w
w
w
383
D. MEMORY CARD OPERATOR’S
D. MANUAL APPENDIX B–62705EN/03
om
e r.c
nt
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w
384
D. MEMORY CARD OPERATOR’S
B–62705EN/03 APPENDIX MANUAL
D.1 It is possible to backup the mocro file and ladder program in the flash
memory module of CNC, and the SRAM area in the CNC to the flash
OUTLINE memory card by using this function.
This functions is available in the following software series/edition
D In case of Series 21/210–MB (DDA1 series) and Series 21/210–TB
(Control unit B) (DEA1 series) Boot function software (60M2/03
edition or later)is required.
D In case of Series 21–TB (Control unit A) (DE01 or DE02 series)
System software includes Boot function software.
System software (DE01/08 edition or later)
om
D In case of Series 21–MB (D201 series)
Boot function software (60M0/09 edition or later) is required.
The restrictions of this function are explained at the following.
e r.c
nt
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w
385
D. MEMORY CARD OPERATOR’S
D. MANUAL APPENDIX B–62705EN/03
D.2 At present, the writing method of chip (flash memory) wich is built in
flash memory card is different. The method is depends on the maker and
DISTINCTION OF the product. Therefore, it is difficult to correspond to all flash memory
SUPPORTED CARD card. The following kinds of flash memory card which Intel made are
AND UNSUPPORTED supported at this time.
CARD D Intel Series 2 flash memory cards (or compatible cards.)
It is impossible to write the flash memory card, in which the flash
memories expect Intel are used for a built–in chip, by BOOT SYSTEM.
It is possible to read unsupported flash memory card which is
formatted/written with personal computer by BOOT SYSTEM.
om
e r.c
nt
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w
386
D. MEMORY CARD OPERATOR’S
B–62705EN/03 APPENDIX MANUAL
D.3
RESTRICTIONS
om
In all the Memory Cards conformed to PC CARD STANDARD,
if the Memory Card supports Vcc (Power supply voltage)
values of 3.3V, you can not use it for these CNCs.
D Memory Card supports 3.3V
The Memory Card doesn’t physically fit into the socket on
r.c
the CNC.
D Memory Card supports both 3.3V and 5V. (Automatic
voltage sense type)
The Memory Card fits into the socket physically. But it is
e
not sllowed the insertion with the socket electrically. If
nt such a card is inserted and then power–up, the Memory
Card or CNC may take electrical damage. Don’t use this
type Memory Card for these CNCs.
ce
D.3.2
Kind of Memory Card NAME CAPACITY SPECIFICATION NUMBER
nc
256KB A87L–0001–0150#256K
JEIDA V4.1 512KB A87L–0001–0150#512K
SRAM memory
card
ca d 1MB A87L–0001–0150#1M
.c
2MB A87L–0001–0150#2M
JEIDA V4.1
Flash memory 4MB A87L–0001–0153#4M
card
w
NOTE
Then above–mentioned capacity is the number before
w
[Example] The memory card of 1MB or more is need for storing 512KB
data.
387
D. MEMORY CARD OPERATOR’S
D. MANUAL APPENDIX B–62705EN/03
D.3.3 In BOOT SYSTEM, the memory card is formatted by the method of the
Method of Format of FAT file system. Additionally, there is a format method of the flash file
system. There is no compatibility between FAT file system and the flash
Memory Card file system, so they can not use the function of Read and List each other.
om
D.3.4 It is impossible to delete of each file individually. It is necessary to delete
File Operation in Flash the file in the entire memory card. For that, the following file operations
are impossible.
Memory Card
r.c
D To delete the file which has already exist.
D To change the file name.
D To write again with the same name.
e
D.3.5 When the flash memory card is written in BOOT SYSTEM, last 128KB
The Capacity of Flash of the flash memory card will be used as a buffer area. Therefore, the
Memory Card
nt
capacity of the flash memory card decreases 128KB.
ce
D.3.6 CardPro formats the flash memory card with the flash file system in a
Notice when Flash default setting.When you format the flash memory card with CardPro,
please format by following command.
Memory Card is
A:CPFORMAT drive:/F:FLASHFAT/NOCIS
Formatted with
nc
CardPro
D.3.7
.c
Listing files f f
with Each Company
Device
w
D.3.8
When Flash Memory RAMU–ZOU CardPro
w
388
D. MEMORY CARD OPERATOR’S
B–62705EN/03 APPENDIX MANUAL
D.3.9
Names and Function of
Memory Components
WRITE
PROTECT
SWITCH
BATTERY
CASE
om
r.c
Name Function
1 Write Protect The memory card can be protected from writing data
Switch into the memory card by setting of the write protect
switch.
e
Non Write Protect Write protect
nt
ce
2 Battery Case Incase of the SRAM memory card, the battery case
includes the battery for data backup.
The flash memory card has no battery case.
nc
.c
w
w
w
389
D. MEMORY CARD OPERATOR’S
D. MANUAL APPENDIX B–62705EN/03
D.4
OPERATING OF
MEMORY CARD
D.4.1 (1) Insert the memory card in the direction shown in the figure through
Connection of Memory the memory card insertion slot.
Card (2) The memory card cannot be inserted with wrong side, because the
memory card has insertion guides.
om
Take care the direction of the memory card.
e r.c
nt
ce
D.4.2 Pull the memory card out in the direction shown in the figure.
nc
Disconnection of
Memory Card
.c
w
w
w
390
D. MEMORY CARD OPERATOR’S
B–62705EN/03 APPENDIX MANUAL
D.5
BATTERY CHANGE
D.5.1 CR2325 or equivalent battery can be used for the SRAM memory card.
Battery
om
Drawing Number Part’s Number Battery Life
A87L–0001–0150#512K MB98A90923–20 about 6 months
A87L–0001–0150#1M MB98A91023–20 about 1 year
A87L–0001–0150#2M MB98A91123–20 about 6 months
r.c
D.5.3 (1) Pull the battery case out with pushing projection.
Procedure of Battery
e
Change
nt
ce
nc
BATTERY
CASE
w
(3) Put the battery case back in the memory card, and make sere
read/write operation.
w
391
B–62705EN/03 Index
[A] Alarm 970 (NMI Alarm in PMC Control Module),
331
A02B–0207–C020, A02B–0207–C021, Alarm 971 (NMI Alarm in SLC), 332
A02B–0207–C022, 123
Alarm 972 (NMI Alarm in Other Board), 333
A16B–2203–0180, 129
Alarm 973 (NMI Alarm by Unknown Cause), 334
AC Spindle (Analog Interface), 268
Alarm Display, 27
AC Spindle (Serial Interface), 257, 258
Alarm History Screen, 27
Action Against Noise, 170
Alarm List, 337
Address, 203
Alram 411 (Execessive Position Error During Move),
om
Address List, 204 313
Adjusting Reference Position (Dog Method), 253 Alram 416 (Disconnection Alarm), 316
Adjusting the Color Liquid Crystal Display and Associated Parameters, 256
Plasma Display, 161 Automatic Operation Cannot be Done, 284
Adjusting the Flat Display, 161 Automatic Setting of Standard Parameters, 267
r.c
Alarm 300 (Request for Reference Position Return),
302
Alarm 301 to 305 (Absolute Pulse Coder is Faulty),
303
[B]
Backing Up SRAM Data to a Memory Card and Sub-
e
Alarm 306 to 308 (Absolute Pulse Coder Battery is sequently Restoring Data from a Memory Card
Low), 304 (SRAM DATA BACKUP Screen), 378
Alarm 350 (Serial α Pulse Coder is Abnormal), 305
nt Battery, 391
Alarm 351 (Serial α Pulse Coder Communication is Battery Change, 391
Abnormal), 306
Battery Life, 391
ce
Alarm 400 (Overload), 307
BIOS Setup, 90, 96
Alarm 401 (*Drdy Signal Turned off), 309
BIOS Setup of Intelligent Terminals 1 and 2, 96
Alarm 404 and 405 (*Drdy Signal Turned on), 310
Bios Setup of the MMC–IV, 90
Alarm 410 (Excessive Position Error Amount During
nc
Alarm 749 (Serial Spindle Communication Error), 319 Cable Clamp and Shield Processing, 174
Alarm 750 (Spindle Serial Link Cannot be Started), Calculation of S Analog Voltage and Related Parame-
320 ters, 269
w
i–1
Index B–62705EN/03
[D]
om
Data Input/Output on the All IO Screen, 186 [H]
Data Sampling for Storage Type Waveform Diagnosis, Handle Operation (MPG) Cannot be Done, 282
63
Hardware, 103
Deleting a File from a Memory Card (MEMORY
CARD FILE DELETE Screen), 380 Help Function, 44
r.c
Help Screen, 19
Deleting a File from Flash Memory (SYSTEM DATA
DELETE Screen), 375 How to Begin the “Set–Up”, 91
Deletion of External Operator Messages Record, 28 How to Begin the Set–Up, 97
Details of the Set–up Items, 99 How to End the “Set–Up”, 95
e
Digital Servo, 246 How to End the Set–up, 102
How to Replace the Batteries, 150
Disconnection of Memory Card, 390
Display and Operation, 1
Display Method, 24, 44, 69, 219, 260
nt How to Replace the Modules, 146
How to Replace the Monochrome Liquid Crystal Dis-
play, 162
ce
Displaying Diagnostic Page, 46 HSSB Interface Board, 120
Displaying Servo Tuning Screen, 250
Distinction of Supported Card and Unsupported Card,
386 [I]
nc
Dogless Reference Position Setting, 255 I/O Printed Circuit Board, 113
Initial Setting Servo Parameters, 247
Input and Output of Data, 175
.c
Error Messages and Corresponding Corrective Inputting and Outputting Parameters, 192
Actions, 382 Inputting and Outputting Programs, 188
Execution Period of PMC, 218 Inputting and Outputting the Operation History Data,
w
i–2
B–62705EN/03 Index
om
[K]
Keys Used for Operation on the Set–Up Screen, 90,
96 [O]
Kind of Memory Card, 387 Offset/Setting Screen (M Series), 14
Offset/Setting Screen (T Series), 12
r.c
Operating Monitor, 69
[L] Operating of Memory Card, 390
Operation, 255
LED Display, 122
e
Operation History, 30
List of Alarm Codes, 338
Option 1 Board, 117
List of Alarms (PMC), 356
List of Maintenance Parts, 366
List of Operations, 71
nt Others, 144
Outline of Spindle Control, 258, 268
Outputting a File, Stored in Flash Memory, to a
ce
List of Signals by Each Mode, 237 Memory Card (SYSTEM DATA SAVE Screen), 376
List of Unit and Printed Circuit Board, 142 Outputting CNC Parameters, 179
Listing the Names of the Files Stored in Flash Outputting Custom Macro Common Variables, 194
Memory (SYSTEM DATA CHECK Screen), 374 Outputting Custom Macro Variable Values, 181
nc
Loading of Software, 21
Outputting Tool Compensation Amount, 181
Outputting Waveform Diagnosis Data (Storage Type),
65
w
[M]
Main PCB, 106
[P]
w
i–3
Index B–62705EN/03
Power Motion Manager, 79 Soft key transition triggered by the function key
Power Supply, 168 HELP , 19
Power Supply Printed Circuit Board, 116
Soft key transition triggered by the function key
Procedure of Battery Change, 391
MESSAGE , 19
Program Screen, 4, 6, 8, 9, 10
Soft key transition triggered by the function key
OFFSET
SETTING , 12, 14
[R] Soft key transition triggered by the function key
om
Removing, 146
POS ,3
Replace the Battery for Memory Back Up, 150
Replacing Batteries for Absolute Pulse Coder Soft key transition triggered by the function key
(α Series Servo Amplifier Module), 152 PROG (When the soft key [BG–EDT] is pressed in
Replacing Batteries for Separate Absolute Pulse all modes), 10
Coder, 152
r.c
Soft key transition triggered by the function key
Replacing the Battery for Intelligent Terminal, 155
PROG in the EDIT mode, 6
Replacing the Battery for New MMC–IV, 154
Replacing the Fan for Intelligent Terminal, 157 Soft key transition triggered by the function key
e
Replacing the Fan Motor, 156 PROG in the HNDL, JOG, or REF mode, 9
Replacing the Fan Motor for Control Unit, 156
Replacing the Fuse for LCD, 149
Replacing the Fuses, 147
nt Soft key transition triggered by the function key
PROG in the MDI mode, 8
i–4
B–62705EN/03 Index
om
When Flash Memory Card Formatted with Each Com-
Tuning S Analog Voltage (D/A Converter), 271 pany Device is Used with BOOT SYSTEM, 388
e r.c
nt
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w
i–5
Revision Record
e
· All specifications and designs
nt
are subject to change without
notice.
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w